JP6544225B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as structure, control, presentation, etc. for the purpose of improving the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-172988, A

  In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of gaming.

  The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following modes.

Launching means for launching game balls;
An entering means capable of entering a game ball which has been launched,
Passing means through which the launched game ball can pass;
The state of the ball entering means is a first state in which the game ball can not or can not enter the ball into the ball entering means, and the ball can be easily or easily entered into the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning to a second state which is a state;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery when the game ball passes through the passage means;
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery;
Distribution means for distributing the reached game balls into a plurality of routes,
A first path configured to allow the distributed gaming balls to pass through the passing means;
A second path configured such that the distributed gaming balls can not pass through the passing means;
Equipped with
The distribution means is
While distributing the reached game ball to the first route,
The game balls arriving later than the game balls distributed to the first path are distributed to the second path,
The game balls arriving after the game balls distributed to the second path are configured to be distributed to the first path,
The first and second paths are such that the distributed gaming balls can enter the ball entering means when the ball entering means is in the second state. A game machine characterized in that it is configured.

  According to the above embodiment, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine as one embodiment of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory view explaining contents of various counters used for a big hit lottery and the like. It is explanatory drawing explaining the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table memory area. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of the distribution table set to the pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for starting openings. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for through. It is a flowchart which shows normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flow chart which shows setting processing of display continuation time. It is an explanatory view showing game state transition processing. It is a flow chart which shows big winning a prize opening and closing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer processing at the time of completion | finish of open / close execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electronic component opening and closing processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly illustrating an electrical configuration of the sound emission control device and the display control device. It is a time chart which shows an example of a feeling of prior notice performed by the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the image displayed on a symbol display apparatus, when a feeling of prior notice is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows a command corresponding | compatible process. It is a flow chart which shows pending command corresponding processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a prize. It is a flowchart which shows confirmation processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for a feeling of previous notice. It is a flow chart which shows feeling-of-the-eye notice occurrence lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the presentation corresponding to a feeling of prior notice. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation | variation start. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a time chart which shows an example which makes the number of the production elements of the same contents performed a plurality of times increase with progress of time. It is a time chart which shows an example of a feeling of prior notice performed by the pachinko machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of a feeling of prior notice performed by the pachinko machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is an explanatory view explaining a display side when a feeling of anticipation notice is performed by a pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment. It is a time chart which shows an example of a feeling of prior notice performed by the pachinko machine of a 4th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the process performed in the main control apparatus of a pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment, and an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is a time chart which shows an example of the notice of a feeling of anticipation performed by the pachinko machine of a 6th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow in case a pachinko machine selects button production XA as a production | presentation element for a feeling of prior notice, and performs the said button production XA twice. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the contents of effect modes XA1 and XA2 and a suggested effect F executed in the button effect XA. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of button production XA being performed as a production element for a feeling of previous notice. It is a flow chart which shows a flow in case a pachinko machine chooses button production XB as a production | presentation element for a feeling of prior notice, and performs the said button production XB twice. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the contents of effect modes XB1, XB2, XB3 and a suggested effect F executed in the button effect XB. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when button production | presentation XB is performed as a production | presentation element for a feeling of prior notice. It is a flowchart which shows a flow in case a pachinko machine selects button production XC as a production | presentation element for a feeling of prior notice, and performs the said button production XC twice. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the contents of effect modes XC1 and XC2 and a suggested effect F executed in the button effect XC. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process when button production XC is performed as a production | presentation element for a feeling of prior notice. It is a flowchart which shows a flow in case a pachinko machine selects button production XA as a production | presentation element for a feeling of prior notice, and performs the said button production XD twice. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the contents of an effect selection screen XD1, an effect aspect XD2 and an indication effect F executed in the button effect XD. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of button production XD being performed as a production element for a feeling of previous notice. It is a flow chart which shows a flow in case a pachinko machine chooses button production XE as a production | presentation element for a feeling of prior notice, and performs the said button production XE twice. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the contents of an effect selection screen XE1, an effect aspect XE2 and an indication effect F executed in the button effect XE. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of button production XE being performed as a production | presentation element for a feeling of prior notice. It is a flowchart which shows the flow in case a pachinko machine selects button production XF as a production | presentation element for a feeling of prior notice, and performs the said button production XF twice. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the contents of effect modes XF1 and XF2 and a suggested effect F executed in the button effect XF. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of button production XF being performed as a production element for a feeling of previous notice. It is a flowchart which shows a flow in case a pachinko machine selects button production XG as a production | presentation element for a feeling of prior notice, and performs the said button production XA twice. FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the contents of effect modes XG1 and XG2 and a suggested effect F executed in the button effect XG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of button production XG being performed as a production element for a feeling of previous notice. It is a flowchart which shows a flow in case a pachinko machine selects button production XH as a production | presentation element for a feeling of prior notice, and performs the said button production XH twice. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the contents of effect modes XH1, XH2, XH3 and a suggested effect F executed in the button effect XH. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of button production XH being performed as a production | presentation element for a feeling of prior notice. It is explanatory drawing which shows the game board of the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd starting opening unit with which the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment is provided. It is an explanatory view showing the behavior of the 2nd starting opening unit when the 1st high frequency support mode is performed. It is an explanatory view showing the behavior of the 2nd starting opening unit when the 2nd high frequency support mode is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for starting openings performed by a pachinko machine of an 8th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer processing at the time of completion | finish of opening / closing execution mode performed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the electronic-support combination performed by the pachinko machine of 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows electric switch opening and closing processing performed by a pachinko machine of an 8th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd starting opening unit with which the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment is provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the locus | trajectory of a game ball in, when a game ball enters the 2nd starting opening unit with which the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment is equipped. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize processing for starting openings performed by a pachinko machine of a 9th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer processing at the time of completion | finish of opening / closing execution mode performed by the pachinko machine of 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows electric switch opening and closing processing performed by a pachinko machine of a 9th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the other example of a structure of a 2nd starting opening unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows concretely the other example of a structure of a 2nd starting opening unit. In a pachinko machine of a 10th embodiment, it is an explanatory view showing behavior of the 2nd starting opening unit when winning a first kind electric power company opening. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening-and-closing door in, when winning a first type electric pole opening while showing a timing which a game ball reaches a through gate and opening and closing a ball entering device. In a pachinko machine of a 10th embodiment, it is an explanatory view showing behavior of the 2nd starting opening unit when winning a second kind electric power company opening. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening-and-closing door in, when a game ball shows the timing which arrived at the through gate and opening-and-closing entering device, and was elected by the 2nd type electric combination opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer processing at the time of completion | finish of opening / closing execution mode performed by the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the electronic-combinations support performed by the pachinko machine of 10th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows electric switch opening and closing processing performed by a pachinko machine of a 10th embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening-and-closing door in the 1st high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of an 11th embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening-and-closing door in the 2nd high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of an 11th embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening-and-closing door in the 3rd high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of an 11th embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening-and-closing door in the low frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of an 11th embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening-and-closing door in, when the change time of a drawing unit is set to 0.95 second in the high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of a 13th embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening-and-closing door in, when the fluctuation time of the drawing unit is set to 0.25 second in the high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of a 13th embodiment performs. It is a timing chart which shows the control mode of the opening-and-closing door in, when the change time of a drawing unit is set to 0.05 second in the high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of a 13th embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation | variation time table for high frequency support modes in the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically increase / decrease in the game ball of a player's hand in the high frequency support mode which the pachinko machine of 13th Embodiment performs.

Embodiments of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Structure of gaming machine:
A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
A3. Various processes executed in main controller:
A4. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
A5. Notice of a feeling of sight:
A5-1. Summary of the notice of the feeling of sight:
A5-2. Control pertaining to the notice of feeling of sight:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth Embodiment:
E. Fifth embodiment:
F. Sixth embodiment:
G. Seventh embodiment:
H. Eighth embodiment:
I. Ninth embodiment:
J. Tenth embodiment:
K. Eleventh embodiment:
L. Twelfth embodiment:
M. Thirteenth embodiment:
N. Modification:
O. About the invention group extracted from each said embodiment:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Structure of gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) according to an embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a wooden outer frame 11 combined into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 further includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 disposed on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine body 12, such as a main control device, an audio light emission control device, a display control device, etc., are disposed. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 against the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable and a function of locking the front door frame 14 against the inner frame 13 so as not to be openable. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  An open window 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric decoration parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. An electric decoration part is comprised by the light emission means which consists of various lamps, such as LED. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the rendering effect by lighting up or flashing at each game play, jackpot win, reach occurrence, etc. performed by the pachinko machine 10. Further, on the back side of the front door frame 14, a glass unit 19 made of two glass sheets is disposed, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board to be described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and the player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface, and stores gaming balls such as a lending ball lent out from a lending machine not shown and a prize ball discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to the game ball emission mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front of the game board. The lower plate 21 is disposed below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. The lower tray 21 stores gaming balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 20. At the bottom of the lower tray 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the closed state and the open state of the discharge port 22 by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the gaming ball falls from the discharge port 22, and the gaming ball is discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

  In front of the peripheral portion of the upper tray 20, a rendering operation button 24 as an operation receiving unit is provided. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation on the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in a front view. When the player operates the operation handle 25, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, there are a touch sensor for permitting driving of the game ball launch mechanism, a weight button for stopping the game ball launch by the game ball launch mechanism by pressing operation by the player, and rotation of the operation handle 25. A variable resistor is provided to detect the amount of movement operation based on a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. The game ball is fired from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

  Next, the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is disposed on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanisms are provided on the back of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function to control the main control of the game and a function to monitor the power supply. The main control substrate is accommodated in a substrate box made of a transparent resin material.

  The second control unit 52 includes an audio light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The sound emission control device 90 controls light emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays a symbol and an image for effect.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a emission control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control to pay out the winning balls. When an instruction to launch a game ball is input from the main control device 60, the shot control device 80 plays the game ball so as to launch a game ball whose strength corresponds to the amount of pivotal operation of the operation handle 25 by the player. Control the ball launch mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, the game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 54, slope connected to the lower side of the tank 54 and gently sloping so that the game balls flow downstream. The tank rails 55 having the above, the case rails 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rails 55, and the supply of gaming balls from the case rails 56 receive a predetermined number of gaming balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70 A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the dispensing device 71, are provided.

  Next, the game board will be described. The game board is removably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area GA is formed on the front thereof. An inner rail portion 31 a and an outer rail portion 31 b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area GA. Between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b, a guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed. The game balls fired from the game ball launch mechanism are guided by the guide rails 31 and released to the top of the game area GA, and then flow down the game area GA. In the game area GA, a plurality of nails 42 are implanted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various features such as a windmill are disposed. The nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area GA.

  The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. In each opening, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display unit 45. The main display unit 45 has a special drawing unit 37, a drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  As illustrated, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening 32, ten gaming balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as a winning ball.

  The first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 are both open upward, and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction such that the first starting opening 33 is above the second starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 33, three gaming balls are paid out as winning balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with a motorized accessory 34a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the motorized accessory 34a is in the closed state, the gaming ball can not win the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when the motorized role thing 34a is in the open state, the gaming ball can win a prize in the second starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 34, four game balls are paid out as winning balls. In addition, an out port 43 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 30, and game balls that have not won prizes in various winning ports are discharged from the game area GA through the out port 43.

  The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the longitudinal direction. When the gaming ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the gaming ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric combination opening lottery) using the winning as a trigger. As a result of the internal lottery, when the winning combination is won, the electric combination 34a shifts to the open condition in which the electric combination is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed on the upstream side of the second starting opening 34 in the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area GA after winning. It is possible to win a prize at the starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, even if a game ball is won in the through gate 35, the payout of the winning ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 has a large winning opening 36a communicating with the back side of the gaming board 30, and an open / close door 36b for opening and closing the large winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball can not win the large winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big hit lottery) by the main control unit 60, when the jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the open / close door 36b repeats the open state where the gaming ball can win and the closed state. In the open / close execution mode, the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 shifts as a result of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60 when the big hit is won, and the open / close door 36b is opened. In this mode, the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode in which winning of the variable winning device 36 to the big winning opening 36a is possible. Similarly, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 34, also when the jackpot is won, it shifts to the open / close execution mode in which winning of the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible. In the present embodiment, when the gaming ball wins the big winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 gaming balls as a winning ball.

  The special drawing unit 37 includes a first result display unit 37a and a second result display unit 37b. Each of the first result display unit 37 a and the second result display unit 37 b is configured of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. The first result display unit 37a performs variable display or display as a display mode until the display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the segment display when a big hit lottery is triggered by the winning of the first start opening 33 as a trigger. Make a predetermined display. When the lottery is completed, the first result display unit 37a causes the segment indicator to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. The second result display unit 37b performs variable display or display as a display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the segment display when a big hit lottery is triggered by the winning of the second start port 34 as a trigger. Make a predetermined display. When the lottery is finished, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display unit 37c and a second hold display unit 37d formed of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having won the first starting opening 33 are held. The first hold display unit 37c displays the number of first start ports 33 to be held according to the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lighted. Also, in the present embodiment, up to four gaming balls having won the second starting opening 34 are held. The second hold display unit 37 d displays the number of held second starting ports 34 according to the color and the combination of the LED lamps to be lighted.

  The drawing unit 38 is configured by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the motor-operated combination open lottery is triggered by the winning on the through gate 35, the drawing unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to turn on, blink, or display a predetermined mode as a display mode of the light-emitting display. When the motorized combination opening lottery ends, the drawing unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. The special drawing unit 37 and the drawing unit 38 are not limited to being configured by a light emitting display by a segment display or an LED lamp, for example, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a CRT or a dot matrix display For example, it may be configured by various display devices capable of showing a lottery and a lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is constituted by a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games generated in the opening / closing execution mode or displays corresponding to it. A round game is an open / close door until either a predetermined upper limit continuation time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of gaming balls wins the variable winning device 36 is satisfied. It is a game which continues the open state of 36b. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended and a new game cycle is started.

  The variable display unit 40 is disposed substantially at the center of the game area GA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display. The display control device 100 controls the display content of the symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  When the first result display unit 37a performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning on the first starting opening 33, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. Further, when the second result display unit 37b performs the variable display or the predetermined display based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, the symbol display device 41 performs the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol accordingly. . The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the display effect triggered by the winning of the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, but also performs a display effect in the open / close execution mode to be shifted when a big hit is won. Hereinafter, the details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view showing a symbol and a display surface 41 a which is variably displayed in the symbol display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory view showing a symbol variably displayed in the symbol display device 41. FIG. As shown to Fig.4 (a), the symbol display apparatus 41 is fluctuated and displayed the symbol which shows 1-8 of a number. In addition, you may employ | adopt the symbol in which symbols, such as a character, were attached | subjected to each symbol which shows 1-8 of a number as a symbol by which a variable display is carried out.

  FIG.4 (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the display surface 41a of the symbol display apparatus 41. FIG. As shown in the figure, on the display surface 41a, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol row has periodicity from the top to the bottom or from the bottom A variable display that scrolls up is performed. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol is displayed in a state of being stopped on the effective line L for each symbol row. Specifically, when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled changes from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol row Z1, the symbol row Z3 and the symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the variation display of the symbol is finished and the stop display is made, and if the result of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60 is a big hit, the predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is on the effective line L It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the effective line L.

  In the present specification, once in the game play, the first start opening 33 or the second start opening in either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b and the symbol display device 41. A period from when the variable display is started based on any of the winnings of 34, to when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and the next variable display is started. In addition, the time required for one game play is also referred to as a display continuation time. The display continuation time is the time from when the variable display is started until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and after the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation of the next game time is started It is composed of the stop display time which is the time until In addition, the aspect of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of the variation display of symbols in the symbol rows, the symbols of each symbol row The aspect of the variable display of symbols, such as number, can adopt various aspects.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a first hold display area Ds1 and a second hold display area Ds2 are displayed. In the first suspension display area Ds1, the number of suspension based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, the number of hold based on the winning on the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of game balls reserved in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is up to four.

A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the present description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around the main control device 60, and includes an audio light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 is provided with a main control board 61 which controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by an element having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 as a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. The MPU 62 further includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have some of the functions of the MPU 62. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. To the input side of the MPU 62, various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected. The MPU 62 receives the supply of stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operation power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the MPU 62 is provided with a plurality of winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 as various detecting sensors 67a to 67e. A determination is made as to whether or not gaming balls, which are connected to the detection sensor and flow down the gaming area GA during the game, have won in each winning opening. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the winnings on the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and executes an electric combination opening lottery based on the winning on the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 62, a variable winning drive 36c for opening and closing the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric combination drive 34b for opening and closing the electric combination 34a of the second start port 34, and main display The unit 45 is connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various driving units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36 c such that the open / close door 36 b is opened or closed. Further, when the electric combination is opened as a result of the electric combination release lottery, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34 b such that the electric combination 34 a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Execute display control of.

  Further, on the transmission side of the MPU 62, a payout control device 70 and an audio emission control device 90 are connected. For example, a winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the result of the winning determination. When main controller 60 transmits a prize ball command, MPU 62 refers to command information storage area 63 f of ROM 63. Specifically, when a winning in the general winning opening 32 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of ten gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and a winning in the first starting opening 33 is specified. In the case of winning, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the three gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a winning on the second starting opening 34 is specified, the payout of one gaming ball is dealt. A prize ball command is transmitted from main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the winning ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the winning balls. A launch control device 80 is connected to the payout control device 70. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are satisfied.

  The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63 f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, based on various commands received from the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90 controls driving of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs disposed on the front door frame 14, and controls driving of the speaker 46. And control the display control apparatus 100. In addition, when the rendering operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90 and the rendering operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game rendering reflecting the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100 and the like.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90. Specifically, based on various commands received from the sound emission control device 90, the display control device 100 grasps the display duration time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed. At the same time, it grasps the presence or absence of the reach, the content of the reach effect, the content of the notice effect to be executed in each game time, and the like.
The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of various counters used for the jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery, setting of display of the main display unit 45, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a big hit random number counter C1 is used for the big hit lottery, and a big hit type counter C2 is used when determining a big hit type such as a probability variation big hit result or a normal big hit result, a symbol to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach lottery whether or not the reach is to be generated when changing out of the column, and the random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the display continuation time in the first result display unit 37 a and the second result display unit 37 b of the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 41, the fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, the electric combination opening counter C4 is used for the electric combination opening lottery of whether or not the electric combination 34a of the second starting opening 34 is to be opened.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  The RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b. The pending information storage area 64b is configured of a first result display unit pending area Ra, a second result display unit pending area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total pending number storage area. When the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 sequentially, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the winning timing are chronologically stored in the holding information storage area 64b. Stored in

  Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the big hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the large hitting random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display area Ra for holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the gaming ball has won in the first starting hole 33, and the second starting opening It is stored in the second result display area reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b at the timing when the gaming ball wins in 34. The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored as a yes / no table in the yes / no table storage area 63 a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory view for explaining the success / failure table stored in the success / failure table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode and a high probability mode are set as a lottery mode of the jackpot lottery. FIG. 7A shows a yes / no table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B shows a yes / no table for the high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7A, under the gaming state in which the win / fail table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers for jackpot win is two. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, under the gaming state in which the success or failure table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery, the number of random numbers for jackpot win is 21. Further, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot winning in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot winning in the high probability mode. The number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary as long as the probability of winning in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 29 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. More specifically, the game ball is stored in the first result display area reserve area Ra of the hold information storage area 64b (RAM 64) at the timing when the game ball is won in the first start opening 33, and the game ball is won in the second start opening 34 At the timing, it is stored in the second result display area reserve area Rb of the reserve information storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, plural types of jackpots can be set by providing differences between the following three modes or modes.
(1) Aspect of opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening and closing execution mode (3) of the motorized handpiece 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the end of the opening and closing execution mode Support mode

  In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) opening and closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winning on the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode. The high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode can be set so as to be relatively high and low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the open / close door 36b is opened and closed 15 times from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one open is performed until 30 seconds elapse or the number of winnings on the open / close door 36b is 10 It can be set to continue until it reaches one. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the open / close door 36b is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode, and one open is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings on the open / close door 36b Can be set to continue until there are six.

  When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball emission mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is emitted toward the game area GA in 0.6 sec. In the case of the above-mentioned specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the open / close door 36b is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the open time of the open / close door 36b is shorter than the firing cycle of the game balls. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, winning of the gaming ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the game ball may be set to be awarded.

  The number of times of opening and closing of the open / close door 36b, the open limit time for one open, and the open limit number for one open are winnings on the variable winning device 36 between the start and the end of the open / close execution mode. The open mode of the open / close door 36b is optional as long as the occurrence frequency of is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a greater number of opening and closing times, a longer opening limit time for one opening, or a larger number of opening limits for one opening than the low frequency winning mode. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, substantially no winning on the variable winning device 36 may occur.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of lottery mode of the big hit lottery after the (2) opening and closing execution mode ends, a probability change lottery mode in which a big hit lottery is performed using a high probability use failure table as a success or failure table A normal lottery mode for performing a jackpot lottery can be set using a low probability success or failure table. As described with reference to FIG. 7, in the case of performing the jackpot lottery using the high probability success or failure table, the jackpot is won in comparison to the case of performing the big hit lottery using the low probability success or failure table. The probability of doing is high.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the motorized role 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening and closing execution mode ends, the firing of the gaming ball continues in the same manner to the gaming area GA In the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode so that the frequency at which the motorized part 34a of the second starting port 34 is opened per unit time is relatively high and low when compared in the situation where Can be set.

  Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the winning combination in the electric combination opening lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same, but in the high frequency support mode In the low frequency support mode, the number of times the motorized accessory 34a is in the open state may be set more frequently when the electronic winning combination is won, and one open time may be set longer. In the high frequency support mode, when the opening is elected and the open state of the motorized accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is , May be set shorter than one open time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum securing time for setting the next electric combination opening lottery after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed is set shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of the winning of the second starting opening 34 is higher than that in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the first start port 33 is higher than that of the second start port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second start port 33 is the second start. There is a high probability that a winning on the mouth 34 will occur. In the case of a high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the ball much because a payout of a predetermined number of game balls is executed when a winning on the second starting opening 34 occurs. Can.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency with which the high frequency support mode is to be in the open state per unit time rather than the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and, for example, The probability of winning the winning combination may be increased. In addition, in the configuration in which a plurality of types of securing time are secured in which the next electric combination opening lottery is performed after one electric combination opening lottery is performed, the low frequency is set in the high frequency support mode. It may be set so that a short securing time may be easily selected or the average securing time may be shorter than the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is extended, and the securing time secured upon the next electric combination opening lottery being performed after the one electric combination opening lottery is performed (i.e., shorter) Apply one or any combination of the following conditions: one display duration time in the drawing unit 38), the average time of the securing time is shortened, and the winning probability is increased. May enhance the advantage of the frequent support mode over the low frequency support mode.

  As described above, it is possible to set multiple types of jackpots for the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the plurality of jackpot types. The distribution destination of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63 as a distribution table.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory view for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first result display unit, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second result display unit.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first result display unit in FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 8R normal big hit, 16R normal big hit, 8R as a jackpot type based on the first start port 33. Certainly variable jackpot, 16R certainty variable jackpot is set. In the 8R normal jackpot and 16R normal jackpot, the mode of the open / close control of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is the high frequency win mode, the success or failure lottery mode after the open / close execution mode is the low probability mode, the open / close execution mode After the end of the support mode is a jackpot that becomes a frequent support mode. The high frequency support mode in the 8R normal jackpot and the 16R normal jackpot shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the transition to the high frequency support mode.

  In the 8R probability variation big hit and the 16R probability variation big hit, the mode of the open / close control of the variable winning device 36 in the open / close execution mode is the high frequency win mode, the success / failure lottery mode after the end of the open / close execution mode is the high probability mode, the open / close execution mode After the end of the support mode is a jackpot that becomes a frequent support mode. The high frequency support mode at 8R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot continues until the next jackpot win.

  In the distribution table for the first result display unit, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 5" corresponds to 8R normal big hit, and "6 to 8" is 16R normal "9 to 23" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspect of the jackpot is diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is highest for the 16R probability variation jackpot, next highest for the 8R probability variation jackpot, then 16R normal jackpot, and finally 8R normal jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, and attention to the game can be increased.

  Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second result display unit in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 8R normal jackpot, 16R normal as a jackpot type based on the second start port 34. Jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot is set. In the distribution table for the second result display unit, among the values of the big hit type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 2" corresponds to 8R normal big hit, and "3 to 8" is 16 R normal It corresponds to the jackpot, "9 to 14" corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and "15 to 29" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution mode of the type of jackpot when the jackpot is won is the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, and the second This is different from the case where the jackpot is won based on the winning of the starting opening 34.

  On the other hand, in either of the distribution table for the first result display unit and the distribution table for the second result display unit, the probability of being allocated to the probability variation jackpot when the big hit is won is the same. That is, both in the distribution table for the first result display unit and in the distribution table for the second result display unit, the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 assigned to the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot are assigned The number obtained by totaling the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 that has been set is 21 in all cases. However, the probability of occurrence of the 16R probability variation jackpot having the highest degree of advantage for the player among the probability variation jackpots is the direction to the first starting opening 33 when the jackpot is won based on the winning to the second starting opening 34. Higher than if you win a jackpot based on the winnings.

  As described above, the distribution mode of the jackpot types of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 has a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player plays a game while expecting the winning of the second starting opening 34 among the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 to occur. If the result is out in the success or failure lottery, there is no transition to the open / close execution mode, and no change in the success or failure lottery mode or the support mode occurs.

  As described above, the MPU 62 carries out a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and uses the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to perform the jackpot type The MPU 62 further determines the stop result of the symbols displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b using the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the value of the big hit type counter C2 Decide. In the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, the details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display area holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 33, and the gaming ball is in the second starting opening 34 The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second result display holding area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing of winning. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first result display area reserve area Ra or the second result display area reserve area Rb moves to the execution area AE, and then the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. The table is compared with the reach determination table stored in the table to determine whether to generate a reach. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot is won and the mode is shifted to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  The reach means that there is a possibility that a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit may be established for some symbol rows among a plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It is displayed, and refers to the display state in which the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of the symbol corresponding to big hit means the combination of the same symbol in a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4 (b), first, the symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z3 to form a reach line. In the situation in which the said reach line is formed, it becomes reach by performing the change display of a symbol in symbol row Z2. When a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the symbol column Z2.

  Also, for reach, while reach line is formed, while performing fluctuation display of symbols in the remaining symbol rows, and performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, There is a method of performing reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image over substantially the entire display surface 41a after reducing or non-displaying a combination of symbols on which a reach line is formed. In addition, when reach effect is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether the advance display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character is to be performed using the reach random number counter C3 or another counter. May be

  Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198 and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the display continuation time in the first result display unit 37 a and the second result display unit 37 b and the display continuation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once each time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of the start of the fluctuation display in the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b and the determination of the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. In determining the display continuation time in the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b, the display continuation time table stored in the display continuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

  Next, the details of the motor-operated product release counter C4 will be described. The motor-operated combination release counter C4 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 249, for example, and returned to zero after reaching the maximum value. The motorized jack release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold combination area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the motorized jack 34a is to be controlled to the open state using the value of the stored motorized jack release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the motorized accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the motorized accessory 34a is controlled to be in the closed state.

  The combination of one set of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first result display holding area Ra corresponds to the hold information related to the first starting opening 33, 2 A combination of one set of big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 stored in the hold area Rb for result display unit corresponds to the hold information related to the second starting port 34, and these hold information Is equivalent to the special information in the present invention.

A3. Various processes executed in main controller:
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 in order to advance each game will be described. The MPU 62 executes NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of a power failure signal in addition to timer interrupt processing and normal processing, but the description of these processing is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, 2 msec cycle) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S101, reading processing of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main control device 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S103.

  In step S103, update of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric combination release counter C4 is executed. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the motorized combination release counter C4, and when their respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S104.

  In step S104, the winning opening process for the starting opening accompanying the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the winning process for the starting opening in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, a winning process for through is accompanied by the winning of the through gate 35. Details of the through winning process of step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Prize process for starting opening>
Next, winning processing for the starting opening will be described. The winning process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 9: S104) of the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a winning process for the starting opening. In step S201, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won the first start hole 33 (start winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first start hole 33. In step S201, when it is determined that the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, and a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three gaming balls Set Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S203.

  In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed to signal that the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 33 to the management control device on the gaming hall side. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In step S204, the start pending number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as a first start pending number RaN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the first result display portion pending area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN is set as a target of processing described later. The first starting reservation number RaN indicates the number of holdings based on the winning on the first starting opening 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S201, when it is determined that the gaming ball is not winning in the first starting opening 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, and is the gaming ball winning in the second starting opening 34 (start winning) It is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second start port 34 whether or not it is not.

  In step S205, when it is determined that the gaming ball has won the second starting opening 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a winning ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four gaming balls Set Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S205 that the gaming ball has not won the second starting opening 34 (S205: NO), the winning processing for the main starting opening is ended.

  In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second starting opening 34 as a signal. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S208.

  In step S208, the start pending number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as a second start pending number RbN), which is a value stored in the pending number storage area of the second result display section pending area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN is set as a target of processing described later. The second starting reservation number RbN indicates the number of holdings based on the winning on the second starting opening 34. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether or not the start reservation pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S204 or step S208 described above is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). In step S209, when the start reservation number N is not less than the upper limit (S209: NO), the winning process for the starting opening is ended. On the other hand, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit in step S209 (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, and 1 is added to the start pending number N for the corresponding result display pending area. Proceeding to step S211, 1 is added to the value stored in the total pending count storage area (hereinafter referred to as the total pending count CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the sum of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S212.

  In step S212, each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding result display holding area, ie, step It stores in the storage area corresponding to the number of holdings which added 1 in S210. Specifically, when the first start reservation number RaN is set as the processing target, each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is The first storage area of the free storage areas of the 1 result display area reserve area Ra, ie, the storage area corresponding to the first start reserve number RaN to which 1 is added in step S210, is stored. In addition, when the second start reservation number RbN is set as a processing target, each value of the big hit random number counter C1, big hit type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 is displayed as a second result The storage area corresponding to the first storage area among the free storage areas of the group storage area Rb, that is, the second start reservation number RbN obtained by adding 1 in step S210, is stored. After executing step S212, the process proceeds to step S213.

  In step S213, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, information (hold information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the hold command. Thereafter, the winning process for the starting opening is ended. The hold command indicates that the winning of the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 has occurred and the hold information acquired based on the winning is the control device of the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device which are sub-sides. In addition to making it recognized in 100, whether or not the suspension information pertaining to the current prize corresponds to the jackpot, which type of jackpot it corresponds to when the jackpot is supported, or the reach occurrence is supported It is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to confirm whether or not the pending information is to be the target of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402) of the normal process described later, and the voice emission control device 90 having received the hold command performs the confirmation process described later (FIG. 27: At step S1602, FIG. 29), whether or not the hold information pertaining to the current prize corresponds to the jackpot, and if it corresponds to the jackpot, which type of jackpot it corresponds to, corresponding to the reach occurrence It is confirmed before the hold information concerned becomes a target of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60.

  Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning on the first start opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is increased in the number of hold. Is sent to the display control apparatus 100 in order to make it change according to. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning on the second start opening 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 increases the number of the hold in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. Is sent to the display control apparatus 100 in order to make it change according to. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of holdings.

  Note that the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 wins the current prize based on information (hold information) of each value of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the storage area by the current prize. Confirmation processing to confirm whether or not the suspension information pertaining to the jackpot corresponds to the jackpot, which type of jackpot it corresponds to when the jackpot is supported, the reach occurrence, etc. The same processing as the confirmation processing in step S1602 of FIG. 27 and FIG. 29 may be executed, and the result of the confirmation may be set as the hold command. In this case, the confirmation process (FIG. 27: step S 1602, FIG. 29) by the audio light emission control device 90 can be omitted.

<Through winning process>
Next, the through winning process will be described. The winning combination processing for through is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9: S105).

  FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the through winning process. In step S301, it is determined whether the gaming ball has won the through gate 35 or not. In step S301, when it is determined that the gaming ball has won the through gate 35 (S301: YES), the process proceeds to step S302, and whether or not the number of bonus items reserved SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) Determine if It should be noted that the number-of-items-reserved number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings on the through gate 35 which has been suspended for performing the electric combination opening symbol. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of bonus items held SN is four. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S301 that the game ball has not won in the through gate 35 (S301: NO), the through processing for this through is ended.

  If it is determined in step S302 that the number is less than the upper limit (less than 4) of the number of bonus holding pieces SN (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, and 1 is added to the number of pieces of bonus holding SN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S304. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S302 that the value of the number of bonus items held SN is not less than the upper limit value (S302: NO), that is, if the value of the number of bonus items held number SN is greater than or equal to the upper limit value, The winning process for the through is completed without storing the value of the motorized product release counter C4.

  In step S304, the value of the motorized product release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the first storage area of the free storage areas of the power storage area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the through processing for this through is ended.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be described. The normal processing is processing that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, main processing of the game is performed.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S401, start-up processing is performed. Specifically, initialization of each control device accompanying power on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In step S402, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of a winning ball command, and if the winning ball command is set, it sends it to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands relating to effects such as a variation command and a type command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S402, the process proceeds to step S403.

  In step S403, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S404.

  In step S404, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, game number control processing for controlling the game in each game number is executed. In the game number control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display unit 37a, and the second result display unit 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step S405, the process proceeds to step S406.

  In step S406, a game state transition process is executed to shift the game state. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state transitions to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the like. Details of the game state transition process will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S407.

  In step S <b> 407, a process for supporting the combination for driving and controlling the motorized part 34 a provided in the second starting port 34 is performed. In the electric support process, it is determined whether or not the motor-operated part 34a is in the open state. The details of the processing for electronic mail support will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S408.

  In step S408, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly, the start of the external output processing in step S402). That is, it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal processing has come. If it is determined in step S408 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S408: NO), the next normal processing execution timing is reached in steps S409 and S410. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S409, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. In step S410, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S408 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S408: YES), the process returns to step S402, and each process from step S402 to step S407 is performed. Run.

  In addition, since the execution time of each process of step S402 to step S407 changes according to the state of a game, the remaining time until it reaches the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the values of these counters can be randomly updated by repeatedly executing updating of the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using such remaining time.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game number control process will be described. The game number control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 12: S405).

  FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the game number control process. In step S501, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag is stored in the open / close execution mode flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64 e of the RAM 64. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition processing described later, and is deleted when ending the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition processing.

  In step S501, when it is determined that the open / close execution mode is in progress (S501: YES), the present game play control process is ended without executing any of the processes after step S502. That is, when in the opening / closing execution mode, the game play is not started regardless of whether or not a winning on the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 has occurred. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S501 that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S501: NO), the process proceeds to step S502.

  In step S502, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is displaying variable. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any one of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is in the variable display mode. This determination is performed by determining whether a variable display flag storage area is stored in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64 e of the RAM 64. The variation display flag is stored when variation display is started for either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, and is erased when the variation display is ended.

  In step S502, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not in the variable display (S502: NO), the process proceeds to the processing for game play start in steps S503 to S505. In step S503, it is determined whether the total pending number CRN is "0". The case where the total reserve number CRN is "0" means that the reserve number for start is "0" for any of the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. Accordingly, when it is determined in step S503 that the total number of held pieces CRN is "0" (S503: YES), the game play control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S503 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S503: NO), the process proceeds to step S504.

  In step S504, data setting processing for setting the data stored in the first result display area reserve area Ra or the second result display area reserve area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is performed, and in step S505. move on. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

  In step S505, the variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. Thereafter, the game play control process ends. The details of the change start process will be described later.

  When it is determined in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is in the variable display (S502: YES), the processing for game play progression in steps S506 to S509 is executed.

  In step S506, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game play has elapsed. As described above, the variable display time is a time from when the symbol row starts to change until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the display duration time. Specifically, in step S506, it is determined whether the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable display time information is set in a process of setting a display continuation time described later (FIG. 15: S714). The value of the set variable display time information is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

  If it is determined in step S506 that the variable display time has not elapsed (S506: NO), the process proceeds to step S507 to execute a variable display process. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode in the result display unit according to the current game run. After executing step S507, the game number control process ends.

  If it is determined in step S506 that the fluctuation display time has elapsed (S506: YES), the process proceeds to step S508, and fluctuation end processing is executed. In the fluctuation end process, the result display unit is displayed such that the form of the symbol to be displayed on the result display unit determined in the fluctuation start process (S505) described later is displayed on the result display unit according to the current game round Control. After executing step S508, the process proceeds to step S509.

  In step S509, a change end command is set. The fluctuation end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect in the game play based on the received change end command. In addition, the fluctuation end command is transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 receives the fluctuation end command to determine and display the final stop symbol in the game time (final stop Display). After executing step S509, the game number control process ends.

  The pachinko machine 10 may not be configured to use the change end command. In this case, the voice light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 measure the elapsed time from the start of the game play with a timer counter or the like, and based on the passage of a predetermined time, The effect may be ended, or the final stop symbol in the game play may be confirmed (final stop display).

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 13: S504).

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. In step S601, it is determined whether the second start pending count RbN pending stored in the second result display pending area Rb is “0”. If it is determined in step S601 that the second start reservation number RbN is "0" (S601: YES), the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S607 is executed, while If it is determined that the second start reservation number RbN is not "0" (S601: NO), the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S608 to S613 is executed.

  Here, the case where the data setting process is executed refers to the case where the total hold number CRN is 1 or more as described in FIG. 13 (see FIG. 13: S503). In this case, in the data setting process, it is determined whether or not the second start reservation number RbN is "0", and if it is not "0", that is, the suspension information for variable display is stored in the second result display unit 37b. If the first start reservation number RaN is 1 or more, the data stored in the second result display area Rb is set as the target of the data setting process. Thus, when the hold information is stored in both of the first result display unit reserved area Ra and the second result display unit reserved area Rb, the second result display unit corresponding to the second start port 34 is stored. The hold information stored in the hold area Rb is prioritized.

  In step S602, after subtracting 1 from the first start reservation number RaN of the first result display area holding area Ra, the process proceeds to step S603 to subtract 1 from the total reservation number CRN. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, the data stored in the first area of the first result display holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S605.

  In step S605, processing for shifting data stored in the storage area of the first result display holding area Ra is performed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas toward the lower area. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S605, the process proceeds to step S606.

  In step S606, if the second result display unit flag is stored in the various flag storage area 64e, the flag is erased, and if it is not stored, the state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying which of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is the target of the start of the current variable display. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S607.

  In step S607, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information that the suspension area targeted for the current data shift corresponds to the suspension area Ra for the first result display unit, that is, the first starting opening 33 The shift command including the information on that it corresponds to is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  The shift command set in step S 607 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S 402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice light emission control device 90 transmits a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings to the display control device 100 based on the received shift command. Do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

  If it is determined in step S601 that the second start reservation number RbN is not "0" (S601: NO), the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S608 to S613 is executed as described above. Do.

  In step S608, the second start reservation number RbN of the second result display area reserve area Rb is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S609. In step S609, the total pending number CRN is decremented by one, and in step S610, the data stored in the first area of the second result display area pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S611.

  In step S611, the process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display area reserve area Rb is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas toward the lower area. Specifically, the data in the first area is cleared, and the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S611, the process proceeds to step S612.

  In step S612, if the second result display area flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64e does not store the second result display area flag, the flag is stored, and if it is stored, the second result display area flag is stored. Maintain the state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S613.

  In step S613, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that data in the hold area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the hold area subject to the current data shift corresponds to the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, that is, the second starting opening 34 The shift command including the information on that it corresponds to is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. Thereafter, the data setting process is ended.

  The shift command set in step S613 is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The voice emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of held pieces based on the received shift command. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the game number control process (FIG. 13: S505).

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S701, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64 e of the RAM 64. The high probability mode flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 62 whether the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, and is stored at the end of the open / close execution mode according to the winning of the probability variation jackpot in this embodiment. It is usually erased when the jackpot is won afterward.

  In step S701, when it is determined that the success or failure lottery mode is not the high probability mode (S701: NO), the process proceeds to step S702, and the success or failure determination is performed with reference to the low / probability mode acceptance table. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the low probability mode success / failure table shown in FIG. 7A. Determine if On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that the mode is the high probability mode (S701: YES), the process proceeds to step S703, and the success / failure determination is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the high probability table for high probability mode shown in FIG. 7B. Determine if After executing step S702 or step S703, the process proceeds to step S704.

  In step S704, it is determined whether or not the result of the pass / fail determination (big hit lottery) in step S702 or step S703 is a big hit. In step S704, if the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit (S704: YES), in step S705 to step S712, in order to set the processing and stop result for setting the game result in the case of a big hit Execute the process of

  In step S 705, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 64. If it is determined in step S705 that the second result display unit flag is not stored (S705: NO), the process proceeds to step S706, and the distribution table for the first result display unit (see FIG. 8A). Perform the distribution judgment with reference to. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of 8R normal jackpot numerical range, 16R normal jackpot numerical range, 8R probability variation jackpot number range, and 16R probability variation jackpot number range Determine if it is included in

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S705 that the second result display area flag is stored (S705: YES), the process proceeds to step S707, and the distribution table for the second result display area (FIG. 8B) Perform distribution determination with reference to (see). Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of 8R normal jackpot numerical range, 16R normal jackpot numerical range, 8R probability variation jackpot number range, and 16R probability variation jackpot number range Determine if it is included in After the process of step S706 or step S707 is performed. It progresses to step S708.

  In step S708, it is determined whether the type of jackpot distributed in step S706 or step S707 is a probability variation jackpot. In step S708, when it is determined that the game result is a probability variation jackpot (S708: YES), the process proceeds to step S709.

  In step S709, the stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for the big variation is the state in which the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b displays any stop result in the current game round that will win the big variation hit It is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation big hit stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot distributed in step S706 or step S707 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S709, the process proceeds to step S710.

  In step S710, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type assigned in step S706 or step S707 is stored in the corresponding area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. Specifically, the 8R probability variation flag is stored if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, and the 15R probability variation flag is stored if it is a 15R probability variation jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S714.

  If it is determined in step S 708 that the type of jackpot allocated in step S 706 or step S 707 is not a probability variation jackpot (S 708: NO), that is, if the allocated jackpot type is normally jackpot, the process proceeds to step S 711.

  In step S711, a normal jackpot stop result setting process is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process fluctuates in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round where a normal jackpot is won. It is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the jackpot allocated in step S706 or step S707 is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S711, the process proceeds to step S712.

  In step S712, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the big hit type distributed in step S706 or step S707 is stored in the corresponding area in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64. Specifically, the 8R normal flag is stored in the case of the 8R normal jackpot, and the 15R normal flag is stored in the case of the 15R normal jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S714.

  If it is determined in step S704 that the result of the jackpot lottery in step S702 or step S703 is not a jackpot win (S704: NO), the process proceeds to step S713 to execute stop result setting processing for disconnection. The stop result setting process for out of time ends the fluctuation display in a state where any stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game round where the disconnection result is obtained. Is a process for setting the Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for disconnection at the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S713, the process proceeds to step S714.

  In step S714, processing for setting a display duration is performed. The display continuation time setting process sets the display continuation time which is the time required for the current game round in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b based on the presence or absence of the jackpot and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence. It is processing to do. Details of setting processing of the display continuation time will be described later. After performing step S714, the process proceeds to step S715.

  In step S 715, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 64. If it is determined in step S715 that the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S715: NO), the process proceeds to step S716 to set a first variation command. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game run is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning on the first starting opening 33, and the presence or absence of reach has occurred. And the information of the display continuation time set in step S714. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S715 that the second result display unit flag is stored (S715: YES), the process proceeds to step S717, and the second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game run is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, and the presence or absence of the reach occurrence And the information of the display continuation time set in step S714. After performing step S716 or step S717, the process proceeds to step S718.

  In step S718, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of the jackpot and the result of the distribution determination. That is, the type command includes, as the type information of the jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot information, 16R probability variation jackpot information, 8R regular jackpot information, 16R regular jackpot information, or information of outlier results.

  The fluctuation command and type command set in steps S716 to S718 are transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control apparatus 90 determines the content of the effect in the game turn based on the received command for variation and the type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S718, the process proceeds to step S719.

  In step S719, variation display of symbols is started on the result display unit corresponding to the current game round among the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. Specifically, when the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 64, the result display unit corresponding to the current game round is identified as the first result display unit 37a, and the variable display is started. When the second result display unit flag is stored, it is determined that the result display unit corresponding to the current game is the second result display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S719, the variation start process is ended.

<Processing for setting display duration>
Next, the process of setting the display continuation time will be described. The setting process of the display continuation time is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 15: S714) of the fluctuation start process.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing setting processing of the display continuation time. In step S801, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired and stored in the register of the MPU 62. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S802.

  In step S802, it is determined whether reach is generated in the current game run. Specifically, it is determined whether the RAM 64 stores the probability variation big hit flag or the normal big hit flag, and if any flag is stored, it is determined that the reach occurs (S802: YES ), Go to step S803. Further, even if none of the above flags is stored, reach occurs if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE corresponds to the occurrence of reach. Then, the determination is made (S802: YES), and the process proceeds to step S803. In addition, in specifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of the reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  In step S803, the display continuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to the reach generation display continuation time table stored in the display continuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S804, and the variable display time information included in the display continuation time information is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process of setting the display duration is ended.

  In step S802, when it is determined that the reach does not occur in the current game run (S802: NO), the process proceeds to step S805, and the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table stored in the display continuation time table storage area 63d. The display continuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS of this time is acquired with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S806, and the variable display time information included in the display continuation time information is set in the variable display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process of setting the display duration is ended.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the display continuation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence display continuation time table is set such that the display continuation time becomes shorter as the total number of pending reservations CRN increases. There is. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured not to depend on the number of total pending numbers CRN, and the display continuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of total pending numbers CRN is smaller. . When the second start pending number RbN is "0", the display continuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is "1" or more. In this case, the display continuation time may be set to be shorter as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases. When the second start pending number RbN is "0", the display continuation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending number RaN increases, and the second start pending number RbN is "1" or more. In this case, the display continuation time may be set longer as the number of second start reservation numbers RbN increases, or may be constant without depending on the respective hold numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, reach non-reach duration is selected so that the display duration time is shorter as compared with the situation where the number of holding information is the same than the situation where the support mode is the low frequency A generation display duration table may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected display duration may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship.

  Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the display continuation time at the time of reach occurrence, and the display continuation time that is easy to be selected and the display continuation time that is hard to be selected differ between jackpot winning time and outreach time. It is good also as composition. In addition, the display variation time table for the probability variation big hit, the display duration time table for the big win, the display duration time table for the off reach, and the display duration time table for the complete removal may be individually set. As described above, the display continuation time of each game is determined using the presence or absence of a jackpot, the presence or absence of reach, the number of suspension information, and the value of the fluctuation type counter as parameters.

<Playing state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be described. The gaming state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal processing (FIG. 12: S406).

  FIG. 17 is an explanatory view showing the game state transition process. In step S901, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in progress. In step S901, when it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S901: NO), the process proceeds to step S902, and the variation display of the symbol in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b of 1 It is determined whether it is the end timing. In step S902, when it is determined that it is not the timing at which the fluctuation display ends (S902; NO), the present gaming state transition processing is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S902 that it is the timing when the variable display is finished (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903, and the game result (the result of the jackpot lottery) of the current game round is switched to the open / close execution mode It is determined whether or not it corresponds. Specifically, it is determined whether any one of the 8R positive variation flag, the 16R positive variation flag, the 8R normal flag, and the 16R normal flag is stored in the RAM 64. If it is determined that none of the above-described flags is stored (S903: NO), the present gaming state transition processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S 903 that any of the above flags is stored (S 903: YES), the process proceeds to step S 904 to start round display processing for notifying of the type of the current opening / closing execution mode. Run. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. And based on the confirmed address information, while specifying stop result data corresponding to the said address information out of the stop result data group memorize | stored in ROM63, while specifying the content of the round count from the specified stop result data Check. Thereafter, the contents of the confirmed round number are output to the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45. Thereby, the round display unit 39 displays the information on the round related to the output. After executing step S904, the process proceeds to step S905.

  In step S905, the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode this time is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flag (16R positive change flag, 16R normal flag, 8R positive change flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 is confirmed. In step S905, when it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R positive variation flag or the 16R normal flag (S905: YES), the process proceeds to step S906, and provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the open / close door 36b is opened. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S905 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R positive variation flag or the 8R normal flag (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907 and provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Set "8" in the first round counter area RC1. After executing step S906 or step S907, the process proceeds to step S908.

  In step S908, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The opening command includes information on the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode this time. The sound emission control apparatus 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S908, the present gaming state transition processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step S901 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (S901: YES), the process proceeds to step S909, and the special winning opening / closing process is performed. Specifically, when the special winning opening 36a is closed, the large winning is achieved by setting the variable winning driving portion 36c to a driving state, on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more. Open the mouth 36a. In addition, when the special winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning drive unit on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed from the opening of the special winning opening 36a or that the opening limit number is winning. The driving state of 36c is stopped and the big winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the special winning opening opening and closing process will be described later. After executing step S909, the process proceeds to step S910.

  In step S 910, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC 1 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S910: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S910: YES), the process proceeds to step S911, and an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in step S402 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The sound emission control apparatus 90 ends the effect corresponding to the open / close execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step S911, the process proceeds to step S912.

  In step S912, transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed. The transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is a process for setting various modes of the game play after the end of the open / close execution mode this time. Details of the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described later. After executing step S912, the process proceeds to step S913.

  In step S913, the end processing of the round display is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S914, and the end processing of the open / close execution mode is executed. Specifically, if the 16R positive change flag, the 8R positive change flag, the 16 normal flag, and the 8R normal flag are stored, these flags are erased, and if these flags are not stored, the state is maintained Do. After executing step S914, the present gaming state transition processing is ended.

<Big winning opening opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening / closing process will be described. The special winning opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S909) of the gaming state transition process.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening / closing process. In step S1001, it is determined whether the big winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 36c. If it is determined in step S1001 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step S1002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1002: YES), the present special winning opening opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003.

  In step S1003, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1003: NO), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1004, and the variable winning drive portion opens the big winning opening 36a. The 36c is in the drive state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1005.

  In step S1005, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, since all the set winning modes are the high-frequency winning mode, “15000” (ie, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. If the low frequency winning mode is set to the pachinko machine 10, for example, "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" in the winning counter area PC. "" May be set. After executing step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006.

  In step S1006, an open command is set. Thereafter, the present special winning opening opening and closing process is ended. The release command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has been started. By the external output processing (FIG. 12: step S402), it is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90. The sound emission control device 90 specifies that opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started based on the received opening command, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 can be displayed as the special winning opening 36a. Update to the contents corresponding to the opening of the. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started based on the received opening command, and the effect contents in the symbol display device 41 are as follows: opening of the special winning opening 36a Update to the content corresponding to the start.

  When it is determined in step S1001 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1007, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". Do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the open continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S1007 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1007: NO), the process proceeds to step S1008.

  In step S1008, it is determined from the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not the gaming ball has won in the special winning opening 36a. If it is determined in step S1008 that no winning has occurred (S1008: NO), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1008 that a winning has occurred (S1008: YES), the process proceeds to step S1009, and the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1010.

  In step S1010, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". When it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S1010: NO), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1007 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S1007: YES), or if it is determined in step S1010 that the value of the winning counter area PC is "0" (S1010: YES), the process proceeds to step S1011 to execute the special winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable prize drive unit 36c is in a non-driven state. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1012.

  In step S1012, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1013, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step S1013 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1013: YES), the present special winning opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1013 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1013: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step S1014, the process advances to step S1015 to set a closing command. After that, the special winning opening opening and closing process ends.

The set closing command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are control devices on the sub side, to recognize that the opening of the big winning opening 36a has ended, and the normal processing In the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402), the sound emission control apparatus 90 is transmitted. The sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round is finished based on the received closing command, and the contents of the effects of the various lamps 47 and the speakers 46 are Update to the contents corresponding to the end of release. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning opening 36a for one round is finished based on the received closing command, and the effect contents in the symbol display device 41 are finished, the opening of the big winning opening 36a is finished Update to the content corresponding to what you did.
Execute processing corresponding to it.

<Migration process at the end of open / close execution mode>
Next, transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described. The transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 17: S912) of the gaming state transition process.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode. In step S1101, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to the probable variation big hit is stored in the RAM 64 as the big hit type flag. That is, it is determined whether or not the 16R positive variation flag or the 8R positive variation flag is stored in the RAM 64.

  In step S1101, when it is determined that the 16R positive variation flag or the 8R positive variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1102, and the flag deletion process is performed. The flag erasing process is a process of erasing information for specifying a gaming state. Specifically, when the open / close execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are stored, they are erased, and when these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. Do. After executing step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103.

  In step S1103, the high probability mode flag is stored, and then the process proceeds to step S1104 to store the high frequency support flag. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the game mode is shifted to the gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big hit is generated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1105.

  In step S1105, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Do. Thereafter, the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1101 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1106 to execute the flag deletion process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1107.

  In step S1107, after storing the high-frequency support flag, the process proceeds to step S1108, and "100" is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the number-of-playings counter area is a value indicating the number of playing times when the high-frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of playing times. As a result, after the open / close execution mode is ended, the game mode is shifted to the gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode. However, in this case, the high frequency support mode ends after 100 game runs are executed, and thereafter, it shifts to the normal gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode. . After step S1108 is executed, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

<Processing for telegraph support>
Next, a process for electronic mail support will be described. The processing for electronic part support is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal processing (FIG. 12: S407).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the electronic-support-support process. In step S1201, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-support flag is stored in the in-support flag storage area provided in the various-flag storage area 64 e of the RAM 64. The in-support flag is a flag that is stored when the motorized accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is in the open state, and is erased when the motor is returned to the closed state. When it is determined in step S1201 that the in-support flag is not stored (S1201: NO), the process proceeds to step S1202.

  In step S1202, it is determined whether the support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 or not. The support winning flag is a flag which is stored when an open state is won in the electric combination open lottery for determining whether the electric combination 34a is to be open or not, and is erased when the support flag is stored. . When it is determined in step S1202 that the support winning flag is not stored (S1202: NO), the process proceeds to step S1203.

  In step S1203, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the display continuation time of the drawing unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  When it is determined in step S1203 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S1203: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204.

  In step S1204, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the drawing unit 38 or not. If it is determined in step S1204 that the end timing of the variable display is reached (S1204: YES), the process advances to step S1205 to set the gap display, and then the electronic control support process ends. By setting the off-set display, the variation display of the symbols in the common drawing unit 38 is ended in the state where the off-display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1204 that the end timing of the variable display is not reached (S1204: NO), the process proceeds to step S1206.

  In step S1206, it is determined whether the value of the number of bonus items held SN is greater than "0". If it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the number of bonus items held SN is “0” (S1206: NO), the present support routine processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the number of bonus items held SN is larger than "0" (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1207, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then, in step S1208, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If it is not the open / close execution mode at step S1207 (S1207: NO) and if the high frequency support mode is at step S1208 (S1208: YES), the process proceeds to step S1209 to perform a motorized role opening lottery. Specifically, in the case where the value stored in the holding position 64c is shifted and the value of the motorized product release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the motorized product opened lottery is performed. It will be won. Further, at the same time as the motor-operated combination opening lottery, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1210.

  In step S1210, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric combination open lottery in step S1209 is support winning. If it is determined in step S1210 that the result of the motorized character opening lottery is support win (S1210: YES), the process proceeds to step S1211, stores the support win flag, and is provided in various counter areas 64d of RAM 64. Set "3" in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the motorized jack 34a has been released. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1212. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1210 that the result of the motorized combination opening lottery is not the support winning (S1210: NO), the process proceeds to step S1212 without executing the process of step S1211.

  In step S1212, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S1212 that the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1212: YES), the process proceeds to step S1213. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1212 that the success or failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S1212: NO), the electronic control support process ends.

  In step S1213, it is determined whether the number-of-games counter area is "0". In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the game number counter is decremented by one each time one game cycle is over. If it is determined in step S1213 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S1213: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1213 that the game number counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S1214, and the high frequency support flag is erased. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1215.

  In step S1215, a low frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Do. After that, the electronic mail support process ends.

  The low frequency support command set in step S1215 is transmitted to the sound emission control apparatus 90 in the external output process (FIG. 12: step S402) of the normal process. The voice emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding thereto.

  If it is determined in step S1207 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S1207: YES), or if it is determined in step S1218 that the mode is not the high frequency support mode (S1208: NO), the process proceeds to step S1216. I do. Specifically, in the case where the value stored in the holding position 64c is shifted and the value of the motorized product release counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the motorized product opened lottery is performed. It will be won. Further, at the same time as the motor-operated combination release lottery, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1217.

  In step S1217, it is determined whether the result of the electric combination open lottery in step S1216 is support winning. If it is determined in step S1217 that no support win has been made (S1217: NO), the present support for electronic assembly is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1217 that support is won (S1217: YES), the process proceeds to step S1218, stores the support winning flag, and sets "1" in the second round counter area RC2 End the process for supporting the board of directors.

  When it is determined in step S1202 that the support winning flag is stored (S1202: YES), the process proceeds to step S1219, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the display continuation time of the drawing unit 38. If it is determined in step S 1219 that the value of the second timer counter area T 2 is not “0” (S 1219: NO), this is the process of displaying for the electric wave support as it is displaying the fluctuation of the pattern in the drawing unit 38. Finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1219 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1219: YES), the process proceeds to step S1220.

  In step S1220, a hit display is set. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern in the drawing unit 38 is ended in a state where the hit display is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1221 to store the in-support flag and erase the support winning flag. After that, the processing for the electric wave support is finished.

  If it is determined in step S1201 that the in-support flag is stored (S1201: YES), the process proceeds to step S1222 to execute electric combination opening / closing processing for opening / closing control of the motorized combination 34a. After that, the processing for the electric wave support is finished.

<Electronic work opening and closing process>
Next, electronic locker opening and closing processing will be described. The electronic combination opening and closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 20: S1222) of electronic combination support processing.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the electronic combination opening and closing process. In step S1301, it is determined whether or not the motorized jack 34a is open. Whether or not the motorized accessory 34a is in the open state is determined based on whether or not the motorized symbol drive unit 34b is in the driven state. If it is determined that the motorized jack 34a is open (S1301: YES), the process proceeds to step S1302.

  In step S1302, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open continuation time of the motor-operated accessory 34a. If it is determined in step S1302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1302: NO), the present electronic combination processing is ended. That is, when the open continuation time of the motorized jack 34a has not ended, the present electric brake opening and closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1302 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303, and a closing process is performed to control the motorized prize 34a in the closed state. "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the measuring means of the open continuation time of the motorized part 34a is "0", the motorized part 34a is closed and, in this case, the second timer counter area T2 is motorized. The second timer counter area T2 is set to "250", which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a. After executing step S1303, the process proceeds to step S1304.

  In step S1304, after the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, the process proceeds to step S1305, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step S1305, when it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S1305: NO), the present electronic combination processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1305 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S1305: YES), the process proceeds to step S1306, and the in-support flag is erased. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the motorized jack 34a is not open (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1307 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the motorized accessory 34a. In step S1307, when it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1307: NO), the present electronic combination processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1307 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S1307: YES), the process proceeds to step S1308 to execute the opening process of controlling the motorized part 34a in the open state. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1309.

  In step S1309, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and if it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S1309: NO), the process proceeds to step S1310 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is Do.

  If it is determined in step S1310 that the high-frequency support mode is in progress (S1310: YES), the process proceeds to step S1311, and "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1309 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S1309: YES), or if it is determined in step S1310 that it is not the high frequency support mode (S1310: NO), the process proceeds to step S1312, and the second "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

A4. Electrical configuration of voice emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configuration of the sound emission control apparatus 90 and the display control apparatus 100 will be described.

  FIG. 22 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. As shown in FIG. Note that part of the configuration of the power supply device 85 and the like is omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the sound emission control substrate 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element in which a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables and the like. For example, in part of the area of the ROM 93, a table for holding confirmation table storage area 93a, a feeling of feeling notice occurrence table memory area 93b, a feeling of notice warning notice effect table memory area 93c, a feeling of notice warning stop symbol table memory An area 93 d, a variation display pattern table storage area 93 e, and the like are provided. Details of these will be described later.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, in a part of the area of the RAM 94, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, a lottery counter area 94c, and a notice effect storage area 94d for visual sense notice. Details of these will be described later. The fact that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 92 is not an essential configuration, and each may be configured as an individual chip.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control unit 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The main control unit 60 receives various commands. While the effect operation button 24, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, the display control device 100 is connected.

  The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is mounted. It is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 be integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 102, and each may be individually integrated into a chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control apparatus 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the various commands received, and implements control of the VDP 105 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG format image data for background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also referred to as a "drawing chip" because it is formed into an IC chip, and is a kind of microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing of data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bit map type image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table to be referred to when determining a color to be expressed in each dot of the bit map image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data etc. in a shared manner in each character ROM 106. It is also possible to store in the character ROM 106 the JPEG format image data for background image stored in the program ROM 103.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 of the main control unit 60 will also be referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63 and the main RAM 64 respectively, and the MPU 92, the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 of the sound emission control unit 90 will be the sound side MPU 92 and the sound side, respectively. Also referred to as the ROM 93 and the sound light side RAM 94, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as the display side MPU 102.

A5. Notice of a feeling of sight:
A5-1. Summary of the notice of the feeling of sight:
Next, the outline of the notice of the feeling of visual appearance executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 23 is a time chart showing an example of a feeling of prior notice performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is an explanatory view showing an example of an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 when the notice of feeling of anticipation is executed. The notice of a sense of sight refers to the player having a sense of sight (dejab) that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times by causing at least one effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content. It is an effect to give. The effect element is a unit constituting a game effect, for example, a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image (still image or moving image) in front of the background image, a predetermined object image such as a mini character, etc. Object preview effect (mini character preview effect) to be displayed in front of the image (mini character preview effect), background change alert effect to change the background image to a mode different from that at normal times, character preview effect to cause predetermined features to execute predetermined actions, A lamp emission effect that causes the lamp to emit light in a predetermined pattern, a symbol row fluctuation effect that changes a symbol row in a predetermined scroll pattern, and one remaining symbol in a state in which two identical symbols are stopped on at least one active line Reach effect to change the row, symbol pseudo stop effect to pseudo stop the combination of the predetermined symbol, completely stop the combination of the predetermined symbol And the like can be given that design complete stop demonstration.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines, based on the hold information, whether or not the condition for generating the prior notice of the feeling of sighting has been satisfied, that is, whether or not the notice of prior feeling of watching should be generated. Then, if it is determined that the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice has been satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 will continue until the game round related to the hold information determined that the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied. Execute at least one rendering element with the same content multiple times. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the determination as to whether or not the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sight is satisfied before the holding information subjected to the determination becomes the target of the jackpot lottery. .

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment confirms that the following conditions are satisfied when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34 and the hold information is obtained. Then, the visual sense notice occurrence lottery process described later is executed. When the visual sensation notice occurrence lottery process is won, the generation condition of the visual sensation notice is satisfied.
(Condition 1) The hold information corresponding to the big hit is not included in the hold information already stored (condition 2) When the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 33, the present winning is concerned Total holding number CRN including the holding information is 2 or more (condition 3) When the game ball wins in the second starting opening 34, the second starting holding number RbN including the holding information relating to the present winning Is 2 or more

  The reason for condition 1 corresponds to the jackpot even if the staging element of the same content is executed multiple times using the game times associated with the hold information corresponding to the jackpot and the game times associated with the hold information winning this time Since the jackpot effect is executed after the game round related to the hold information, the continuity of the effect elements of the same contents executed a plurality of times is interrupted, and it is difficult to give the player a sense of visual appearance. The reason for condition 2 and condition 3 is that if the number of reservations including the suspension information relating to the current winning is 2 or more, it is possible to execute the notice of the feeling of sight over a plurality of game times. The reason that the second start pending number RbN is the reference under the condition 3 is that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold information acquired by the winning of the second starting port 34 is the first starting port 33. The priority is given to the jackpot lottery in preference to the hold information acquired by the winning a prize. However, these conditions are examples, and other conditions may be imposed, and conditions may be absent. For example, when it is set as the structure which performs the production | presentation element of the same content in multiple times in one game time, these conditions may not be.

  In the visual sense notice occurrence lottery process of the present embodiment, visual sense notice only when the hold information pertaining to the current prize is the hold information that will be a jackpot win or reach when the jackpot is subsequently targeted by the jackpot lottery. It is possible to win the occurrence. The reason for this is that relatively long display duration time is set in the game round related to the suspension information that the jackpot is won or the reach is generated, so it is easy to execute the suggestion effects and the battle effects etc. described later. Then, when the visual sensation notice occurrence lottery process is won, the generation condition of the visual sensation notice is satisfied, and the pachinko machine 10 is determined to be satisfied that the generation condition of the visual sense notice is satisfied. At least one effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content until the game round related to the information ends.

  In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23 (A), the game ball wins in the first starting opening 33 at the timing when the total number of reserved pieces CRN is 2, and the total number of reserved pieces CRN becomes 3 based on the reserved information pertaining to the winnings. As a result of performing the above-mentioned judgment, the case where the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice of visual perception is satisfied is shown. The game cycle P03 indicated as the third game cycle is a game cycle related to the hold information determined that the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice has been met.

  In Example 1 shown in FIG. 23 (A), the pachinko machine 10 selects the cut-in notice effect A of the same content as the effect element A to be executed a plurality of times with the same content, and cuts in the same content. The notice effect A is executed once in each of the three game times P01, P02 and P03. That is, the pachinko machine 10 executes the cut-in notice effect A in all the successive game rounds until the game round related to the hold information determined that the generation condition of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied is completed. There is.

  Also, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 23, the pachinko machine 10 completely stops the symbol A (for example, the combination of the symbols "1, 2, 3") in the first game round P01. Is executed, and also in the second game round P02, a symbol complete stop effect is executed to completely stop the same out pattern A. That is, the pachinko machine 10 selects the symbol perfect stop presentation of the same content of stopping the same out pattern A completely as the effect element executed the same content a plurality of times, and completely stops the symbol of the same content. The effect is executed several times.

  Further, in Example 1 shown in FIG. 23, after the pachinko machine 10 executes the cut-in notice effect A in the third game cycle P3, the pachinko machine 10 executes the symbol pseudo-stop effect for artificially stopping the off-set symbol A There is. The symbol simulated stop effect is strictly different from the symbol perfect stop effect in that the symbol is not completely stopped. However, the modes of effects that can be recognized by the player are very similar between the case where the combination of symbols is artificially stopped and the case where the combination is completely stopped. Therefore, in this specification, the symbol pseudo-stop effect is regarded as the effect element of the same content as the symbol complete stop effect for completely stopping the symbol if the content of the combination of symbols to be pseudo-stopped is the same. In the following, the symbol perfect stop effect and the symbol pseudo stop effect are collectively referred to as a symbol stop effect.

  Furthermore, after the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the rendering element of the same content a plurality of times, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggested rendering that suggests to the player that the rendering element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times. . In the example shown in FIG. 24, the suggestion effect causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image in which the female character throws a message such as “Hey, deja! In this mode, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are made to output. However, the suggestive effect may be another mode as long as the player can indicate to the player that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times. For example, “Hey, do you know? "Are you a dejab?", "A dejab?", "A dejab might be a boon of a jackpot?", "This director has a familiarity!" "Are you like seeing the same director ...", An image including a message such as “This is a feeling of sight !?”, “The same effect, you'll get bored ...” is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and an audio including these messages is output from the speaker 46 It may be an effect or the like.

  In the example shown in FIG. 23, after the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggested effect, it executes the battle effect in which the player character and the enemy character confront each other, and thereafter, the result corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery The effect (a winning effect if the jackpot is won, a defeating effect if the result is off) is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the battle effect displays an image in which the female character on the player side and the male character on the enemy side are confronted on the symbol display device 41, and the sound or light accompanying the image is displayed on the speaker 46. And the various lamps 47 are output. However, the battle rendition may be another mode or may be omitted. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 24, the winning effect causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image that a female character on the player side is pleased with victory, and also causes the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 to accompany the sound and light associated with the image. Is an aspect which makes it output. However, the winning effect as the result effect may be another aspect or may be omitted. After that, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot effect corresponding to the type of jackpot is executed.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, a sense of visibility (dejab) that the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times for the player Can be given. A player who has recognized a feeling of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the feeling of sight, for example, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, when the player experiences winning of the jackpot after the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the rendering element is executed in the expectation that the rendering element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Whenever it is done, you will be focused on the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the rendering element with the same content is executed a plurality of times, and the player's attention to the rendering element to be executed sequentially This can be suitably enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, different reliabilities (expected degrees) can be set for each type of effect element executed in a single shot, so, for example, effect elements with high reliability have the same content. In the case where the game is executed a plurality of times, the player strongly expects that the possibility of winning a jackpot is very high, while it is the case that the unreliable performance element is executed. Also, the player can expect the effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the player's attention to the effect element can be suitably enhanced.

  In addition, the same content may be obtained even if the effect of directly suggesting that the possibility of winning the jackpot is high, for example, the effect of lighting the prefetch holding lamp or the like in a color different from that at the normal time is not performed. It is possible to add a game in which attention is paid to whether or not the rendering element is executed a plurality of times.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same content The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to the effect element being executed multiple times. Then, in the case where the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is only a coincidence that the player has performed the effect element of the same content a plurality of times, or a sense of sight with a suggested effect. Whether it has been a notice is to be confirmed depending on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and the expectation effect is expected to be executed. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can execute an operation acceptance effect element (button effect) including content suggesting acceptance of the operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the effect element. In the case where the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice has been satisfied, the button effect is not selected as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times. The reason will be described. When the button effect is performed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player (for example, the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24, timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.) May be For this reason, temporarily, even if the pachinko machine 10 executes the same kind of button effect a plurality of times, the occurrence condition of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied, depending on the mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24, the button The effects may be executed with different contents, and it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight. On the other hand, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the button effect is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, different contents are executed depending on the mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player. It is possible to prevent the player from giving an unnatural feeling to the player. However, even if the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, even if the occurrence condition of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied, the pachinko machine 10 cancels the execution of the feeling of prior notice. It may be configured.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied before the on-hold information becomes the target of the jackpot lottery, and If it is determined that the visual advance notice generation condition is satisfied, the target to be executed multiple times before the hold information determined to satisfy the visual appearance notice occurrence condition is the target of the jackpot lottery Start the execution of the rendering element. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a sense of visual appearance over a plurality of game times.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the display continuation time, which is the time required for each game play, immediately before starting each game play. For this reason, if the occurrence condition of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied, and the type of the effect element (for example, cut-in notice effect) to be executed a plurality of times in the feeling of prior notice is randomly selected, the display duration time of each game is displayed. In some cases, a rendering element of a length that can not be executed may be selected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can be performed in the shortest possible display duration time among the display duration time that can be selected in each game time when the occurrence condition of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied. An element is selected as an effect element to be executed a plurality of times, and the selected effect element is executed in each game time. In this way, even if the display duration time determined for each game time is different, it is possible to reliably execute the rendering element of the same content in each game time.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the length of the display continuation time of the game turn which is the target of executing the selected rendering element is a length that can execute the selected rendering element a plurality of times, The effect element of the selected same content is executed a plurality of times in the one game time.

  In Example 2 shown in FIG. 23B, since the display continuation time T2 of the second game cycle P02 is twice or more as long as the time required for the presentation element A (for example, the cut-in advance presentation effect A). The pachinko machine 10 executes the same effect element A twice in the game cycle P02. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is the same off symbol A as the off symbol A stopped in the first game cycle P01 after the end of the first effect element A in the second game cycle P02 (for example, “1, 2 A symbol simulated stop effect is executed once to stop the combination of symbols 3) in a simulated manner. For this reason, it is possible to further strengthen the feeling of giving to the player.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the rendering element of the same content (hereinafter also referred to as a rendering element for previewing a feeling of visible feeling) which is an object to be executed multiple times more times. The player can be made to strongly recognize the sense of sight. Further, since the number of times the effect element for notice of a feeling of visual notice is executed is increased or decreased depending on the length of the display continuation time of one game time, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player.

  Furthermore, since the presentation element for the feeling of visual appearance notice is a presentation element that can be executed within the shortest display duration time among the display duration times that can be determined for each game cycle, the time required for one execution is , Or less than the duration of the display duration of one game time. Therefore, even if the effect element for notice of a feeling of visual notice is executed once in one game session, an extra time may occur in the display continuation time. According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the length of the display continuation time of one game is a length which can execute the effect element for visual sensation notice (the effect element of the same content) a plurality of times In addition, since the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times in the one game time, it is possible to minimize the surplus time of the display continuation time.

  In the above-described example, the pachinko machine 10 performs the effect element A in all the successive game rounds until the game round relating to the suspension information determined to satisfy the generation condition of the feeling of prior notice of the visible feeling ends. Although the pachinko machine 10 is executing, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the rendering element of the same content a plurality of times, and may perform the rendering element A, for example, only in the game play P01 and the game play P03.

  In the following, in particular, when a specific notice effect is selected as the effect element to be executed multiple times with the same content in the notice of the feeling of notice, the selected notice effect is also referred to as "notice effect for notice of notice of feeling of notice". In addition, when the symbol stop effect for completely stopping or simulating the combination of a specific symbol is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times with the same content in the previous notice, in the selected symbol stop effect The specific symbol combination to be stopped or pseudo-stopped is also referred to as "stop symbol for notice of a feeling of visible notice".

A5-2. Control pertaining to the notice of feeling of sight:
Next, an example of a specific control for executing the above-described notice of the feeling of sight in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Various processing executed in voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the sound light side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sound light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process will be described below.

  In step S1401, command storage processing is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and readout of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , And sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step S1401, the process proceeds to step S1402.

  In step S1402, command corresponding processing for performing processing corresponding to the received command is executed. Details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1403, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding process of step S1402. After executing step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404.

  In step S1404, an audio output control process for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the command corresponding process of step S1402. After step S1404 is executed, the present timer interrupt processing ends.

<Processing corresponding to command>
Next, command corresponding processing will be described. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt process (FIG. 25: S1402).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing command handling processing. As described above, in the command handling process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the command corresponding process will be described.

  In step S1501, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1501 that the hold command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1501: YES), the process advances to step S1502 to execute hold command handling processing. In the on-hold command handling process, the process related to the above-mentioned notice of a feeling of visual notice is executed based on the information set in the on-hold command. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1502, the process proceeds to step S1503. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1501 that the hold command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503 without executing step S1502.

  In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the variation command and type command have been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1503 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504, and an effect setting process is performed. In the effect setting process, a notice effect to be executed in the current game run, a stop symbol, a fluctuation display pattern, and the like are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1504, the process proceeds to step S1505. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1503 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (S1503: NO), the process proceeds to step S1505 without executing step S1504.

  In step S1505, it is determined whether an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 or not. If it is determined in step S1505 that an opening command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1505: YES), the process proceeds to step S1506 to execute opening effect setting processing. In the opening effect setting process, the type of the jackpot included in the opening command received this time is specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the type of the jackpot is set, and the information corresponding to the contents of the effect is set The opening effect command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1507. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1505 that the opening command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1505: NO), the process proceeds to step S1507 without executing step S1506.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether an ending command has been received. If it is determined in step S1507 that the ending command has been received (S1507: YES), the process advances to step S1508 to execute ending effect setting processing. In the ending effect setting process, the content of the gaming state after the opening / closing execution mode included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the content of the ending effect corresponding to the contents of the gaming state is set, and An ending effect command in which corresponding information is set is transmitted to the display MPU 102. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1509. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1507 that the ending command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1507: NO), the process proceeds to step S1509 without executing step S1508.

  In step S1509, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, the setting of the effect content corresponding to the release command and the setting of the effect content corresponding to the closing command are performed. Further, when the rendering operation button 24 is pressed, a rendering operation command for recognizing that the rendering operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display MPU 102.

<Hold command handling process>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine of the command handling process (FIG. 26: S1502).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing pending command handling processing. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process that is executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the pending command handling process will be described.

  In step S1601, update processing at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pending information obtained based on the winning on the first starting opening 33, the number of pending information obtained based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, and these pending A process is performed to enable the sound light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of pieces of information. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S1601 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning of the first start opening 33 is also referred to as the “first number of held pieces”, and the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning of the second start opening 34 is It is also referred to as "second pending number", and the total number of the first pending number and the second pending number is also referred to as "total pending number". After executing step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602.

  In step S1602, confirmation processing is executed. In the confirmation processing, processing is performed to enable the sound-side MPU 92 to specify whether the pending command that has been read this time corresponds to a big hit, whether it corresponds to a reach occurrence, and the like. Details of the confirmation processing in step S1602 will be described later. After executing step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603.

  In step S1603, a process for previewing an perceived feeling is performed. In the processing for visual sense notice, processing for determining whether or not the above-mentioned occurrence condition of visual sense notice is satisfied is executed, and when the generation condition of the visual sense notice is satisfied, the visible processing is performed. Execute setting processing to execute feeling notice. The details of the processing for preview of the visual appearance notice in step S1603 will be described later. After executing step S1603, the present pending command handling process ends.

<Update process when winning>
Next, the update process at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 27: S 1601) of the hold command handling process.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing update processing at the time of winning. In step S1701, it is determined whether the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on the winning on the first starting port 33. If it is determined in step S1701 that the hold command that has been read this time is transmitted based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702 and sound light is emitted. Update processing of the first hold count counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first hold count counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of hold information acquired based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 in the sound-light MPU 92. In the update process of the first hold count counter area, the information of the first hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the hold command which is the current read target. After executing step S1702, the process proceeds to step S1704.

  If it is determined in step S1701 that the hold command that has been read this time is not transmitted based on the winning on the first start opening 33 (S1701: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start opening If it is determined that the data has been sent based on the winning on 34, the process proceeds to step S1703, and the process of updating the second hold count counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. . The second hold number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of pieces of hold information acquired based on the winning on the second start port 34 in the sound light side MPU 92. In the update processing of the second hold count counter area, the information of the second hold count counter area is updated to the information of the hold count included in the command that is the current read target. After step S1703 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1704.

  The reason why the processes of step S1702 and step S1703 are performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. I will not. Therefore, when the power is shut off in a situation where the hold information relating to the winning to the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 holds the hold information. While the sound emission control device 90 stores and holds the information, it is determined that the hold information is zero. In this case, assuming that voice emission control device 90 counts up the first hold count counter area or the second hold count counter area every time it receives a hold command, main controller 60 actually stores the hold. There may be a disadvantage that the number of pending information being held and the number of pending information kept in the audio light emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, main control device 60 transmits a hold command including information on the hold number, and voice emission control unit 90 transmits the hold command every time it receives the hold command. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the number of pending pieces included is set in the first pending number counter area or the second pending number counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

  In step S1704, update processing of the total hold number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound light side RAM 94 is executed. In the total reserved number counter area, the sum of the number of pieces of suspension information acquired based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the number of the suspending information acquired based on the winning of the second starting opening 34 is heard. It is a counter area for specifying in side MPU92. In the updating process, the information of the total number of holding units counter area is the information of the sum of the information of the number of holding units measured in the first number of holding units counter area and the information of the number of holding units measured in the second number of holding units counter area Update to After step S1704 is executed, the update process at the time of the winning combination is ended.

<Confirmation processing>
Next, the confirmation process will be described. The confirmation process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine of the hold command handling process (FIG. 27: S1602). Note that, as described above, when information such as the presence or absence of a big hit, the type of big hit, the presence or absence of reach has already been set in the hold command, this confirmation process can be omitted.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing confirmation processing. As described above, the confirmation process is a process executed when it is determined that the hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the confirmation process will be described. The contents of each table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93 described in each of the following steps are the acceptance table storage area 63a, the distribution table storage area 63b, and the main ROM 63. The contents are the same as the contents of each table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c.

  In step S1801, information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the pending command that has been read this time is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, when the high probability mode flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound side RAM 94, it is determined that the low probability mode is set, and the high probability mode flag is stored. It is determined that the mode is not the low probability mode, that is, the high probability mode. The high probability mode flag is stored when the high probability mode command is received from the main MPU 62.

  If it is determined in step S1802 that the mode is the low probability mode (S1802: YES), the process proceeds to step S1803, and the low probability mode acceptance table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93 is used. refer. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1805, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode acceptance table, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1802 that the mode is not the low probability mode (S1802: NO), the process proceeds to step S1804, and the high probability mode pass / fail table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93. Refer to Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1805, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode acceptance table, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S1805 that the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1805: YES), the process proceeds to step S1806 and the pending command that was the current reading target The information on the value of the included jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Thereafter, the process advances to step S1807 to refer to the distribution table stored in the storage confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93. Specifically, in the case where the hold command which has been the target of the current reading is transmitted based on the winning on the first starting opening 33, the first starting opening distribution table is referred to and the second If it is transmitted based on the winning on the starting opening 34, the second starting opening distribution table is referred to.

  In step S1808, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the information of the value of the jackpot type counter C2 grasped this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. In step S1808, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot is supported (S1808: YES), the process proceeds to step S1809, and the probability variation jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the sound side MPU 92. Thereafter, the present confirmation processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1808 that it does not correspond to the probability variation jackpot (S1808: NO), the process proceeds to step S1810, and the jackpot information is temporarily stored in the register of the sound MPU 92. Thereafter, the present confirmation processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1805 that the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that has been grasped this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S1805: NO), the process proceeds to step S1811, and the pending command that was the current reading target The information on the value of the reach random number counter C3 contained is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1812, and the reach determination table stored in the hold confirmation table storage area 93a of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S 1813, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the information on the value of the reach random number counter C 3 grasped this time corresponds to the reach occurrence.

  If it is determined in step S 1813 that reach has been generated (S 1813: YES), the process proceeds to step S 1814, and the reach generation information is temporarily stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Thereafter, the present confirmation processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S 1813 that the reach has not been generated (S 1813: NO), the present confirmation process is ended as it is.

<Process for feeling of visible notice>
Next, the processing for previewing the feeling of visible notice will be described. The processing for anticipation of the feeling of previous notice is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 27: S1603) of the hold command handling processing.

  FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the processing for previewing the feeling of visual appearance. In step S1901, it is determined whether the hold command that has been read this time has been sent based on the winning on the first starting opening 33. If it is determined in step S1901 that the hold command that has been read this time is not transmitted based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 (S1901: NO), that is, the winning on the second starting opening 34 If it is determined that the message has been sent based on the above, the process proceeds to step S1902.

  In step S1902, it is determined whether the first visible feeling advance notice flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 or not. The first visible feeling notice flag is stored when starting the above-mentioned visible feeling notice on the basis of the hold information based on the winning of the first start opening 33, and is deleted when the visible feeling notice is ended. Is a flag that

  If it is determined in step S1902 that the first visible feeling advance flag is stored (S1902: YES), the process proceeds to step S1903, the first visible feeling advance flag is erased, and the process proceeds to step S1904. “0” is set in the counter area for a feeling of prior notice of the visual sense RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1905.

  When the visual sense notice counter area is set to execute the visual sense notice, the sound light side MPU 92 specifies the number of times the game round is to be performed thereafter. Measurement means for As will be described later, information on the number of reservations is set in the visual sensation notice counter area, and is updated so as to be decremented by one each time a game is newly started. Then, when the information stored in the visual sensation notice counter area after updating is the initial value “0”, the visual sensation notice flag stored at that time is erased.

  Here, if the hold command is transmitted based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, in other words, if there is a winning on the second starting opening 34, the first visible feeling advance notice flag Explain the reasons for eliminating In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the hold information relating to the winning of the second starting opening 34 is prioritized in priority to the hold information relating to the winning of the first starting opening 33 and thus becomes the target of the jackpot lottery. When there is a winning on the starting opening 34, the order of the jackpot lottery of the suspension information is changed, and the premise of the notice of the feeling of prior notice which has already been set upon the winning on the first starting opening 33 is broken It will Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when there is a winning on the second starting opening 34, the premise is broken by deleting the first visible feeling advance notice flag, and the visual sense notice of I decided to cancel the execution.

  If it is determined in step S1902 that the first prior feeling advance notice flag is not stored (S1902: NO), the process proceeds to step S1905 without executing steps S1903 and S1904.

  If it is determined in step S1901 that the hold command that has been the subject of this reading has been transmitted based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 (S1901: YES), step S1902, step S1903 and step The process advances to step S1905 without executing step S1904, that is, without executing deletion of the first visible feeling advance notification flag.

  In the processing from step S1905 to step S1911, which will be described next, processing relating to the jackpot suspension flag is executed. Therefore, prior to the description of the process from step S1905 to step S1911, the jackpot hold flag, and the first erasure counter area and the second erasure counter area used to determine whether or not the jackpot suspension flag is erased will be described. Do.

  The jackpot hold flag includes hold information corresponding to the jackpot among the hold information held in the hold area Ra for the first result display unit or the hold area Rb for the second result display unit of the main control device 60. If it is, it is information for specifying it by the sound light side MPU 92. In the process of erasing the big hit retention flag, in the situation where the big hit retention flag is stored, “0” is an initial value to which both of the information stored in the first erasure counter area and the second erasure counter area described later are stored. Will be executed if

  In the first erasure counter area, when the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the suspension area Ra for the first result display unit, the suspension information becomes the target of the game round and the first result display unit is used. It is a measuring means for specifying with the sound side MPU 92 the timing to be erased from the holding area Ra. The information on the number of pending items set in the first erasing counter area is, as will be described later, pending information stored in the first result display area pending area Ra (that is, for winning in the first starting opening 33) With respect to the hold information obtained based on the above, it is updated such that 1 is subtracted each time a game is newly started.

  In the second erasure counter area, when the second result display area reserved area Rb stores the hold information corresponding to the big hit, the hold information is the target of the game round and the second result display area is used. This is a measuring means for specifying the timing of erasing from the holding area Rb by the sound light side MPU 92. The information on the number of pending items set in the second erasing counter area is, as will be described later, pending information stored in the second result display area pending area Rb (that is, for winning a prize in the second starting opening 34) With respect to the hold information obtained based on the above, it is updated such that 1 is subtracted each time a game is newly started. Hereinafter, the description will return to the process regarding the jackpot pending flag.

  In step S1905, it is determined whether the hold command that has been read this time is a hold command corresponding to the jackpot. If it is determined in step S1905 that the hold command that has become the current read target is the hold command corresponding to the big hit (S1905: YES), the process proceeds to step S1906, and the hold command that has become the current read target is the (1) It is determined based on the winning on the starting opening 33 whether or not it has been sent.

  If it is determined in step S1906 that the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 (S1906: YES), the process proceeds to step S1907, and the current time While specifying the information on the first hold count included in the hold command that has become the read target, the information on the specified first hold count is set in the first erasure counter area. After executing step S1907, the process proceeds to step S1909.

  In step S1906, when it is determined that the hold command that has been read this time is not transmitted based on the winning on the first start opening 33 (S1906: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start opening If it is determined that the information has been sent based on the winning on 34, the process proceeds to step S1908, and identifies the information on the second pending number included in the command that is the target of the current reading, and [2] Set the information on the number of pending items in the second erasing counter area. After executing step S1908, the process proceeds to step S1909.

  In step S1909, it is determined whether the jackpot holding flag is stored in the sound light side RAM 94 or not. If it is determined in step S1909 that the jackpot suspension flag is stored (S1909: YES), the present suspension command handling process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1909 that the big hit retention flag is not stored (S1909: NO), the process proceeds to step S1910, and the big hit retention flag is stored in the sound side RAM 94. After executing step S1910, the process proceeds to step S1912.

  If it is determined in step S1905 that the hold command that has been read this time is not the hold command corresponding to the jackpot (S1905: NO), the process proceeds to step S1911, and the big hit hold flag is stored in the sound light side RAM 94. Determine if there is.

  If it is determined in step S1911 that the jackpot holding flag is not stored in the sound light side RAM 94 (S1911: NO), the process proceeds to step S1912. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1911 that the jackpot holding flag is stored in the sound light side RAM 94 (S1911: YES), the present holding command handling process is ended as it is.

  As described in the process from step S1905 to step S1911, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the big hit hold flag is already stored (S1909: YES, S1911: YES) Various settings for executing a notice are not performed. Thus, in the situation where the suspension information corresponding to the big hit is already stored in the suspension area Ra for the first result display unit of the main control device 60 or the suspension area Rb for the second result display unit, the first starting port 33 or Even if new hold information is acquired based on the winning of the start opening 34, various settings for executing the notice of the feeling of visual appearance are not performed.

  In step S1912, it is determined whether the first visible feeling advance notice flag is stored in the sound light side RAM 94 or not. If it is determined in step S1912 that the first existing feeling notice flag is stored (S1912: YES), this pending command handling process is ended. That is, in the case where the first visible feeling advance notice flag is stored, the visible feeling notice occurrence lottery processing in step S19 is not executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1912 that the first visual appearance notice flag is not stored (S1912: NO), the flow proceeds to step S1913.

  In step S1913, it is determined whether the second visible feeling advance notice flag is stored in the sound light side RAM 94 or not. If it is determined in step S1913 that the second visible feeling advance notice flag is stored (S1913: YES), this pending command handling process is ended as it is. That is, in the case where the second visible feeling advance notice flag is stored, the visible feeling notice occurrence lottery processing of step S1917 is not executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1913 that the second visual appearance notice flag is not stored (S1913: NO), the process proceeds to step S16.

  That is, in the situation where it has already been set to execute the notice of the visual sensation based on either the hold information pertaining to the winning to the first starting opening 33 or the hold information pertaining to the winning to the second starting opening 34. Even if a new hold command is received, no new setting is performed to execute the notice of a feeling of sight.

  In step S1914, it is determined whether the hold command that has been the target of the current reading has been transmitted based on the winning on the first start port 33. If it is determined in step S1914 that the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 (S1914: YES), the process proceeds to step S1915 and the total hold is It is determined whether or not the pending number measured in the number counter area is two or more.

  If it is determined in step S1915 that the total number of held items is 2 or more (S1915: YES), the process proceeds to step S1917, and a feeling-of-experience notice occurrence lottery process is executed. Details of the feeling-of-the-eye notice occurrence lottery process will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1915 that the total pending number is not 2 or more (S1915: NO), this pending command handling process is ended without executing the visual appearance notice occurrence lottery process of step S1917. .

  In step S1914, when it is determined that the hold command which has been read this time is not transmitted based on the winning on the first start opening 33 (S1914: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start opening If it is determined that the message has been sent based on the winning on 34, the process proceeds to step S1916, and it is determined whether the number of pending units measured in the second pending number counter area is 2 or more. .

  If it is determined in step S1916 that the second hold number is 2 or more (S1916: YES), the process proceeds to step S1917 to execute an eye-catching notice occurrence lottery process. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1916 that the second hold number is not two or more, the processing for the visual sense fore-notice notice is ended without executing the visual sense fore-ager occurrence lottery process of step S1917.

  That is, in the case where the hold command which is the target of the current read is transmitted based on the winning on the first starting opening 33, the feeling of notice of the visual sense notice only when the total hold number is two or more. Execute the occurrence lottery process. On the other hand, in the case where the hold command which has been the target of the current read is transmitted based on the winning on the second starting opening 34, the sense of sight is seen only when the second hold number is two or more. Execute a notice occurrence lottery process. The reason for this is that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes notice of a feeling of sight using two or more game times. In the case where the hold command is transmitted based on the winning on the second start port 34, the reason for using the second hold number as the basis is that in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second start port 34. The hold information acquired by the winning is prioritized over the hold information acquired by the winning of the first starting opening 33 and becomes the target of the jackpot lottery.

<Presence feeling notice occurrence lottery process>
Next, the visual feeling notice occurrence lottery process will be described. The feeling-of-the-eye notice occurrence lottery process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 30: S1917) of the feeling-of-the-eye notice processing.

  FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing a feeling-of-the-eye notice occurrence lottery process. In step S2001, it is determined whether the pending command that has been the current read target corresponds to the jackpot or the reach occurrence. When it is determined in step S2001 that neither the jackpot nor the reach has been generated (S2001: NO), the visual appearance notice advance lottery process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2001 that a big hit or reach has been generated (S2001: YES), the process proceeds to step S2002, and the random number counter for feeling of prior notice from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound side RAM 94. The value (numerical information) is read out, and the visible feeling notice occurrence table stored in the visible feeling notice occurrence table storage area 93b of the sound side ROM 93 is referred to, and the read out for the visible feeling notice in step S2003. It is determined whether or not the random number counter value corresponds to the visual sensation notice occurrence winning.

  In addition, the probability of becoming a feeling of prior notice occurrence occurrence winning can be set arbitrarily. For example, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to refer to the jackpot notice occurrence table for the jackpot when the hold command corresponding to the jackpot is received, and the jackpot for the jackpot The advance notice generation table is set so that the hold notice occurrence will be won with a probability of 7/10. On the other hand, when the hold command corresponding to the reach occurrence is received, it is configured to refer to the reach prior notice occurrence table for reach, and the reach prior notice occurrence table for the reach is 10 minutes. It is set to be a winning notice occurrence with a probability of 1.

  When it is determined in step S2003 that the visual recognition notice random number counter value does not correspond to the visual recognition notice generation winning (S2003: NO), the visual appearance notice generation lottery process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2003 that the visual recognition notice random number counter value corresponds to the visual recognition notice occurrence winning (S2003: YES), the generation condition of the visual notice is satisfied. The process proceeds to step S2004.

  In step S2004, a process of determining a notice effect for a notice of a feeling of visible notice is executed. Specifically, the random number counter value (numerical information) for notice effect is read out from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound light side RAM 94, and is stored in the notice effect notice table storage area 93c of the sound sense side ROM 93 With reference to the existing notice effect notice table for the sense of appearance notice, the notice effect for the notice of the actual appearance notice corresponding to the random number counter value for the notice effect is determined. The content of the notice effect that can be executed within the shortest display continuation time of the display continuation time stored in the display continuation time table of the main ROM 63 and the random number counter for the notice presentation effect Values and values are stored in association with each other. In the present embodiment, the notice effect for the notice of the visual sensation is determined using the random number counter value for the notice effect determined by the lottery and the notice effect table for the visual sensation notice. A configuration may be employed in which the predetermined predetermined announcement effect is used as the advance announcement effect for the visual sensation notice. In this case, the predetermined advance notice effect set in advance is an advance notice effect that can be executed within the shortest display continuation time of the display continuation times stored in the display continuation time table of the main ROM 63. Also, for example, the notice effect for the present notice of the visual sense notice is the notice effect A, and the notice effect for the visual notice for the visual sense notice to be determined when the condition for generating the visual notice on the next time is satisfied is the notice effect B. Alternatively, the order of the notice effects for the notice of the visual sensation to be determined may be set in advance. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 can adopt various methods to intentionally and actively determine the type and the content of the notice effect for the notice of the visible feeling to be executed in each game session.

  After step S2004 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2005, and the type information of the notice effect for the notice of the notice for the visual sense notice is stored in the notice effect storage area 94d for the visual sense notice of the sound light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2006.

  In step S2006, a process of determining a stop symbol for notice of a feeling of visual appearance is executed. Specifically, the random number counter value (numerical information) for stop symbol is read out from the lottery counter area 94c of the sound light side RAM 94, and is stored in the stop feeling symbol stop table table storage area 93d of the sound light side ROM 93 The stop symbol corresponding to the stop symbol random number counter value for the stop symbol is determined with reference to the existing symbol notice symbol stop symbol table existing. In addition, as a stop symbol for a feeling of prior notice of a visual sense, the stop symbol for a result of detachment is determined. After executing step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007, and the type information of the determined stop symbol for the notice of the feeling of visible notice is stored in the sound light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2008.

  In step S2008, it is determined whether or not the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on the winning on the first starting opening 33. If it is determined in step S2008 that the hold command that has been read this time has been transmitted based on the winning on the first starting opening 33 (S2008: YES), the process proceeds to step S2009, and sound light is emitted. The first visual presence notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94 a of the side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2010, and the information stored in the total hold number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is set in the visual feeling notice counter area of the sound light side RAM 94. After that, the processing for the visual sense notice is finished. As a result, it is set to be in a state in which a feeling of prior notice should be performed triggered by the hold information pertaining to the first start port 33.

  If it is determined in step S2008 that the hold command that has been read this time is not transmitted based on the winning on the first starting port 33 (S2008: NO), the process proceeds to step S2011, and the sound light side The second visual appearance notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 94 a of the RAM 94. After that, the process proceeds to step S2012, and the information stored in the second hold count counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is set in the visual sensation notice counter area of the sound light side RAM 94. After that, the processing for the visual sense notice is finished. As a result, it is set to be in a state in which a feeling of prior notice should be performed triggered by the hold information related to the second start port 34.

<Effect setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 26: S1504).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command have been received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect to be executed in the current game run . Hereinafter, specific processing of the effect setting processing will be described.

  In step S 2101, the variation command received this time is read out, and from the command, information on presence / absence of reach and information on display duration are specified, and the type command received this time is read out. Information on the result of the jackpot lottery such as information, information on 8R probability variation jackpot, information on 16R regular jackpot, information on 8R regular jackpot, or information on outliers is specified. Then, in step S 2101, from the above-identified information, information on the presence or absence of the big hit, information on the type of big hit if the big hit, information on the presence or absence of the reach occurrence if the big hit is not won, and the display duration time The information on the information is stored in the register of the sound-light-side MPU 92. After executing step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102.

  In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the visual sensation advance flag is stored in the sound light side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S2102 that the visual sensation advance notice flag is stored (S2102: YES), that is, if the condition of occurrence of the visual sensation advance notice is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2103, and the visual sensation occurs Execute setting processing of the effect corresponding to the notice. In this processing, in the current game session for executing the notice of visual appearance, the notice effect for visual appearance notice determined in S2004 of FIG. 31 is executed, and the visual appearance notice determined in S2006 of FIG. 31. It is set to execute the symbol stop effect using the stop symbol for. Details of setting processing of an effect corresponding to the notice of a feeling of visual appearance will be described later.

  If it is determined in step S2102 that the visual sensation advance notice flag is not stored (S2102: NO), the process advances to step S2104 to execute an advance notice occurrence lottery process. In the advance notice occurrence lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not a normal advance notice effect is to be executed in the current game round. Normal preview effects can occur at any of the game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but when reach display is performed, it is more than when reach display is not performed. Is also set to occur with high probability. Also, in the notice effect generation lottery process, the notice turn is more likely to occur, and the notice turn with a low appearance rate is more likely to occur, as compared to the game turn corresponding to the out result. Draw a lottery. After executing step S2104, the process proceeds to step S2105.

  In step S2105, it is determined whether or not the notice effect occurrence lottery has been won as a result of the notice effect occurrence lottery process in step S2104. In step S2105, when it is determined that the advance notice effect occurrence is won (step S2105: YES), the process proceeds to step S2106, and the selected advance notice effect is set to be executed in the current game round. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2107. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2105 that the advance notice effect has not been won (step S2105: NO), the process proceeds to step S2107 without executing step S2106.

  In step S2107, a process of setting a stop symbol is executed. In the setting process of the stop symbol, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same symbol on the effective line L The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is a 16R probability variation jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination may be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. Even symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the selectivity is the same for the combination of the same odd symbol and the combination of the same even symbol, but instead, the former is more selective than the latter The configuration may have a high rate, and the latter may have a higher selectivity than the former. Also, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the combination of the same even symbols is selected as the combination of the same symbols.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game round is an outlier, the presence or absence of reach is determined from the content of the fluctuation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol is not established on the effective line L, which corresponds to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is established on the effective line L The information is determined as the information on the result of the current stop. On the other hand, if it is determined that the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L when it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is not a combination of reach symbols on the effective line L Corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108.

  In step S2108, processing for determining a variation display pattern of the current game run is executed. In the processing, the information of the display continuation time of the current game is identified from the content of the currently received fluctuation command, the information of the display continuation time, the information of the fluctuation display time included in the display continuation time, And the fluctuation display pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the stop design specified at the above-mentioned step S2107 is selected. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93e of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to.

  After the setting process of the effect corresponding to the notice of the feeling of anticipation in step S2103 is executed, or after the fluctuation display pattern is set in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109.

  In step S2109, the type information of the notice effect set in the current game run, the number of times of execution of the notice effect, the type information of the stop symbol, and the type information of the fluctuation display pattern are set in the effect command. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2110, and the effect command is transmitted to the display MPU 102. The display MPU 102 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect content corresponding to the received effect command. After step S2110 is performed, the process proceeds to step S2111, and after the update process at the start of fluctuation is performed, the effect setting process is ended. Details of the update process at the start of the change will be described later.

<Processing for setting effects corresponding to notice of a feeling of visual appearance>
Next, setting processing of an effect corresponding to the notice of a feeling of visual appearance will be described. The setting process of the effect corresponding to the notice of the feeling of visual appearance is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 32: S2103) of the effect setting process.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing setting processing of an effect corresponding to the notice of a feeling of visual appearance. As described above, the present setting process is a process that is executed when the current game time is one of a plurality of game times for executing the notice of visual appearance, and is executed in the current game time. Is a process of setting a prior notice effect, a symbol stop effect, and a variable display pattern. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the setting process will be described.

  In step S2201, the type information of the notice effect for the notice of the visual sense notice stored in the notice effect storage area 94d for the visual sense notice of the sound light side RAM 94 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2202, and the type information of the stop symbol for the notice of the feeling of visual appearance stored in the sound light side RAM 94 is grasped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2203.

  In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the visual sensation notice counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the game run to be executed this time is a game run related to the hold information for which the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice of visual perception is satisfied. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the gaming round related to the suspension information satisfying the generation condition of the prior notice of the feeling of notice is a gaming round related to the jackpot or the reach generation. Therefore, in the case of game times related to the hold information that satisfies the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice, a relatively long display continuation time is set.

  If it is determined in step S 2203 that the value stored in the visual sensation advance notice counter area is not “1” (S 2203: NO), that is, the gaming cycle to be executed this time is the condition of occurrence of the visual sensation advance notice If it is not the game time related to the held information that has been satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2204, and within the display duration time of the currently-played game time, the notice effect for the notice of visual appearance notice obtained in step S2201 can be executed multiple times It is determined whether or not.

  If it is determined in step S2204 that the notice effect for the visual sense notice can not be executed a plurality of times within the display continuation time (S2204: NO), the process proceeds to step S2205, and the notice effect for the visual sense notice is 1 Set to run once. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2208.

  If it is determined in step S2204 that the notice effect for the notice of visual sense can be executed a plurality of times within the display continuation time (S2204: YES), the process proceeds to step S2206, and the notice effect for the visual sense of notice Set to run multiple times. Specifically, in the case where it is possible to execute the notice effect for notice of the visual sensation notice twice within the display continuation time, the notice effect is set to be executed twice, and the visual sensation is seen within the display continuation time. If the advance notice effect for the advance notice can be executed three times, the advance notice effect is set to be executed three times. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is set that the notice effect for the notice of the visible feeling notice is executed up to three times in one game time. However, the maximum number of advance notice effects to be executed in one game may be set to one or two times, and may be set to four or more times.

  Also, let M be the number of times that the notice effect for visible feeling notice can be performed within the display continuation time in the current game run M times, and the actual number of execution times for the advance notice effect for visible feeling notice in the current game turn is N The relationship between M and N is not limited to M = N when it is assumed. If N satisfies the relationship of M 任意 N ≧ 1, its value can be set arbitrarily. For example, when the number of executable times of the notice effect for visual sense notice within the display continuation time in the current game round is 5 times, the actual number of times of execution of the notice effect for visual sense notice is 5 times to It can be set arbitrarily within one range. The value of N can be determined by various methods, such as determination by lottery or determination using table data in which M and N are associated with each other. In this way, it is possible to intentionally and actively determine the number of executions of the rendering element of the same content.

  After executing step S2206, the process proceeds to step S2207, and in the current game session, after executing the notice effect for the notice of visual sense notice, the stop symbol for visual sense notice for the visual recognition grasped in step S2202 is artificially stopped It is set to execute the symbol pseudo stop effect. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2208.

  After executing step S2205 or step S2207, in step S2208, the stop symbol for notice of the feeling of notice of visual appearance grasped in step S2202 is set as the stop symbol in the current game run. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2212.

  If it is determined in step S 2203 that the value stored in the visual sensation notice counter area is “1” (S 2201: YES), that is, the game cycle to be executed this time is the generation condition of the visual sensation notice. If it is the game time according to the suspension information that is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2209, and it is set to execute the advance notice effect for visible feeling advance notice once, and the above-mentioned suggestion effect, battle effect, big hit or It sets so that the result production corresponding to the out result will be performed in this game time. As described above, since the gaming round related to the suspension information satisfying the generation condition of the feeling of prior notice of the visual recognition is the gaming round related to the jackpot or the reach generation, a relatively long display continuation time is set. When selecting each type of suggestion effect, battle effect, and result effect, within the time obtained by subtracting the time required for the advance effect for the notice of visual appearance from the display duration time set in the current game run Choose a combination of possible effects. After executing step S2209, the process proceeds to step S2210.

  In step S2210, after executing the notice effect for the notice of visual sense in the current game round, the symbol simulated stop effect of artificially stopping the stop symbol for visual sense of notice noticed in step S2202 is executed. Set to Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2211.

  In step S2211, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game run is set. The details of the setting process of the stop symbol are the same as the process in step S2107 of FIG. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2212.

  In step S2212, a process for determining a variation display pattern of the current game run is executed. In the processing, the information of the display continuation time of the current game is identified from the content of the currently received fluctuation command, the information of the display continuation time, the information of the fluctuation display time included in the display continuation time, And the variation display pattern corresponding to the combination of the information of the stop design for notice of the feeling of prior notice specified in the step S2202 is selected. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93e of the sound light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S2212, the present setting process is ended.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, update processing at the start of fluctuation will be described. The update process at the start of the change is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control apparatus 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 32: S2111) of the effect setting process.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing update processing at the start of fluctuation. In the processes from step S2301 to step S2311 described below, along with the start of the game play, the counter values of the various hold counter areas are updated, and the process related to the elimination of the big hit hold flag is executed.

  The jackpot suspension flag is, as already described, a jackpot in the suspension information stored in the suspension area Ra for the first result display unit or the suspension area Rb for the second result display unit of the main control device 60. This flag is stored when the corresponding hold information is included. In addition, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the first erasure counter area, in the first result display unit hold area Ra, the order in which the hold information becomes the start target of the game round is Information for identifying whether or not is stored. In addition, when the hold information corresponding to the big hit is stored in the second deletion counter area, in the second result display area hold area Rb, the order in which the hold information becomes the target of the start of the game round is Information for identifying whether or not is stored. Therefore, when both the value of the first erasing counter area and the value of the second erasing counter area are “0” as the initial value, the first result display area reserved area Ra of the main control device 60 or This means that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is not included in the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display unit, and in this case, the jackpot hold flag is erased. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the update process at the time of a fluctuation | variation start is demonstrated.

  In step S2301, the information on the total pending number counter area is updated so that the total pending number stored in the total pending number counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2302.

  In step S2302, it is determined whether the currently received fluctuation command is a first fluctuation command. If it is determined in step S2302 that the command is the first change command (S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2303, and the number of hold numbers stored in the first hold number counter area of the sound side RAM 94 is decremented by one. To update the information in the first pending number counter area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2304.

  In step S2304, it is determined whether the value stored in the first erasure counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is 1 or more. If it is determined in step S2304 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is 1 or more (S2304: YES), the process proceeds to step S2305 and the value stored in the first erasure counter area The information in the first erasure counter area is updated so that 1 is subtracted by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2309.

  If it is determined in step S2304 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is not 1 or more (S2304: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2305 and 09 to S2311.

  If it is determined in step S2302 that the command for variation is not the first variation command (S2302: NO), that is, if the variation command received this time is the second variation command, the process proceeds to step S2306. The information of the second pending number counter area is updated so that the pending number stored in the second pending number counter area is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2307.

  In step S2307, it is determined whether the value stored in the second erasure counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is "1" or more. If it is determined in step S2307 that the value stored in the second erasure counter area is 1 or more (S2307: YES), the process proceeds to step S2308 and the value stored in the second erasure counter area The information in the second erasure counter area is updated so that 1 is subtracted by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2309.

  If it is determined in step S2307 that the value stored in the second erasure counter area is not 1 or more (S2307: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2308 and 09 to S2311.

  In step S2309, it is determined whether the value stored in the first erasure counter area is "0". If it is determined in step S2309 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is “0” (S2309: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2310. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2309 that the value stored in the first erasure counter area is not "0" (S2309: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing steps S2310 and S2311. .

  In step S 2310, it is determined whether the value stored in the second erasure counter area is “0”. If it is determined in step S2310 that the value stored in the second erasure counter area is "0" (S2310: YES), the process proceeds to step S2311, and the jackpot retention flag is erased. That is, when the value stored in the first erase counter area is "0" and the value stored in the second erase counter area is "0", the big hit retention flag is erased. . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2310 that the value stored in the second erasure counter area is not “0” (S2310: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing step S2311.

  In the processing from step S2312 to step S2317 to be described next, processing relating to the deletion of the feeling-for-the-notice notice flag is executed. Specific processing will be described below.

  In step S2312, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the visual sensation notifying counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is "1" or more. If it is determined in step S2312 that the value stored in the visual sensation advance notice counter area is not "1" or more (S2312: NO), the update processing at the start of the fluctuation is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2312 that the value stored in the visual sensation advance notice counter area is “1” or more (S2312: YES), the process proceeds to step S2313.

  In step S2313, the information in the visual sense annunciation counter area is updated so that the value stored in the visual notice annunciation counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is decremented by one. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2314.

  In step S2314, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the visual sensation advance notice counter area of the sound light side RAM 94 is "0". If it is determined in step S2314 that the value stored in the visual sensation advance notice counter area is not “0”, the update processing at the start of the fluctuation is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value stored in the visual feeling notice counter area is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2315.

  In step S2315, it is determined whether or not the variation command received this time is the first variation command. If it is determined in step S2315 that the command is the first variation command, the process advances to step S2316 to delete the first existing feeling notice flag of the sound light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the update process at the start of the change is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2315 that the command for variation is not the first variation command, that is, if the variation command received this time is the command for second variation, the process proceeds to step S2317. Delete the feeling notice flag. Thereafter, the update process at the start of the change is ended.

<Various Processes Executed in Display Control Device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly performed from the main processing repeatedly executed until the power is shut off after the power is turned on and the processing when the command is received from the sound emission control device 90 There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, the V interrupt processing can be executed by quickly reflecting the content of the command received from the audio light emission control device 90.

<Main processing>
Next, main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main processing is executed when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. Hereinafter, the process of each step performed in the main process will be described.

  In step S2401, an initial setting process is performed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and processing of clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. Then, it progresses to step S2402.

  In step S2402, interrupt permission setting is performed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main processing thereafter executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, command interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed each time a command is received from the sound emission control apparatus 90.

<Command interrupt processing>
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing command interruption processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S2501, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing performed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the VDP 105 draws the image and Execute the instructions on the display.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated to the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds for which drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, when the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is performed every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction of the next image at a stage where the drawing processing or the display processing of the image is not finished, so the drawing of a new image is started or displayed while drawing the image. It is possible to suppress the development of the image accompanying the new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information in the middle is stored. The details of the process of each step of the V interrupt process will be described below.

  In step S2601, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, while analyzing the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process (FIG. 36), the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when a rendering command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the rendering mode specified by the rendering command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If a rendering operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, the rendering operation Control of drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not a reception period of pressing of the rendering operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S2601), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and a process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason will be described. The command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt process is executed, and therefore, there is a high possibility that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area in the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, it quickly grasps the mode of the effects such as the notice effect and the stop pattern set by the sound emission control device 90, and displays the effect image according to the mode The drawing of the image can be controlled to be displayed on the device 41.

  In step S2602, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S2601) or the like, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the symbol display device 41 . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2603.

  In step S2603, task processing is performed. In the task processing, based on the contents of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 specified by the display setting processing (S2602), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle and the like are determined for each character (sprite). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2604.

  In step S2604, a drawing process is performed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S2603), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 performs drawing processing of an image based on these pieces of information, and also causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image drawn based on the information received at the time of the previous V interrupt processing, together with the drive signal. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S2605 to execute other processes, and then the V interrupt process ends.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, so that the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times for the player It can give a sense of deafness (dejab). The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences winning of the jackpot after the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the rendering element is executed in the expectation that the rendering element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Whenever it is done, you will be focused on the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the generation condition of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied, and when the feeling of prior notice is to be executed, the type and content of the effect element to be executed plural times are intended. Can be set as Moreover, the number of times of execution of the rendering element of the same content can also be set intentionally. Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to arbitrarily set the occurrence probability (occurrence frequency) of the feeling of prior notice in the case where the jackpot is won or the reach occurs.

  The pachinko machine 10 may control the number of effect elements of the same content to be executed a plurality of times. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may increase the number of effect elements of the same content executed a plurality of times as time passes. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 38 is a time chart showing an example in which the number of effect elements of the same content executed a plurality of times is increased with the passage of time. In the example shown in FIG. 38, the pachinko machine 10 executes the effect element A in the first game cycle P01, and also performs the effect element A in the next game cycle P02, so the effects of the same contents executed a plurality of times The number of elements is one. The pachinko machine 10 further executes the presentation element B in addition to the presentation element A in the game round P02, and executes the presentation element A and the presentation element B in the next game round P03, so the same execution is performed multiple times The number of presentation elements of the content is two. That is, the pachinko machine 10 increases the number of effect elements of the same content executed a plurality of times as time passes. In this way, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes the visual sensation increases with the passage of time, the player's expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

  In the example illustrated in FIG. 38, the control for increasing the number of effect elements having the same content, which is performed a plurality of times, has been described, but the control for reducing may be performed. The pachinko machine 10 is to increase or decrease the player's sense of expectation, to give an expectation to the expectation, and the like, by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements of the same content executed a plurality of times. It can give change.

B. Second embodiment:
Next, a second embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the contents of processing relating to the notice of a feeling of sight. In the following description, the notice of the sense of sight performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. Description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

  FIG. 39 is a time chart showing an example of a feeling of prior notice performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 39 (A) and 39 (B) show two examples, an example 1 and an example 2 of the notice of the feeling of visual appearance in this embodiment.

  In Example 1, at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 2, the game ball wins in the first starting opening 33, and the total reserved number CRN becomes 3, and the pending information related to the relevant winning condition is the condition for generating the feeling of notice of visual appearance. It shows the case of filling. That is, the game play P03 indicated as the third game play is the game play relating to the suspension information that satisfies the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice.

  The pachinko machine 10 is a game cycle before the game cycle P03 related to the suspension information satisfying the condition of occurrence of the notice of visual acuity, when the information on reserve of the game game P03 fulfills the condition of the generation of a sensation of visual acuity The content of the game effect A executed in P01 is stored. That is, the pachinko machine 10 stores the contents of the game effect A to be executed in the game cycle P01 to be executed after determining that the hold information of the game cycle P03 satisfies the occurrence of the visual acuity notice. And, it is a game time later than the game time P01 in which the contents of the game effect A are stored, and the game time P02 which is a game time before the game time P03 related to the suspension information satisfying the condition of occurrence of visible feeling notice. And in the game play P03, the contents of the game effect A stored in the game play P01 are reproduced.

  In the first embodiment, the "rendering element" having the same content is executed a plurality of times as the notice of the feeling of visual acuity, but in the present embodiment, it is composed of a combination of therendering elements performed in the game round P01 Execute multiple times with "game effect" as one unit. That is, the game effect completely the same as the game time P01 is reproduced as it is for a fixed period in each game time of the game times P02 and the game times P03. By doing this, it is possible to preferably give the player a sense of sight.

  In addition, in the game play P03, after executing the game effect A, as in the first embodiment, the suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the effect effect (a victory effect in this example) are executed. Then, after stopping the jackpot symbol in the game play P03, the jackpot effect is executed.

  Specific processing will be described. When it is determined that the suspension information according to the game turn P03 satisfies the condition for generating the notice of the visual acuity notice, the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 executes the game effect A for the game effect A of the game turn P01 to be executed thereafter. Store various setting data to do. The various setting data includes setting data for operating hardware that actually executes effects such as various lamps 47, data for setting commands to be transmitted to the display control apparatus 100, and the like.

  After the game number P01 ends, the sound emission control device 90 actually executes the game effect based on the various setting data for executing the stored game effect A when the game period P02 is started. It controls the lamp 47 and the speaker 46 etc.). Just before the start of the game turn P02, the game effect B to be executed is determined based on the hold information pertaining to the game turn P02, but the sound emission control device 90 has the game effect B hard at the start of the game turn P02. The game effect A is preferentially executed without being executed in a mode that appears in the behavior of the wear. The processing based on the setting data of the game effect B is executed as an internal process within the range not appearing in the behavior of hardware (various lamps 47, speakers 46, etc.) executing the game effect.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (A), when the display continuation time of the game times P02 is longer than the time for executing the game effect A, the sound emission control device 90 plays the game in the game times P02. At the same time as the execution of the effect A ends, the processing by the setting data of the game effect B which has been executed as internal processing within the range not appearing as the behavior of the hardware is switched to the process in the form of appearing as the behavior of the hardware. That is, in the game play P02, after the game effect A is executed, the player recognizes that the game effect B is executed halfway. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice of the feeling of visual appearance shown in the first example.

  Next, an example 2 of the notice of a feeling of visual appearance notice in the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 39 (B). Also in Example 2, as in Example 1, the game ball wins in the first starting opening 33 at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 2, the total reserved number CRN becomes 3, and the suspension information related to the winning is visible It shows the case where the condition for occurrence of feeling notice is satisfied. That is, the game cycle P13 indicated as the third game cycle is the game cycle related to the hold information that satisfies the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice.

  In Example 2, the sound emission control device 90 stores the contents of the game effect C1 which is the game effect of a part of the game effect C0 executed in the game time P11. And, it is a game time later than the game time P11 in which the content of the game effect C1 is stored, and a game time P12 which is a game time before the game time P13 relating to the suspension information satisfying the condition of occurrence of visible feeling advance notice. And, in the game times P13, the contents of the stored game effect C1 are reproduced. Specifically, since the display continuation time of the game times P12 is shorter than the time required to execute the game effect C1, the voice emission control device 90 performs the game for a part of the stored game effect C1 in the game times P12. The game effect C1a which is the effect is reproduced. On the other hand, since the display continuation time of the game times P13 is longer than the time required to execute the game effect C1, the sound emission control device 90 reproduces all the contents of the stored game effect C1 in the game times P13. In addition, in the game round P13, after executing the game effect C1, a suggestion effect, a battle effect, and a result effect (a victory effect in this example) are executed. Then, after stopping the jackpot symbol in the game play P03, the jackpot effect is executed.

  As a specific process, when it is determined that the suspension information according to the game times P13 satisfies the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice, the sound emission control device 90 executes the game executed after the condition of occurrence of the feeling of previous notice is met. The various setting data for executing game effect C1 which is game effect of a part period of game effect C in time P11 is stored. The various setting data includes setting data for operating hardware that actually executes effects such as various lamps 47, data for setting commands to be transmitted to the display control apparatus 100, and the like. In the present embodiment, when the length (time) of the game effect to be stored is set in advance, the display duration time of the game effect C0 is longer than the set length, and thus part of the game time C0 A game effect C1 which is a game effect of a period is stored.

  Furthermore, since the display duration time of the game times P12 is shorter than the time required to execute the stored game effect C1, the sound emission control device 90 is part of the stored game effect C1 in the game times P12. The game effect C1a is reproduced. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 gives notice of the feeling of visual appearance shown in Example 2.

  In the above description, the voice emission control device 90 stores the setting data transmitted to the display control device 100, thereby reproducing the game effect performed in the game period P01 in the game period after the game period P01. However, the display control device 100 stores the moving image data reproduced by the symbol display device 41 in the game times P01 as it is in the buffer, and displays the stored moving image data again in the game times after the game times P01. The device 100 may transmit to the symbol display device 41 for reproduction.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the content of the executed game effect is stored and reproduced, so that the game effect of the completely same content is played for at least a part of the period. Will be experienced. Therefore, it is possible to preferably give the player a sense of sight.

  Further, as in the first embodiment, the player who has recognized the feeling of sight may not have a special meaning with respect to the feeling of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a bonus is given. I will have a sense of anticipation. When the player experiences that a benefit is given after the game effect of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the game effect is executed expecting that the game effect of the same content is executed a plurality of times Every time they have a high expectation, they pay attention to the game production. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the game effect of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the game effect to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  As shown in FIGS. 39 (A) and 39 (B), in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has the same suggestion effect which suggests to the player that the game effect of the same content is reproduced. Execute after the game effect of the contents of is reproduced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game effect of the same content is reproduced, and convince the player that the reproduction of the game effect of the same content has a special meaning. be able to.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment may not select an operation acceptance effect including content that suggests acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as a target of game effect to be stored and reproduced. When the operation acceptance effect is reproduced as a game effect, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight. Since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment does not select the operation reception effect as the game effect to be stored and reproduced, it is possible to suppress different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to certainly give the player a sense of sight.

C. Third embodiment:
Next, a third embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the contents of processing relating to the notice of a feeling of sight. In the following description, the notice of the sense of sight performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. Description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

  FIG. 40 is a time chart showing an example of a feeling of prior notice performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 40 (A) and 40 (B) show two examples, an example 1 and an example 2 of the notice of the feeling of visual appearance in this embodiment. In Example 1, the game ball lands in the first starting opening 33 at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 3, and the total reserved number CRN becomes 4 and the pending information related to the relevant winning condition is the condition for generating the notice of the feeling of visual notice. It shows the case of filling. That is, the game play P04 indicated as the fourth game play is the game play relating to the suspension information that satisfies the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice.

  The pachinko machine 10 in Example 1 continues the game times P04 or earlier according to the hold information satisfying the occurrence condition of the notice of visual appearance notice, when the hold information concerning the game appearance P04 satisfies the generation condition of visual notice. The total duration of the shortest display durations that can be determined as the display durations T1, T2, T3 and T4 of the game duration P01, the game duration P02, the game duration P03, and the game duration P04, which are a plurality of game times. The display duration time of each game time P01 to P04 actually determined is taken as Tre (Tre = T1 + T2 + T3 + T4), and the shortest display duration time that can be determined as the display duration time of each game time P01 to P04 Assuming that the total time is Tsum, the relationship of Tsum ≦ Tre holds.

  Then, the pachinko machine 10 performs an effect element of the same content that can be executed a plurality of times within the calculated total time Tsum until the game cycle P04 relating to the suspension information satisfying the occurrence condition of the feeling of visual notice is completed. Run multiple times. In Example 1 shown in FIG. 40, the pachinko machine 10 is an effect element of the same content that can be executed a plurality of times within a time Tsum below the time Tre which is the display continuation time of each game time P01 to P04 actually determined. A, rendering element B, and rendering element C are executed. In addition, in the game play P04, after executing the game effect A, the suggestion effect, the battle effect, and the effect effect (the victory effect in this example) are executed.

  The pachinko machine 10 of Example 1 executes the rendering element A four times, the rendering element B three times, and the rendering element C twice within the time Tsum. More specifically, the effect elements to be executed a plurality of times are, first, only the effect element A, then the effect element A and the effect element B, and then the effect element A, the effect element B and the effect element C, etc. The number of effect elements of the same content to be executed a plurality of times is increased as time passes.

  Further, as illustrated, in the pachinko machine 10 of Example 1, the effect element A executed at the second, third and fourth times is executed across the game times. That is, the timing at which the variable display of symbols stops is different from the timing at which one rendering element A ends. This will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory view for explaining the display surface 41 a when the feeling of prior notice is performed by the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is divided into the display area 41aS and the display area 41aL when the notice of feeling of anticipation is executed. And in display field 41aS, change display and stop display of a symbol are performed. The variable display and the stop display of the symbols in the display area 41aS are executed in the same cycle as the display continuation time of each of the game times P01 to P04.

  On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, display corresponding to the rendering element A, the rendering element B, and the rendering element C is performed. As the effect element A, for example, an effect element by a video using the entire display area 41aL is displayed. More specifically, the display of a moving image as a background image of the display area 41aL and the display of a moving image consisting of a combination of a background image and an object image displayed in front of the background image are performed. As the effect element B and the effect element C, for example, a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, a background image Background change notice effect that changes to a different mode from time, character notice effect effect that causes a predetermined character to execute a predetermined action, lamp emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, and a pattern row with a predetermined scroll pattern The symbol row variation effect to be varied, the reach effect to vary the remaining one symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and the like can be mentioned. In the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the jackpot effect executed after the end of the game play P04 is executed by displaying a moving image using the entire display surface 41a.

  As described with reference to FIG. 41, for example, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL, and variable display and stop display of symbols in the display area 41aS, and effect elements in the display area 41aL By performing the display and the display in different cycles, the period of the variation display and stop display of the symbol (that is, the period synchronized with the actual display duration time), the effect element A, the effect element B and the effect element C are executed It becomes possible to make an aspect different from the period.

  Next, an example 2 of the notice of the feeling of visual appearance notice in the present embodiment will be described using FIG. 40 (B). In Example 2 as well as Example 1, the game ball wins in the first starting opening 33 at the timing when the total number of reserved pieces CRN is 3, and the total number of reserved pieces CRN becomes 4 and the reserved information related to the winnings is visible It shows the case where the condition for occurrence of feeling notice is satisfied. That is, the game time P14 indicated as the fourth game time is the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the condition for generating the notice of the feeling of visual appearance.

  In Example 2, the time required for the rendering element A to be executed a plurality of times is longer than the display duration time of the game times P11. That is, the pachinko machine 10 executes one rendering element A across game times. The pachinko machine 10 of Example 2 executes the presentation element A as a presentation element that can be performed three times within the total display time Tsum of the shortest display continuation time that can be determined as the display continuation time of four game times P11 to P14. . As shown in Example 2, the number of times of game times required to execute the effect element of the same content a plurality of times (in Example 2, 4 game times) and the number of execution times of the effect element of the same content (Example 2) Then, the rendering element A may be different from 3). The type of effect element to be executed a plurality of times as the same content and the number of times of the effect may be determined according to the value of the calculated total time Tsum. In this case, using the table data in which the total time Tsum is associated with the type of the rendering element and the number of times of execution, the type of the rendering element to be executed multiple times may be determined as the same content.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same content that can be executed a plurality of times in the total duration (Tsum) of the shortest display durations that can be determined as the display duration of each game number Since one rendering element to be executed a plurality of times can be completed within the display continuation time (T1, T2, T3, T4) which is the time actually required for one game cycle. It is not restricted. That is, it is possible to execute the rendering element of the same content multiple times across a plurality of consecutive game times prior to the game time related to the hold information that satisfies the occurrence condition of the feeling of visual appearance. As shown in the second example, it is possible to execute one game effect element A, which is an object to be executed a plurality of times, across game times. Therefore, it is possible to select an effect element to be executed a plurality of times without considering the relationship between the effect time for one effect element and the display duration time for one game cycle.

  Furthermore, since the same content rendering element that can be executed multiple times is executed multiple times within the total time (Tsum) of the shortest display durations that can be determined, the rendering element of the same content is executed multiple times The time required is equal to or less than the total time (Tre) of the display durations of the actual game times. Therefore, when the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times across a plurality of consecutive game times prior to the game times related to the hold information relating to the occurrence condition of the feeling of visible notice, time shortage will occur. It is possible to avoid and reliably execute the rendering element of the same content multiple times.

  Further, as in the first embodiment, since the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), the player can see that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times. It can give a feeling (dejab). The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. When the player experiences that a benefit is given after the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, the effect element is executed in the hope that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time they have a high sense of expectation, they will focus on the directing element. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  As shown in FIGS. 40 (A) and 40 (B), in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has the same suggestion effect which suggests to the player that the effect element of the same content is reproduced. Execute after the effect element of the contents of is executed multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the rendering element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the game has a special meaning that the rendering element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times. Can be convinced by

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation receiving effect element including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not select the operation receiving effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, so that the effect element having different contents is suppressed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to certainly give the player a sense of sight.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 includes a combination of a display of a moving image as a background image of the display area 41aL, and a combination of a background image and an object image displayed in front of the background image as an effect element which is executed a plurality of times with the same content. Display of moving images, cut-in notice effect, notice effect by displaying an object image such as a predetermined character in front of the background image, background change notice effect that changes the background image to a mode different from that at normal time, reach effect, And, various effects such as effects by physically operating items provided on the front door frame 14 and the game board 30, effects by lighting and flickering with various lamps 47, etc. are seen for the player using various effect elements. Can give a feeling. Therefore, the player's attention that the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times can be directed to various effect elements.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment controls the number of effect elements of the same content that are executed a plurality of times. In Example 1 of this embodiment, at first, the rendering element A is executed, the number of rendering elements having the same content is one, and then the game rendering B is executed, and the number of rendering elements having the same content is two. Then, the effect element C is executed and the number of effect elements having the same content is three. In the present embodiment, control is performed to increase the number of effect elements having the same content that is executed a plurality of times, but control to reduce the number may be performed. The pachinko machine 10 is to increase or decrease the player's sense of expectation, to give an expectation to the expectation, etc., by increasing or decreasing the number of presentation elements of the same content executed a plurality of times. It can give change.

  Further, in the example 1 of the present embodiment, first, only the rendering element A, then the rendering element A and the rendering element B, and then the rendering element A, the rendering element B, and the rendering element C, etc. After it is determined that the occurrence condition of feeling notice is satisfied, the same content is executed a plurality of times in the period from the end of the game cycle (game time P04) related to the suspension information satisfying the occurrence condition of visible feeling notice. The number of effect elements is increased with the passage of time. Therefore, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes a sense of sight increases with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

D. Fourth Embodiment:
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the contents of processing relating to the notice of a feeling of sight. In the following description, the notice of the sense of sight performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. Description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted. Hereinafter, specific processing in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 42 is a time chart showing an example of a feeling of prior notice performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. In the first embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice on the basis of the hold information is satisfied is made before the hold information becomes the target of the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, it is determined whether the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice on the basis of the hold information is satisfied, when the hold information becomes a jackpot lottery target. That is, it is determined whether or not the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice on the basis of the hold information is satisfied, and the jackpot lottery based on the hold information is performed immediately before the start of the game round P01 according to the hold information.

  Further, in the first embodiment, as an embodiment of the notice of the feeling of visual appearance, the execution of the rendering element of the same content is performed a plurality of times over a plurality of game times. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, as an aspect of the feeling of prior notice, effect element A, effect element B, and effect element C that can be executed a plurality of times in the display duration time of the game turn. The present invention is executed a plurality of times in one game cycle P01 related to the suspension information determined to satisfy the occurrence condition of the visual notice. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 executes the rendering element A four times, the rendering element B three times, and the rendering element C twice in the game play P01. More specifically, the effect elements to be executed a plurality of times are, first, only the effect element A, then the effect element A and the effect element B, and then the effect element A, the effect element B and the effect element C, etc. The number of effect elements of the same content to be executed a plurality of times is increased as time passes.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes, as in the first embodiment, the effect element A a plurality of times with the suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element of the same content has been performed a plurality of times. Run later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 executes the battle effect and the effect effect (winning effect) after executing the suggestion effect. Then, after the end of the game times P01, the jackpot effect is executed.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect element that can be executed a plurality of times in the display duration time of the game times in the at least one game time is made multiple times with the same content Since the execution is performed, the player can be given a sense of sight in one game cycle. Further, as in the first embodiment, the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, so that the player has a sense of deception (dejab) that the rendering element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times. Can be given. The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggested effect suggesting to the player that the effect element having the same content has been performed a plurality of times, and executes the effect element having the same content a plurality of times. Do. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the rendering element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the game has a special meaning that the rendering element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times. Can be convinced by

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment may not select the operation receiving effect element including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times. The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not select the operation receiving effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, so that the effect element having different contents is suppressed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It is possible to certainly give the player a sense of sight.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment controls the number of effect elements of the same content that are executed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, at first, the rendering element A is executed, the number of rendering elements having the same content is one, and then the game rendering B is executed, and the number of the rendering elements having the same content is two. The number of effect elements having the same content is three when the effect element C is executed. In the present embodiment, control is performed to increase the number of effect elements having the same content that is executed a plurality of times, but control to reduce the number may be performed. The pachinko machine 10 is to increase or decrease the player's sense of expectation, to give an expectation to the expectation, etc., by increasing or decreasing the number of presentation elements of the same content executed a plurality of times. It can give change.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the same process is performed a plurality of times, such as at first only the rendering element A, then the rendering element A and the rendering element B, and then the rendering element A, the rendering element B and the rendering element C, etc. The number of presentation elements of the content is increased with the passage of time. Therefore, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes a sense of sight increases with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

E. Fifth embodiment:
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the contents of processing relating to the notice of a feeling of sight. In the following description, the notice of the sense of sight performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. Description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

  In the said embodiment, control of the display continuation time of each game time was not performed based on determination of whether to perform a feeling of prior notice. In the present embodiment, in the case of executing the feeling of prior notice, at least two of the times of the game before the game according to the holding information according to the hold information for which the condition of occurrence of the feeling of visible feeling is satisfied. Control is performed to ensure a display duration of a predetermined length. And in each game time where display continuation time of predetermined length is secured, an effect element of the same contents that can be executed within display continuation time of the secured predetermined length is executed. The details will be described below.

  FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an outline of processing executed in the main control device 60 and the sound emission control device 90 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes the processing content that the voice emission control device 90 has executed as the hold command handling processing in the first embodiment. In other words, main controller 60 executes the visual sensation notice occurrence lottery process. And, when winning the occurrence lottery of the feeling of prior notice, for example, when executing the feeling of prior notice using three game times, the feeling of watching for the display continuation time of the game times for three times Secure a predetermined length for the execution of the advance notice. Specifically, in the main control device 60, when determining the display continuation time of each of the three game times for executing the notice of visual appearance notice, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS related to each of the three game times, In the comparison with the display continuation time table stored in the display continuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, the notice of notice of visual appearance previously stored in the display continuation time table storage area 63d as a display continuation time table used for collation Use the display duration table for

  The main control device 60 controls and determines the display duration time of the three game times to a length for execution of the notice of a feeling of sight, and then emits voice using information on the display duration time of each determined game time as a command It transmits to the control device 90. The sound emission control device 90 determines the effect elements of the same contents that can be executed, among the display durations of the respective game times for which the main control device 60 has secured a length for execution of the notice of the visible feeling. By doing this, it is possible to control the length of the display continuation time of the game times for the execution of the visual notice.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display continuation time of the predetermined length is secured for execution of the notice of the feeling of sight, and the display continuation time of the predetermined length is secured. Since the effect elements of the same content that can be executed in each game time are executed, the time required to execute the same effect element is prevented from running short in each game time, and the same content is surely in each game time Can be performed.

  In addition, as effect elements used for the notice of a feeling of visual appearance, a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, a background image Background change notice effect that changes to a mode different from normal time, character notice effect effect that causes a predetermined character to execute a predetermined action, lamp emission effect that causes various lamps to emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row with a predetermined scroll pattern Symbol line variation effect to change the symbol, reach effect to change the remaining one symbol row in the state that two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and symbol stop to stop the combination of predetermined symbols A presentation etc. can be adopted. Since the player can be given a sense of sight by using various rendering elements, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the same content is executed multiple times for various rendering elements. .

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times as the notice of visual appearance is performed after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times Do. The player can be made to recognize that the rendering element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the player has a special meaning that the rendering element with the same content has been performed a plurality of times I can be convinced.

  Further, as in the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 may control the number of effect elements of the same content to be executed a plurality of times. By changing the number of effect elements of the same content executed a plurality of times, it is possible to change the player's sense of expectation, such as to increase or decrease the player's sense of expectation, to give an expectation to the expectation. it can.

  Furthermore, after it is determined that the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice has been met, the same content is executed a plurality of times during the period until the game round related to the hold information satisfying the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice ends. The number of elements may be increased as time passes. Since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes a sense of sight increases with the passage of time, the player's expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display continuation time of each game cycle for executing the feeling of prior notice is determined first, and thereafter, the effect element to be executed as the feeling of previous notice based on the determined display continuation time is Although it has been decided, other processing forms can be adopted without being limited to such processing forms.

  For example, the presentation element to be executed as the prior notice may be determined first, and thereafter, the display duration of the executable length of the presentation element to be executed as the prior notice may be secured in each game session . As a specific process, for example, when the main control device 60 performs the visual sensation notice occurrence lottery processing and determines the execution of the visual sensation notice, an effect of the same content to be executed as the visual sensation notice first. Determine the elements. After that, the main control device 60 secures the display duration of the length that can execute the effect element of the same content as the notice of the feeling of visible feeling in each game session. Then, the main control device 60 transmits, to the sound emission control device 90, the display duration time of each game cycle for executing the visual notice and the content of the effect element to be executed as the visual notice.

  By adopting such a processing form, it is possible to secure the display continuation time of the length that can execute the rendering elements of the same content in each game round, so the time required to execute the same rendering elements It is possible to avoid running short in each game time, and to execute the same effect element in each game time.

F. Sixth embodiment:
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a function of acquiring time information, and the processing content related to the notice of a feeling of visual appearance. In the following description, the notice of the sense of sight performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be mainly described. Description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

  The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a function of acquiring time information, and also has a function of executing a time interlocking rendering element which is a rendering element that is continuously executed with the passage of time based on the acquired time information. . In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes an RTC module (RTC: Real Time Clock), and acquires time information from the RTC module. Note that acquisition of time information is not limited to acquisition from the RTC module, and for example, other methods that are technically possible to acquire time information, such as acquisition from outside the pachinko machine 10, may be adopted.

  Further, in the present description, among the effect elements executed by the pachinko machine 10, the effect element that is continuously executed with the passage of time based on time information is called “time interlocking effect element”, The effect element performed without is called "non-time interlocking effect element".

  FIG. 44 is a time chart showing an example of a feeling of prior notice performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 44 also shows a time-linked effect element executed by another pachinko machine of the same model as the pachinko machine 10 installed in the same game hall as the pachinko machine 10 for comparison.

  As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 and the other pachinko machines start execution of the time-linked effect element at time T0. And, the pachinko machine 10 and the other pachinko machines continuously execute the time-linked effect element with the passage of time. In the present description, another pachinko machine executes a series of time-linked effect elements set in advance. For the convenience of explanation, in order to indicate the temporal position of a series of time-linked effect elements, in a series of time-linked effect elements executed by other pachinko machines, the temporal position as an index indicating the temporal position of time-linked effect elements TP1 to TP20 are illustrated. In addition, each time position shown in the figure is described in the form which abbreviate | omitted the code | symbol of "TP".

  As illustrated, in the pachinko machine 10, at the timing when the total reserved number CRN is 3, the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 33, the total reserved number CRN becomes 4, and the suspension information related to the winning is visible It shows a case where the notice condition of occurrence of the feeling notice is satisfied and the notice of the feeling of sight is executed. That is, the game play P04 indicated as the fourth game play is the game play relating to the suspension information that satisfies the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice.

  The pachinko machine 10 stores, as a specific temporal position, the temporal position TP of the time-linked effect element that is being executed at the timing when the game turn P01 is started after it is determined that the occurrence condition of the feeling of prior notice has been met. . In the example shown in FIG. 44, the pachinko machine 10 stores the temporal position TP3 of the time-linked effect element as a specific temporal position. And, the pachinko machine 10 is the game time where execution is started after it decides that the occurrence condition of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied, and it is the game time P04 or earlier concerning the suspension information that decides that the condition of occurrence of the feeling of previous notice is satisfied. The game interlocked with the time interlocking effect element is triggered by the timing of starting each game turn of the game turn P01 which is the game turn of the game turn P01, the game turn P02, the game turn P03 and the game turn P04 The target position TP3 is executed as the start position.

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the occurrence condition of the notice of a feeling of sight notice is satisfied and the non-time interlocking rendering element is executed together with the time interlocking rendering element, the time interlocking The rendering element and the non-time interlocking rendering element are executed a plurality of times. Then, after the pachinko machine 10 executes the rendering elements (time-cooperative rendering element and non-time-cooperating rendering element) a plurality of times, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggested rendering that suggests to the player that the same rendering element has been executed a plurality of times. Do. Then, after the suggestion effect is performed, the battle effect and the effect effect (winning effect) are performed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 can control the number of non-time-locked effect elements executed a plurality of times. In this embodiment, the non-time interlocking effect element executed a plurality of times is only the non-time interlocking effect element A in the game time P01, the non-time interlocking effect element A and the non-time interlocking effect element B in the game time P02, the game time P03 Then, like non-time interlocking effect element A, non-time interlocking effect element B and non-time interlocking effect element C, and even game time P04, non time interlocking effect element A, non time interlocking effect element B and non time interlocking effect element C, etc. The number of non-time-locked effect elements of the same content to be executed a plurality of times is increased as time passes.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time-linked effect element executed in at least a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, so the effect with a new interest is given to the player Can be provided. In addition, since the time-linked effect element performed in at least a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, the player feels that the time-linked effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times (dejab) Can be given. The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given.

  Furthermore, when the player experiences that a benefit is given after the time-linked effect element has been executed a plurality of times, the time-linked effect element is executed in anticipation of the time effect element being performed a plurality of times. Always come to pay attention to the time-linked production elements with a high sense of expectation at all times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the player's attention to the time-linked effect element executed based on the time information. The interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, as in the case of the other pachinko machine shown in FIG. 44, when a plurality of pachinko machines having the same features as pachinko machine 10 are installed in the game hall, pachinko machines that satisfy the condition of occurrence of the prior notice. Time difference in time interlocking effect elements to be executed between the machine 10 and a pachinko machine which does not satisfy the condition of occurrence of a feeling of prior notice, even when the same time interlocking effect is started from the same time T0 ( Deviation) occurs. As a result, in addition to the player of the pachinko machine 10, the players of the surrounding pachinko machines also recognize that the visual sensation notice has occurred in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to a player who is playing a game with the pachinko machine 10 that satisfies the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice.

  In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the time-linked effect element whose starting position is the temporal position TP3 which is a specific temporal position, in each of the gaming rounds P01 to P04, the player is presented to the player A strong sense of sight can be recognized with respect to a portion after the temporal position TP3 which is a specific temporal position of the time-linked effect element. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 plays a stronger sense of vision by synchronizing the timing of the start of the time-linked effect element executed a plurality of times with the timing of the start of each game cycle (game cycle P01 to game cycle P04). Can be given to

  In addition, if it is assumed that the start position of the time-linked effect element, which is triggered by the start timing of each game cycle, is determined in advance as the processing of the feeling of visual appearance notice, even among the time-linked effect elements From the temporal position which has not been performed, there may be a notice of a feeling of sight using a time-linked effect element. For example, when it is set that the time interlocking rendering element is executed from a specific temporal position "TP10" every time triggered by the timing of start of each game time of game times P01 to game times P04, game time P01 The time-linked effect element which has been executed as a continuous series of flows (temporal positions TP1 to TP2) until the first game cycle P01 of the game cycles P04 is started is the start of the first game cycle P01 As a result, the time-linked effect element is started and executed from a specific temporal position TP10 which has not been executed even once. Also, the temporal positions TP3 to TP9 are not executed.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is executed at the timing when the game cycle P01, which is started after the process of determining that the game cycle P04 satisfies the occurrence condition of the visual notice, is started. The temporal position TP3 of the time interlocking rendering element is stored as a specific temporal position, and the stored specific temporal position TP3 is executed for a second time or more of a plurality of times (game times P02 to game times P04) Since the start position of the time-linked effect element is used, the second or later of the time-linked effect element that is executed a plurality of times from once executed as a continuous series of flow (temporal positions TP1 to TP5) of the time-linked effect element The temporal position TP3 can be set as the start position of. Therefore, the time-linked effect element that has been executed as a continuous series of flows (temporal positions TP1 to TP2) until the first game cycle 01 of the game cycle P01 to game cycle P04 is started is the first. It is possible to avoid sudden interruption at the timing of the start of the game play P01, and to avoid the start and execution of the time-linked effect element from a specific temporal position TP10 which has not been executed even once. In addition, all parts (temporal positions TP1 to TP20) of the time-linked effect element will be executed, enabling the player to experience all parts of the time-linked effect element.

  Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the non-time interlocking rendering element a plurality of times in addition to the time interlocking rendering element, the player can be given a stronger sense of sight. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment can control the number of non-time interlocking effect elements executed a plurality of times. Therefore, by changing the number of non-time-linked effect elements to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to change the player's sense of expectation, such as increasing or decreasing the player's sense of expectation or giving an impression on the feeling of expectation. Can. In the pachinko machine 10, since the number of non-time interlocking effect elements increases with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment may not select an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player as a non-time interlocking effect element to be executed a plurality of times. The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment does not select the operation receiving effect element as the non-time interlocking effect element to be executed a plurality of times, so that the effect element having different contents is suppressed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. can do. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestive effect, the player can be made to recognize that the effect element (time interlocking effect element, non time interlocking effect element) of the same content has been executed a plurality of times. In addition, the player can be convinced that the rendering element having the same content has a special meaning in that it is executed a plurality of times.

G. Seventh embodiment:
The pachinko machine 10 according to the first to sixth embodiments is configured not to select the operation reception effect element as the presentation element for the feeling of visible notice, but the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment provides the notice There is a configuration in which a button effect which is one of the operation acceptance effect elements may be selected as an effect element for the purpose. In the following, a description will be given of the case where the occurrence condition of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied, and the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the feeling of prior notice and executes the button effect a plurality of times.

<Example 1 of notice of feeling of visual appearance using button effect>
FIG. 45 is a flow chart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XA as the effect element for the notice of the existing feeling notice and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 46 is an explanatory view showing the contents of effect modes XA1 and XA2 and a suggested effect F executed in the button effect XA.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the button effect XA for the first time, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect aspect XA1 including content that suggests pressing of the effect operation button 24 to the player (S2701). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the effect aspect XA1 is an effect aspect which displays an image of a treasure box and displays characters and an image prompting the user to depress the effect operation button 24. However, the effect aspect XA1 may be another aspect.

  After the effect mode XA1 is executed, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2702: YES), the effect mode XA1 and the process are triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24. Execute a different presentation mode XA2 (S2703). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the effect mode XA2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from the treasure box. However, the effect aspect XA2 may be another aspect. On the other hand, when the rendering operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2702: NO), the rendering mode XA2 is not executed while the rendering mode XA1 is being executed.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XA, it executes the effect aspect XA1 as in the case of the first button effect XA (S2704 or S2707). Then, when the effect mode XA2 is executed when the first button effect XA is executed, after the effect mode XA1 is executed (S2704), there is no case where the effect operation button 24 is pressed. In either case (S2705), the effect aspect XA2 is executed (S2706). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within the predetermined time (S2705: YES), the effect mode XA2 is executed triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24 ((S2705: YES)) S2706). On the other hand, when the rendering operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2705: NO), the rendering mode XA2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S2706).

  On the other hand, when the presentation mode XA2 was not executed when the first button presentation was executed, there were cases where the presentation operation button 24 was pressed after the presentation mode XA1 was executed (S2707) In any of the cases (S2708), the rendering mode XA2 is not executed while the rendering mode XA1 is executed.

  When the second button effect XA ends, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XA of the same content has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S2709). In the example shown in FIG. 46, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Might, Deja !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effect described above.

  When the button effect XA is executed three or more times, the same control as when the second button effect XA is executed is repeatedly performed, and the suggested effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XA. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24, timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.) May be When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the button effect XA a plurality of times as the effect element for the prior notice of the visual sensation, when the effect mode XA2 is executed in the first button effect XA, the input by the player Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, when the effect mode XA2 is executed in the second or subsequent button effect XA, and the effect mode X like A2 is not executed in the first button effect XA, the input by the player Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, the effect mode XA2 is not executed in the second and subsequent button effects XA. Therefore, even when the button effect XA is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XA to be executed for the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. Then, as in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of deception (dejav) that the button effect XA of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to allow the player to recognize that the button effect XA of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XA of the content has a special meaning in being executed a plurality of times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XA2 is triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24. Since the execution is performed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XA, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the player does not press the rendering operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the rendering mode XA2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. can do. Furthermore, even when the player does not press the rendering operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the rendering aspect XA2 is executed, so that unexpectedness can be given to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Can. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XA2 at a predetermined timing without being triggered by the depression of the effect operation button 24 or the elapse of a predetermined time.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment selects the button effect XA as the presentation element for the notice of the visual acuity, and the button effect XA is performed a plurality of times in the case where the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the depression of the rendering operation button 24 is accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is temporarily displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times, and the button effect is performed with the same content. Even if the button is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel a sense of sight for the button effect performed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is performed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual sense notice, and it is difficult for the player to feel the visual appearance. It is possible to suppress the However, in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the visual acuity notice and executes the button a plurality of times, the pachinko machine 10 is in a case where the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied. Parameters may be displayed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sighting is satisfied before the hold information becomes a target of the big hit lottery, and the occurrence of the feeling of prior notice When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XA that is an object to be executed a plurality of times before the hold information determined to satisfy the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sighting is a target of the big hit lottery Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a sense of visual appearance over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied when the on-hold information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the on-hold information. It may be configured to execute XA multiple times.

  The pachinko machine 10 may include changing means for changing the mode of the rendering operation button 24 to the mode (that is, the mode in which it is depressed by pressing) when the button is pressed. Then, the change means is pressed when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed (S2705: NO) and the effect mode XA2 is executed (S2706) and the effect operation button 24 is pressed. It may be changed to the aspect in the case. If such a changing means is provided, the aspect of the effect operation button 24 changes, so that it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game, and the effect aspect XA2 is in spite of the fact that the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. It can be persuasive to be implemented. The changing means can be realized, for example, by providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24.

  In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XA is executed based on the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect operation button 24 The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XA may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the time and the number of times pressed. .

  Further, in the above example, the presentation operation button 24 is described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or a lever operated by the player back and forth or right and left, a button detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor detecting a hand approaching a liquid crystal screen, etc. Can. Hereinafter, an example of the process of the button effect XA will be described.

  FIG. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when the button effect XA is executed as an effect element (notice effect effect) for a feeling of prior notice. In step S2801, it is determined whether an initial execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 or not. In the first execution completed flag, after the visual sensation notice flag is stored, that is, after the generation condition of the visual sensation notice is satisfied, the notice effect (button effect XA) for visual sense notice is already executed once. This is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 whether or not it is completed.

  If it is determined in step S2801 that the initial execution completion flag is not stored (S2801: NO), that is, if the button effect XA has not been executed even once after the visual appearance notice flag is stored. Then, the process proceeds to step S2802, and the above-described effect aspect XA1 is executed on the symbol display device 41 as the effect execution means, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47. The effect mode XA1 includes content that suggests the player to press the effect operation button 24. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2803.

  In step S2803, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S2803 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S2803: YES), the process proceeds to step S2804, and the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are described above. The presentation mode XA2 is executed. After step S2804 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2805, and the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. The button pressing flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that pressing of the effect operation button 24 has been performed when the first button effect XA is executed. After executing step S2805, the process proceeds to step S2807.

  If it is determined in step S2803 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2803: NO), the process proceeds to step S2806, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2806 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2806: NO), the process returns to step S2803 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of depression of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2806 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S2806: YES), that is, if there is no depression of the rendering operation button 24 within the predetermined time, step S2804 and step S2805 are not executed. Go to S2807.

  In step S2807, the flag of the first execution is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94, and then the first button effect XA is ended.

  If it is determined in step S2801 that the initial execution completion flag is stored (S2801: YES), that is, if the button effect XA has already been executed at least once after the visual appearance notice flag is stored. The process proceeds to step S2808, and causes the symbol display device 41 as the effect execution means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to execute the effect aspect XA1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2809.

  In step S2809, it is determined whether the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 or not. In step S2809, when it is determined that the button pressing flag is not stored (S2809: NO), that is, when the first button effect XA is executed, there is no pressing of the rendering operation button 24. The process proceeds to step S 2810, stands by until a predetermined time passes, and after the predetermined time passes, the second and subsequent button effects XA are ended without executing the effect mode XA 2 (step S 2812).

  In step S2809, when it is determined that the button pressing flag is stored (S2809: YES), that is, when the first button effect XA is executed, the effect operation button 24 is pressed. In step S2811, it is determined whether the effect operation button 24 has been pressed in the button effect XA being executed this time.

  If it is determined in step S2811 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S2811: YES), the process proceeds to step S2812, and the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47 effect aspect XA2 Is executed, the second and subsequent button effects XA are ended.

  If it is determined in step S2811 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S2811: NO), the process proceeds to step S2813, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2813 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S2813: NO), the process returns to step S2811, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of depression of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S2813 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S2813: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S2812, and symbol display as effect execution means After causing the apparatus 41, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47 to execute the effect mode XA2, the second and subsequent button effects XA are ended.

  According to the above process, the button effect XA can be executed multiple times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The processing described above is an example, and the processing of the button effect XA may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 2 of notice of feeling of visual appearance using button effect>
FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XB as the effect element for the notice of the existing feeling notice and executes the button effect XB twice. FIG. 49 is an explanatory view showing the contents of effect modes XB1, XB2, XB3 and a suggested effect F executed in the button effect XB.

  When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment starts executing the first button effect XB, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect mode XB1 including content that suggests pressing of the effect operation button 24 to the player (S2901). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the effect mode XB1 is an effect mode that displays an image of a treasure box and displays characters and an image prompting the user to press the effect operation button 24. However, the effect aspect XB1 may be another aspect.

  After the effect mode XB1 is executed, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S2902: YES), the effect mode XB1 and the process are triggered when the effect operation button 24 is pressed. Execute a different presentation mode XB2 (S2903). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the effect mode XB2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from the treasure box. However, the effect aspect XB2 may be another aspect. On the other hand, when there is no depression of the rendering operation button 24 within the predetermined time (S 2902: NO), the rendering mode XB 3 different from the rendering mode XB 1 and the rendering mode XB 2 is executed with the lapse of the predetermined time (S 2907) . In the example shown in FIG. 49, the effect aspect XB3 is an effect aspect in which the fish character carries away the treasure box. However, the effect aspect XB3 may be another aspect.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XB, it executes the effect aspect XB1 as in the case of the first button effect XB (S2904 or S2908). Then, when the effect mode XB2 is executed when the first button effect XB is executed, after the effect mode XB1 is executed (S2904), there is no case where the effect operation button 24 is pressed. In either case (S2905), the effect aspect XB2 is executed (S2906). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within the predetermined time (S2905: YES), the effect mode XB2 is executed triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24 ((S2905: YES) S2906). On the other hand, when the rendering operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2905: NO), the rendering mode XB2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S2906).

  On the other hand, when the presentation mode XB3 is executed when the first button presentation XB is executed, there is no case where the presentation operation button 24 is pressed after the presentation mode XB1 is executed (S2908) In either case (S2909), the effect aspect XB3 is executed (S2910). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within the predetermined time (S2909: YES), the effect mode XB3 is executed with the pressing of the effect operation button 24 as a trigger ( S2910). On the other hand, when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S2909: NO), the effect aspect XB3 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S2910).

  When the second button effect XB ends, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XB of the same content has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S2911). In the example shown in FIG. 49, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Hey, dejave !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effect described above.

  When the button effect XB is executed three or more times, the same control as when the second button effect XB is executed is repeatedly executed, and the suggested effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XB. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24, timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.) May be When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment executes the button effect XB a plurality of times as the effect element for the prior notice of the visual sensation, when the effect mode XB2 is executed in the first button effect XB, the input by the player Regardless of the operation mode of the operation, when the effect mode XB2 is executed in the second and subsequent button effects XB, and the effect mode XB3 is executed in the first button effect XB, the operation mode of the input operation by the player Regardless of, the effect mode XB3 is executed in the second and subsequent button effects XB. Therefore, even when the button effect XB is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XB to be executed for the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. Then, as in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of deception (dejav) that the button effect XB of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to allow the player to recognize that the button effect XB of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same. It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning to the fact that the button effect XB of the content is executed a plurality of times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect of the effect operation button 24 is taken as a trigger for the effect aspect XB2 or Since the effect aspect XB3 is executed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XB, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the player does not press the rendering operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the rendering aspect XB2 or the rendering is triggered by the passage of the predetermined time. Aspect XB3 can be implemented. Furthermore, even if the player does not press the rendering operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the rendering mode XB2 or the rendering mode XB3 is executed, so that unexpectedness can be given to the game, and the game is entertaining It can improve. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the rendering mode XB2 or the rendering mode XB3 at a predetermined timing without being triggered by the depression of the rendering operation button 24 or the elapse of a predetermined time.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment selects the button effect XB as an effect element for the notice of the visual acuity, when the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the depression of the rendering operation button 24 is accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is temporarily displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times, and the button effect is performed with the same content. Even if the button is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel a sense of sight for the button effect performed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is performed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual sense notice, and it is difficult for the player to feel the visual appearance. It is possible to suppress the However, in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the visual acuity notice and executes the button a plurality of times, the pachinko machine 10 is in a case where the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied. Parameters may be displayed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sighting is satisfied before the hold information becomes a target of the big hit lottery, and the occurrence of the feeling of prior notice When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XB which is an object to be executed a plurality of times before the hold information determined to satisfy the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sighting is a target of the big hit lottery Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a sense of visual appearance over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied when the on-hold information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the on-hold information. The configuration may be such that XB is executed multiple times.

  The pachinko machine 10 may include changing means for changing the mode of the rendering operation button 24 to the mode (that is, the mode in which it is depressed by pressing) when the button is pressed. Then, the change unit is pressed when the effect operation button 24 is not pressed (S2905: NO) and the effect mode XB2 is executed (S2906) and the effect operation button 24 is pressed. It may be changed to the aspect in the case. If such a change means is provided, the aspect of the effect operation button 24 changes, so that it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game, and the effect aspect XB2 is in spite of the fact that the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. It can be persuasive to be implemented. The changing means can be realized, for example, by providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24.

  In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XB is executed based on the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect operation button 24 Control of the effect mode to be executed in the button effect XB may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the time and the number of times pressed. .

  Further, in the above example, the presentation operation button 24 is described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or a lever operated by the player back and forth or right and left, a button detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor detecting a hand approaching a liquid crystal screen, etc. Can. Hereinafter, an example of the process of the button effect XB will be described.

  FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when the button effect XB is executed as an effect element (notice effect effect) for a feeling of prior notice. In step S3001, it is determined whether the first execution completion flag is stored in the sound light side RAM 94 or not. If it is determined in step S3001 that the initial execution completion flag is not stored (S3001: NO), that is, if the button effect XB has not been executed even once after the visual appearance notice flag is stored. The process proceeds to step S3002, and the above-described effect aspect XB1 is executed on the symbol display device 41 as the effect execution means, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47. The effect mode XB1 includes content that suggests the player to press the effect operation button 24. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3003.

  In step S3003, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3003 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3003: YES), the process proceeds to step S3004, and the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are described above. The presentation mode XB2 is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3005, and the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S3003 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3003: NO), the process proceeds to step S3006, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. In step S3006, when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3006: NO), the process returns to step S3003, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of depression of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3006 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3006: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3007, and symbol display as effect execution means The apparatus 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 execute the above-described effect aspect XB3. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3008.

  In step S3008, the flag of the first execution is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94, and then the first button effect XB is ended.

  If it is determined in step S3001 that the initial execution completion flag is stored (S3001: YES), that is, if the button effect XB has already been executed at least once after the visual appearance notice flag is stored. The process advances to step S3009 to cause the symbol display device 41 as the effect execution means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to execute the effect aspect XB1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3010.

  In step S3010, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3010 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3010: YES), the process proceeds to step S3012. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3010 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3010: NO), the process proceeds to step S3011, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3011 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3011: NO), the process returns to step S3010, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of depression of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3011 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3011: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3012.

  In step S3012, it is determined whether a button press flag is stored. If it is determined in step S3012 that the button pressing flag is stored (S3012: YES), the process proceeds to step S3013, and the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 After the execution, the second and subsequent button effects XB are ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3012 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S3012: NO), the process proceeds to step S3014, and the display mode is applied to the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. After XB3 is executed, the second and subsequent button effects XB are ended.

  According to the above process, the button effect XB can be executed multiple times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the process of the button effect XB may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 3 of notice of feeling of visual appearance using button effect>
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XC as an effect element for anticipation of an existing feeling notice and executes the button effect XC twice. FIG. 52 is an explanatory view showing the contents of effect modes XC1 and XC2 and a suggested effect F executed in the button effect XC.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the button effect XC for the first time, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect mode XC1 including content that suggests pressing of the effect operation button 24 to the player (S3101). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the effect aspect XC1 is an effect aspect which displays an image of a treasure box and also displays characters and an image prompting the depression of the effect operation button 24. However, the effect aspect XC1 may be another aspect.

  After the effect mode XC1 is executed, the effect mode XC2 different from the effect mode XC1 is executed (S3103) regardless of whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed (S3102). . Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within the predetermined time (S3102: YES), the effect mode XC2 is executed triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24 ((S3102: YES)) S3103). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the effect mode XC2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from the treasure box. However, the effect aspect XC2 may be another aspect. On the other hand, when the rendering operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3102: NO), the rendering mode XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S3103).

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XC, it executes the effect aspect XC1 as in the case of the first button effect XC (S3104). After the effect mode XC1 is executed, the effect mode XC2 is executed (S3106) regardless of whether or not the effect operation button 24 is pressed (S3105). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within the predetermined time (S3105: YES), the effect mode XC2 is executed with the pressing of the effect operation button 24 as a trigger ( S3106). On the other hand, when the rendering operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3105: NO), the rendering mode XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed (S3106).

  When the second button effect XC ends, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XC having the same content is executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3107). In the example shown in FIG. 52, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Might, Deja !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effect described above.

  When the button effect XC is performed three or more times, the same control as when the first and second button effect XCs are performed is repeatedly performed, and the suggestion effect F is performed after the end of the last button effect XC. You just have to do it.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24, timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.) May be The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs the input operation by the player after executing the effect aspect XC 1 similarly, when performing the button effect XC for the first time, and when performing the button effect XC for the second time or later. Regardless of the operation mode of, the presentation mode XC2 is executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XC is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XC to be executed for the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. Then, as in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of deception (dejav) that the button effect XC having the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to allow the player to recognize that the button effect XC of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XC of the content has a special meaning in being executed a plurality of times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XC 2 is triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24. Since the execution is performed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XC, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the effect mode XC2 is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. can do. Furthermore, even when the player does not press the rendering operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the rendering aspect XC 2 is executed, so that unexpectedness can be given to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Can. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XC2 at a predetermined timing without being triggered by the depression of the effect operation button 24 or the elapse of a predetermined time.

  Furthermore, in the first button effect XC, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment forcibly executes the effect mode XC2 even if the player does not press the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time. Therefore, a player who knows this mechanism is expected to forcibly perform the effect mode XC2 without intentionally depressing the effect operation button 24 when the first button effect XC is executed. It will be done. In addition, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 in which the button effect XA and the button effect XB can be executed in addition to the button effect XC, the effect mode XC2 is not forcibly executed in the first button effect. Even if there is, the player recognizes that the currently-performed button effect is not the button effect XC, but the possibility of the button effect XA described above or the possibility of the button effect XB being left. It will be expected that the possibility that presentation F will be carried out remains. Therefore, the player can play games with expectation for the second and subsequent button effects.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment selects the button effect XC as a presentation element for the notice of the visual acuity, when the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied, and selects the button graphic XC a plurality of times. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the depression of the rendering operation button 24 is accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is temporarily displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times, and the button effect is performed with the same content. Even if the button is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel a sense of sight for the button effect performed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is performed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual sense notice, and it is difficult for the player to feel the visual appearance. It is possible to suppress the However, in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the visual acuity notice and executes the button a plurality of times, the pachinko machine 10 is in a case where the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied. Parameters may be displayed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sighting is satisfied before the hold information becomes a target of the big hit lottery, and the occurrence of the feeling of prior notice When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XC which is an object to be executed a plurality of times before the hold information determined to satisfy the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sighting is a target of the big hit lottery Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a sense of visual appearance over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied when the on-hold information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the on-hold information. It may be configured to execute XC multiple times.

  The pachinko machine 10 may include changing means for changing the mode of the rendering operation button 24 to the mode (that is, the mode in which it is depressed by pressing) when the button is pressed. Then, the change unit is pressed when there is no pressing of the rendering operation button 24 (S3105: NO) and the rendering mode XC2 is executed (S3106), the pressing of the mode of the rendering operation button 24 It may be changed to the aspect in the case. If such a change means is provided, the aspect of the effect operation button 24 changes, so it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game, and the effect aspect XC2 is in spite of the fact that the effect operation button 24 is not pressed. It can be persuasive to be implemented. The changing means can be realized, for example, by providing an actuator such as a solenoid or a motor inside the effect operation button 24.

  In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XC is executed based on the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect operation button 24 The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XC may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the time and the number of times pressed. .

  Further, in the above example, the presentation operation button 24 is described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or a lever operated by the player back and forth or right and left, a button detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor detecting a hand approaching a liquid crystal screen, etc. Can. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XC will be described.

  FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when the button effect XC is executed as an effect element (notice effect effect) for a feeling of prior notice. In this button effect XC, the same processing is performed in the case where it is executed for the first time and the case where it is executed after the second time.

  In step S3201, the above-described effect aspect XC1 is executed on the symbol display device 41 as the effect execution means, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47. The effect mode XC1 includes content that suggests the player to press the effect operation button 24. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3202.

  In step S3202, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3202 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3202: YES), the process proceeds to step S3204, and the effect described above for the symbol display device 41 as a effect executing means, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 After executing the aspect XC2, the button effect XC is ended.

  If it is determined in step S3202 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3202: NO), the process proceeds to step S3203, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3203 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3203: NO), the process returns to step S3202, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of depression of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3203 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3203: YES), that is, if there is no depression of the rendering operation button 24 within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S3204 and functions as a production execution means After the effect mode XC2 is executed by the symbol display device 41, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47, the button effect XC is ended.

  According to the above process, the button effect XC can be executed multiple times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. Note that the process described above is an example, and the process of the button effect XC may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 4 of notice of feeling of visual appearance using button effect>
FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XA as the effect element for the notice of the existing feeling notice and executes the button effect XD twice. FIG. 55 is an explanatory view showing the contents of the effect selection screen XD1, the effect aspect XD2 and the suggested effect F executed in the button effect XD.

  When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment starts executing the first button effect XD, the pachinko machine 10 includes a content that suggests pressing of the effect operation button 24 to the player, and one of a plurality of options. An effect selection screen XD1 for causing the player to select an option is displayed (S3301). The effect selection screen XD1 is a selection screen in which the selection state is switched each time the effect operation button 24 is pressed. In the example shown in FIG. 55, in the effect selection screen XD1, a female character appears in the middle of the screen, and a plurality of turtle characters carrying shellfish appear in front of the female character, and pressing of the operation operation button 24 is Every time there is a turtle character moving to the left (S3302), a new turtle character appears from the right side of the screen. In the present embodiment, since the patterns of the respective turtle characters are the same, the mode of the effect selection screen XD1 does not change before and after the effect operation button 24 is pressed. However, the effect selection screen XD1 may have another aspect other than that shown in FIG. 55, and may be configured to be different before and after the effect operation button is pressed.

  And the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment performs presentation aspect XD2 corresponding to the choice selected at the timing to which predetermined time passed (S3303). In the example shown in FIG. 55, in the effect mode XD2, a turtle character in front of a female character is selected at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed, and a shell shelled by the selected turtle character opens, and the shell character It is an effect mode in which a pearl having a predetermined feature appears from the inside. In the present embodiment, the pattern of each turtle character is the same, but the feature of an object such as a pearl appearing from inside the shell differs for each turtle character.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XD, the pachinko machine 10 displays the same effect selection screen XD1 as the effect selection screen XD1 displayed in the first button effect XD (S3304). Then, each time the rendering operation button 24 is pressed, the turtle character is moved to the left (S3305), and the same as the rendering mode XD2 corresponding to the first selected option at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed. The effect mode XD2 is executed (S3306). In the example shown in FIG. 55, the turtle character in front of the female character is selected at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed, and the shellfish carried by the selected turtle character opens, and the first shellfish is selected. The effect aspect XD2 which the pearl which has the same characteristic appears is implemented.

  When the second button effect XD ends, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XD of the same content has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3307). In the example shown in FIG. 55, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Mee, Dejab !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effect described above.

  When the button effect XD is executed three or more times, the same control as that performed when the second button effect XD is executed is repeatedly performed, and the suggested effect F is executed after the end of the last button effect XD. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24, timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.) May be The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment performs the button effect XD to be executed for the second time and thereafter regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for visual sense notice. In the second embodiment, the same effect mode as the effect mode performed in the first button effect XD is executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XD to be executed for the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. Then, as in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of debating (dejav) that the button effect XD having the same content is performed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to allow the player to recognize that the button effect XD of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same. It is possible to convince the player that there is a special meaning to the fact that the button effect XD of the content is executed a plurality of times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect selection screen XD1 is the same mode before and after the selection state is switched, so when the button effect XD is executed a plurality of times, the effect of the same mode The same effect mode XD2 is executed from the selection screen XD1. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the feeling of being given to the player.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment selects the button effect XD as the presentation element for the notice of the visual acuity, and the button graphic XD is performed a plurality of times in the case where the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the depression of the rendering operation button 24 is accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is temporarily displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times, and the button effect is performed with the same content. Even if the button is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel a sense of sight for the button effect performed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is performed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual sense notice, and it is difficult for the player to feel the visual appearance. It is possible to suppress the However, in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the visual acuity notice and executes the button a plurality of times, the pachinko machine 10 is in a case where the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied. Parameters may be displayed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sighting is satisfied before the hold information becomes a target of the big hit lottery, and the occurrence of the feeling of prior notice When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XD that is an object to be executed a plurality of times before the holding information determined to satisfy the occurrence condition of the feeling of prior notice of the visual recognition becomes a target of the big hit lottery Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a sense of visual appearance over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied when the on-hold information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the on-hold information. It may be configured to execute XD multiple times.

  In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XD is executed based on the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect operation button 24 Control of the effect mode to be executed in the button effect XD may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the time and the number of times pressed. .

  Further, in the above example, the presentation operation button 24 is described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or a lever operated by the player back and forth or right and left, a button detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor detecting a hand approaching a liquid crystal screen, etc. Can. Hereinafter, an example of processing of the button effect XD will be described.

  FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a button effect XD is executed as an effect element (notice effect effect) for a feeling of prior notice. In step S3401, it is determined whether an initial execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 or not. If it is determined in step S3401 that the initial execution completed flag is not stored (S3401: NO), that is, if the button effect XD has not been executed even once after the visual appearance notice flag is stored. In step S3402, the above-described effect selection screen XD1 is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 execute patterns of sound and light corresponding to the effect selection screen XD1. The effect selection screen XD1 includes content suggesting to the player that the effect operation button 24 is pressed. Then, it progresses to step S3403.

  In step S3403, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3403 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3403: YES), the process proceeds to step S3404 and causes the symbol display device 41 to display the effect selection screen XD1 in the selected state. In the example shown in FIG. 55, on the effect selection screen XD1, the turtle character moves to the left, and a mode in which a new turtle character appears from the right side of the screen is displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3405, in which it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3405 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3405: NO), the process returns to step S3403 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of depression of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In step S3405, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3405: YES), the process proceeds to step S3406, and the selected rendering mode XD2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a rendering execution means, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 Run it. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3407.

  In step S3407, the type information of the effect aspect XD2 executed in step S3406 is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3408, and after storing the initial execution completion flag in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94, the first button effect XD is ended.

  If it is determined in step S3401 that the initial execution completion flag is stored (S3401: YES), that is, if the button effect XD has already been executed at least once after the visual appearance notice flag is stored. The process proceeds to step S3409, and causes the symbol display device 41 to display the same effect selection screen XD1 as the first time, and causes the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47 to execute sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XD1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3410.

  In step S3410, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3410 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3410: YES), the process proceeds to step S3411, and the symbol display device 41 displays the effect selection screen XD1 in a state where the selection state is switched. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3412, in which it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed.

  When it is determined in step S3412 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3412: NO), the process returns to step S3410, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of depression of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3412 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3412: YES), the process proceeds to step S3413, and the effect aspect XD2 stored in step S3407 is displayed as the symbol display device 41 as effect performing means, the speaker 46 and After making the various lamps 47 execute, the second and subsequent button effects XD are ended.

  According to the above process, the button effect XD can be executed multiple times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the process of the button effect XD may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 5 of notice of feeling of visual appearance using button effect>
FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XE as the effect element for the notice of the existing feeling notice and executes the button effect XE twice. FIG. 58 is an explanatory view showing the contents of the effect selection screen XE1, the effect aspect XE2 and the suggested effect F executed in the button effect XE.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the first button effect XE, the pachinko machine 10 includes content that suggests pressing of the effect operation button 24 to the player, and one effect out of a plurality of effect modes. An effect selection screen XE1 which causes the player to select the mode is displayed (S3501). The effect selection screen XE1 is a selection screen in which the selected state of the effect mode is switched as time passes. In the example shown in FIG. 58, the effect selection screen XE1 is a roulette-type selection screen in which the selection cursor moves with the passage of time and causes one of the four effect modes to be selected. In the present embodiment, the moving speed of the selection cursor is high enough that the player can not select a target effect mode. Note that the effect selection screen XE1 may have another mode.

  Then, in either case where the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not pressed (S3502), one of the effect modes is selected from the plurality of effect modes, and the effect mode is selected. The effect mode XE2 is executed (S3503). Specifically, when there is depression of the rendering operation button 24 within a predetermined time (S 3502: YES), when there is depression of the rendering operation button 24 as a trigger, from among a plurality of effect modes It is assumed that one of the rendering modes is selected, and the selected rendering mode XE2 is executed (S3503). On the other hand, when there is no depression of the rendering operation button 24 within the predetermined time (S 3502: NO), a state in which one of the rendering modes is selected from the plurality of rendering modes triggered by the passage of the predetermined time And the selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3503). In the example shown in FIG. 58, the selected rendering mode XE2 is a cut-in notice rendering with the turtle character as the leading role. However, another effect mode may be selected as the effect mode, and each effect mode that may be selected may be another mode.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XE, the pachinko machine 10 displays the same effect selection screen XE1 as the effect selection screen XE1 displayed first (S3504). Then, in either case where the effect operation button 24 is pressed or not pressed (S3505), the same effect mode as the effect mode selected for the first time is selected, The selected presentation mode XE2 is executed (S3506). Specifically, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within the predetermined time (S3505: YES), the effect selected for the first time triggered by the effect operation button 24 being pressed. The same effect mode as the mode is selected, and the selected effect mode XE2 is executed. On the other hand, when the rendering operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3505: NO), the same rendering mode as the rendering mode selected at the first time is selected, triggered by the passage of the predetermined time. The selected effect mode XE2 is executed (S3506).

  When the second button effect XE ends, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XE of the same content has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3507). In the example shown in FIG. 58, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Hey, Dejab !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effect described above.

  When the button effect XE is performed three or more times, the same control as that when the second button effect XE is performed is repeatedly performed, and the suggested effect F is performed after the end of the last button effect XE. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24, timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.) May be The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment performs the button effect XE to be executed for the second time and thereafter regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player when the button effect XE is executed a plurality of times as the effect element for the feeling of visible notice. In the second embodiment, the same effect mode as the effect mode performed in the first button effect XE is selected and executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XE is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XE to be executed for the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. Then, similarly to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to give the player a feeling of debating (dejav) that the button effect XE of the same content is performed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to allow the player to recognize that the button effect XE of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the same. It is possible to convince the player that the button effect XE of the content has a special meaning in being executed a plurality of times. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment selects the button effect XE as an effect element for the notice of the visual acuity, and the button effect XE is performed a plurality of times when the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the depression of the rendering operation button 24 is accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is temporarily displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times, and the button effect is performed with the same content. Even if the button is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel a sense of sight for the button effect performed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is performed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual sense notice, and it is difficult for the player to feel the visual appearance. It is possible to suppress the However, in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the visual acuity notice and executes the button a plurality of times, the pachinko machine 10 is in a case where the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied. Parameters may be displayed.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the moving speed of the selection cursor is high enough that the player can not make a selection aiming at a specific effect mode. Therefore, the same effect mode as the first selected effect mode is forcedly selected even though the player aims to stop the selection cursor in the effect mode different from the effect mode selected for the first time. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of discomfort.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sighting is satisfied before the hold information becomes a target of the big hit lottery, and the occurrence of the feeling of prior notice When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XE that is an object to be executed multiple times before the hold information determined to satisfy the occurrence condition of the notice of a feeling of previous notice becomes a target of the big hit lottery Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a sense of visual appearance over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied when the on-hold information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the on-hold information. It may be configured to execute XE multiple times.

  In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XE is executed based on the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect operation button 24 Control of the effect mode to be executed in the button effect XE may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the time and the number of times pressed. .

  Further, in the above example, the presentation operation button 24 is described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or a lever operated by the player back and forth or right and left, a button detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor detecting a hand approaching a liquid crystal screen, etc. Can. Hereinafter, an example of the process of the button effect XE will be described.

  FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when a button effect XE is executed as an effect element (notice effect effect) for a feeling of prior notice. In step S3601, it is determined whether an initial execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 or not. If it is determined in step S3601 that the initial execution completion flag is not stored (S3601: NO), the process proceeds to step S3602 to display the roulette type effect selection screen XE1 described above on the symbol display device 41 and the speaker A sound and light pattern corresponding to the effect selection screen XE1 are executed on the various lamps 47 and the lamps 47. The effect selection screen XE1 includes content suggesting to the player that the effect operation button 24 is pressed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3603.

  In step S3603, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3603 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3603: YES), the process proceeds to step S3605, and the selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the effect operation button 24 is pressed. An image indicating that the mode is selected is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3606.

  If it is determined in step S3603 that the rendering operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3603: NO), the process proceeds to step S3604 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3604 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3604: NO), the process returns to step S3603, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of depression of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3604 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3604: YES), the process proceeds to step S3605, and the selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed, and an image indicating that one effect mode is selected Is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3606.

  In step S3606, the effect mode XE2 selected in step S3605 is executed by the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3607.

  In step S3607, the type of effect aspect XE2 executed in step S3606 is stored in the sound light side RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3608.

  In step S3608, the flag of the first execution is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94, and the first button effect XE is ended.

  If it is determined in step S3601 that the initial execution completion flag is stored (S3601: YES), that is, if the button effect XE has already been executed at least once after the visual appearance notice flag is stored. The process proceeds to step S3609, and causes the symbol display device 41 to display the same effect selection screen XE1 as the first time, and causes the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 to execute the sound and light patterns corresponding to the effect selection screen XE1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3610.

  In step S3610, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S3610 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S3610: YES), the process proceeds to step S3612, and it is the timing after the effect operation button 24 has been pressed and stored in step S3607. The selection cursor is stopped at the timing when the selected rendering mode XE2 is selected, and an image indicating that the stored rendering mode XE2 is selected is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3613.

  If it is determined in step S3610 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S3610: NO), the process proceeds to step S3611, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S3611 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S3611: NO), the process returns to step S3610, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of depression of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S3611 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S3611: YES), the process proceeds to step S3612, and it is the timing after the predetermined time has elapsed, and the effect aspect XE2 stored in step S3607 is selected At the timing, the selection cursor is stopped, and an image indicating that the stored effect mode XE2 has been selected is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3613.

  In step S3613, after effect mode XE2 selected in step S3612 is executed by symbol display device 41 as speaker effect means, speaker 46 and various lamps 47, button effect XE for the second and subsequent times is ended.

  According to the above process, the button effect XE can be executed multiple times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. The process described above is an example, and the process of the button effect XE may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 6 of notice of feeling of visual appearance using button effect>
FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XF as the effect element for the notice of the existing feeling notice and executes the button effect XF twice. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing the contents of effect modes XF1 and XF2 and a suggested effect F executed in the button effect XF.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the button effect XF for the first time, the content suggesting the player to continuously hit the effect operation button 24 and the predetermined parameter move in a fixed direction as time passes. The effect mode XF1 including the contents to be changed is executed (S3701). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the effect aspect XF 1 includes the content that the character on the player's side is attacked by ink from the character on the enemy's side and tries to endure the attack on the ink, and The parameter indicating the physical strength of the character of the character changes in the decreasing direction in response to the attack of the ink. Further, in the effect aspect XF1, as an example of a message suggesting a continuous hit of the effect operation button 24 to the player, characters such as “A continuous hit and endure!” Are displayed. However, the effect aspect XF1 may be another aspect.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the effect mode XF1 is executed, the parameters decrease with the passage of time (S3702). At this time, when the effect operation button 24 is continuously hit by the player, the pachinko machine 10 executes control to reduce the decrease rate of the parameter. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 performs control such that the decrease rate of the parameter decreases as the number of depressions of the rendering operation button 24 per unit time increases. In this way, the player continuously strikes the rendering operation button 24 so as to increase the number of depressions of the rendering operation button 24 per unit time in an attempt to reduce the decrease rate of the parameter. In the example shown in FIG. 61, the player tries to reduce the reduction rate of the parameter by continuously hitting the rendering operation button 24 so that the character of the wolf can endure the attack of the whale. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XF, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

  Then, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the effect aspect XF2 after the parameter satisfies the predetermined parameter condition (S3704). Specifically, after the parameter decreases to 0, the effect aspect XF2 is executed (S3704). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the effect aspect XF2 is an effect aspect including a content in which the character of the player on the side of the player can not survive the attack of the character on the side of the enemy and is defeated. However, the effect aspect XF2 may be another aspect.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XF, the pachinko machine 10 executes the same control as that of the first button effect XF. Specifically, the presentation mode XF1 is executed (S3705), the parameter is decreased with the passage of time (S3706), and after the parameter becomes 0 (S3707), the presentation mode XF2 is executed (S3708). That is, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the rendering operation button 24, the rendering mode XF1 and the rendering mode XF2 are executed.

  When the second button effect XF ends, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment suggests to the player that the button effect XF having the same content has been executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example). The effect F is executed (S3709). In the example shown in FIG. 61, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Hey, dejave !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effect described above.

  If the button effect XF is to be performed three or more times, the same control as when the second button effect XF is performed is repeatedly performed, and the suggestion effect F is performed after the end of the last button effect XF. Good.

  As described above, when the button effect is executed a plurality of times, it is executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player (for example, the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24, timing, the number of times of pressing, etc.) May be The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs the input operation by the player after executing the effect aspect XF1 similarly, when performing the button effect XF for the first time, and when performing the button effect XF for the second time or later. The parameter is reduced to 0 regardless of the operation mode of, and the presentation mode XF2 is executed. Therefore, even when the button effect XF is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the button effect XF to be executed for the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of appearance (dejav) that the button effect XF of the same content is executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the suggestion effect F is executed, it is possible to allow the player to recognize that the button effect XF of the same content has been executed a plurality of times and the same. The player can be convinced that the button effect XF of the content has a special meaning in being executed a plurality of times. In particular, when an effect mode (for example, an effect mode in which a character on the player side loses) which is disadvantageous to the player is executed as the effect mode XF2, the suggestion effect is executed from the depressed feeling, and the player The sense of expectation of can be raised at a stretch. However, it is not essential to execute the suggestion effect F, and the pachinko machine 10 may be configured not to execute the suggestion effect F.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sighting is satisfied before the hold information becomes a target of the big hit lottery, and the occurrence of the feeling of prior notice When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XF which is an object to be executed a plurality of times before the holding information determined to satisfy the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sighting is a target of the big hit lottery Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a sense of visual appearance over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied when the on-hold information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the on-hold information. The configuration may be such that XF is executed multiple times.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 executes the first button effect XF, it stores the process in which the parameter changes, and when the second and subsequent button effects XF are executed, the stored parameter changes. May be reproduced. In this way, in each of the button effects XF executed a plurality of times, the process of changing the parameter becomes the same, so it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of sight.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with changing means for changing the mode of the rendering operation button 24 to the mode (that is, the mode in which it is depressed by pressing) when the button is pressed. Then, when executing the first button effect XF, the pachinko machine 10 stores the process of change of the aspect of the effect operation button 24 when the effect operation button 24 is continuously hit by the player, and the second and subsequent times. When the button effect XF is executed, it is preferable that the changing means reproduce the process of the change of the aspect of the stored effect operation button 24. In this way, since the mode of the effect operation button 24 changes, it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game. Furthermore, in the second and subsequent button effects XF, the process of changing the aspect of the effect operation button 24 in the first button effect XF is reproduced, so that a stronger sense of visual appearance can be given to the player.

  In the above example, the parameter is changed in the decreasing direction with the passage of time. However, the parameter may be changed in the increasing direction with the passage of time. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 may execute control such that the increase rate of the parameter increases as the number of depressions of the rendering operation button 24 per unit time increases. Examples of the parameter to be increased with the passage of time can include an attack power parameter of the character on the player side, a power parameter, and the like. Then, after the parameter increases and reaches a predetermined value such as the maximum value, a positive effect mode such as a win effect may be executed. In this way, as in the above example, the parameter increases to a predetermined maximum value regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 by the player, so the pachinko machine 10 generates the button effect XF. It can be executed multiple times with the same content. Also, in order to increase the increase speed of the parameter, the player continuously strikes the rendering operation button 24 so that the number of depressions of the rendering operation button 24 per unit time increases. Therefore, as in the above example, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XF, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

  Further, in the above example, the parameter is the aspect shown in a rod shape, but is not limited to this, the aspect may be an aspect shown in another shape such as a circle, etc. It may be a modified aspect.

  Further, in the above example, the presentation operation button 24 is described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or a lever operated by the player back and forth or right and left, a button detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor detecting a hand approaching a liquid crystal screen, etc. Can. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XF will be described.

  FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when the button effect XF is executed as an effect element (notice effect effect) for a feeling of prior notice. In this button effect XF, the same processing is performed when it is executed for the first time and when it is executed for the second time or later.

  In step S3801, the above-described effect aspect XF1 is executed on the symbol display device 41 as the effect execution means, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47. The effect mode XF1 includes content that suggests the player to continuously hit the effect operation button 24, and content that changes in the direction in which the strength parameter decreases with the passage of time. After executing step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3802.

  In step S3802, it is determined whether the rendering operation button 24 is continuously hit. Specifically, for example, the number of depressions of the rendering operation button 24 within a predetermined time is counted, and when the number of depressions is equal to or more than the predetermined number, it is determined that the presentation operation button 24 is continuously hit. If it is determined in step S3802 that the rendering operation button 24 is continuously hit (S3802: YES), the process proceeds to step S3803, and the strength parameter is decreased at a predetermined speed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3805.

  If it is determined in step S3802 that the rendering operation button 24 is not continuously hit (S3802: NO), the process proceeds to step S3804 to decrease the strength parameter at a speed faster than the predetermined speed in step S3803. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3805.

  In step S3805, it is determined whether the strength parameter has become zero. If it is determined in step S3805 that the physical strength parameter has not become 0 (S3805: NO), the process returns to step S3802, and it is determined whether or not the rendering operation button 24 is continuously hit. That is, the presence or absence of continuous hitting of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until the physical strength parameter becomes 0, and the physical fitness parameter is decreased at a slow speed during the period in which the directing operating button 24 is continuously hit, and the directing operation button 24 is not continuously hit. The period decreases the strength parameter at a fast speed.

  If it is determined in step S3805 that the strength parameter has become 0 (S3805: YES), the process proceeds to step S3806, and the above-described effect XF2 is applied to the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47. Run it. After that, the first or second and subsequent notice effects for the prior notice of the feeling of a sense of sight are ended.

  In the above example, the speed at which the strength value is reduced is described as two steps depending on the presence or absence of continuous hitting, but may be three or more steps depending on the number of depressions of the rendering operation button 24 within a predetermined time Good.

  According to the above process, the button effect XF can be executed a plurality of times with the same content regardless of the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24. Note that the process described above is an example, and the process of the button effect XF may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 7 of notice of feeling of visual appearance using button effect>
FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XG as the effect element for the notice of the existing feeling notice and executes the button effect XA twice. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the contents of the effect modes XG1 and XG2 and the suggested effect F executed in the button effect XG.

  When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment starts executing the first button effect XG, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect mode XG1 including content that suggests pressing of the effect operation button 24 to the player (S3901). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the effect mode XG1 is an effect mode for displaying an image of a treasure box and displaying a character and an image prompting the user to depress the effect operation button 24. However, the effect aspect XA1 may be another aspect.

  After the effect mode XG1 is executed, if the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S3902: YES), the effect mode XG1 is triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24. Execute a different presentation mode XG2 (S3903). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the effect mode XG2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from the treasure box. However, the effect aspect XG2 may be another aspect. On the other hand, when the rendering operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3902: NO), the rendering mode XG2 is not executed while the rendering mode XG1 is being executed.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XG, it executes the effect aspect XG1 as in the case of the first button effect XG (S3904 or S3908). Then, after the effect mode XG1 is executed, when there is a depression of the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time (S3905: YES or S3909: YES), a trigger that the effect operation button 24 is depressed is triggered. Then, the effect aspect XG2 is executed (S3906 or S3910). On the other hand, when the rendering operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S3905: NO or S3909: NO), the rendering mode XG2 is not performed while the rendering mode XG1 is being performed.

  And, the pachinko machine 10, when the effect aspect XG2 is executed in all of the button effect XG executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example), or in all of the button effect XG executed a plurality of times If the XG 2 is not executed even once, the suggestion effect F is suggested to the player that the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content (S3907 or S3911). In the example shown in FIG. 64, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which a female character throws a message such as “Hey, dejave !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effect described above. On the other hand, when the same effect is not executed even once in the button effect XG executed a plurality of times, specifically, although the effect mode XG2 is executed in the first button effect XG, the second time When the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the button effect XG of, and the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the first button effect XG, the effect mode XG2 is executed in the second button effect XG In the case where it does, it does not execute suggestion production F, executes usual reach production and the like.

  In addition, when performing button production XG three or more times, while performing repeatedly the control similar to the time of performing button production XG of the 2nd time, and performing suggestion production F after the end of the last button production XG It may be determined whether or not.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times, the button effect XG will be performed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same The player can be provided with a sense of appearance (dejav) that the button effect XG of the content of has been executed a plurality of times. Furthermore, when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the suggestion effect F is executed, so that the player is made to recognize that the button effect XG with the same content is executed a plurality of times. As a result, the player can be convinced that the button rendering XG of the same content has a special meaning in that it is executed a plurality of times.

  Furthermore, when the player experiences the suggested effect F after the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content, every time the button effect XG is executed, in anticipation of the suggested effect F being executed, The rendering operation button 24 is operated such that the button rendering XG is performed with the same content by performing the same input operation, and generation of the suggested rendering F is expected. Therefore, the player's attention to the button effect XG to be sequentially executed can be suitably enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XG 2 is triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24. Since the execution is performed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XG, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XG2 at a predetermined timing without being triggered by the depression of the effect operation button 24.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment selects the button effect XG as the presentation element for the notice of the visual acuity, and the button graphic XG is performed a plurality of times when the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the depression of the rendering operation button 24 is accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is temporarily displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times, and the button effect is performed with the same content. Even if the button is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel a sense of sight for the button effect performed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is performed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual sense notice, and it is difficult for the player to feel the visual appearance. It is possible to suppress the However, in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the visual acuity notice and executes the button a plurality of times, the pachinko machine 10 is in a case where the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied. Parameters may be displayed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sighting is satisfied before the hold information becomes a target of the big hit lottery, and the occurrence of the feeling of prior notice When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XG which is an object to be executed a plurality of times before the holding information determined to satisfy the occurrence condition of the feeling of prior notice of the feeling of appearance is a target of the big hit lottery Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a sense of visual appearance over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied when the on-hold information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the on-hold information. The configuration may be such that XG is executed multiple times.

  In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XG is executed based on the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect operation button 24 Control of the effect mode to be executed in the button effect XG may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the time and the number of times pressed. .

  Further, in the above example, the presentation operation button 24 is described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or a lever operated by the player back and forth or right and left, a button detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor detecting a hand approaching a liquid crystal screen, etc. Can. Hereinafter, an example of the process of the button effect XG will be described.

  FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when the button effect XG is executed as an effect element (notice effect effect) for a feeling of prior notice. In step S4001, it is determined whether an initial execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 or not.

  If it is determined in step S4001 that the initial execution completed flag is not stored (S4001: NO), that is, if the button effect XG has not been executed even once after the visual appearance notice flag is stored. In step S4002, the above-described effect aspect XG1 is executed by the symbol display device 41 as the effect execution means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47. The effect mode XG1 includes content that suggests the player to press the effect operation button 24. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4003.

  In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4003 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4003: YES), the process proceeds to step S4004, and the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are described above. The presentation mode XG2 is executed. After executing step S4004, the process proceeds to step S4005, and the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. The button pressing flag is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that pressing of the effect operation button 24 has been performed when the first button effect XG is executed. After executing step S4005, the process proceeds to step S4007.

  If it is determined in step S4003 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4003: NO), the process proceeds to step S4006, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4006 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4006: NO), the process returns to step S4003 to determine whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of depression of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4006 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4006: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, step S4004 and step S4005 are not executed. It progresses to S4007.

  In step S4007, the initial execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4008, the suggestion effect execution flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94, and the first button effect XG is ended.

  The suggested effect execution flag is that, when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times after the visual sensation notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XG2 is executed in all the plurality of button effects XG. Alternatively, it is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect mode XG2 has never been executed in all of the plurality of button effects XG.

  As described in the processing of each of the following steps, after the visual effect notice flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is the second or subsequent one when the effect mode XG2 is executed in the first button effect XG. If the effect mode XG2 is not executed even once in the button effect XG, it is deleted. In addition, the suggestion effect execution flag, even if the effect mode XG2 is not executed in the first button effect XG after the appearance feeling notice flag is stored, the effect mode even in the second or subsequent button effect XG It is erased when XG2 is executed. That is, when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times after the visual appearance notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XG2 is executed in all of the plurality of button effects XG, or the plurality When the effect mode XG2 is not executed even once in all of the button effects XG of the times, the suggestion effect execution flag remains stored without being erased. In the present embodiment, when setting the content of the notice effect of the game round related to the hold information determined to satisfy the occurrence condition of the notice of the feeling of visible feeling, it is determined whether or not this suggestion effect execution flag is stored. If it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect F described above is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the normal reach effect or the like is executed without executing the suggestion effect F. Hereinafter, the description returns to the process of each step in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S4001 that the initial execution completion flag is stored (S4001: YES), that is, if the button effect XG has already been executed at least once after the visual appearance notice flag is stored. The process proceeds to step S4009, and causes the symbol display device 41 as the effect execution means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to execute the effect aspect XG1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4010.

  In step S4010, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. In step S4010, when it is determined that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4010: YES), the process proceeds to step S4011, and the symbol display device 41 as the effect execution means, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47 effect aspect XG2 Run Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4012, in which it is determined whether the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94.

  If it is determined in step S4012 that the button pressing flag is stored (S4012: YES), the second and subsequent button effects XG are ended without deleting the suggestion effect execution flag. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4012 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S4012: NO), the process proceeds to step S4015.

  In step S4015, when the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is deleted, and the button effect XG for the second and subsequent times is ended. If the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the second or subsequent button effect XG is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S4010 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4010: NO), the process proceeds to step S4013, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4013 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4013: NO), the process returns to step S4010, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of depression of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4013 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4013: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4014.

  In step S 4014, it is determined whether the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94 a of the sound light side RAM 94. If it is determined in step S4014 that the button pressing flag is stored (S4014: YES), the process proceeds to step S4015 described above, and if the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is erased . On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4014 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S4014: NO), the second and subsequent button effects XG are ended without deleting the suggestion effect execution flag.

  According to the above-described process, it is possible to execute the suggested effect F only when the button effect XG is executed a plurality of times with the same content. The process described above is an example, and the process of the button effect XG may be realized by another algorithm.

<Example 8 of notice of feeling of visual appearance using button effect>
FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing a flow in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect XH as an effect element for anticipation of an existing feeling notice and executes the button effect XH twice. FIG. 67 is an explanatory view showing the contents of the effect modes XH1, XH2, XH3 and the suggested effect F executed in the button effect XH.

  When the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment starts executing the first button effect XH, the pachinko machine 10 executes an effect mode XH1 including content that suggests pressing of the effect operation button 24 to the player (S4101). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect mode XH1 is an effect mode for displaying an image of a treasure box and displaying a character and an image prompting pressing of the effect operation button 24. However, the effect aspect XH1 may be another aspect.

  After the effect mode XH1 is executed, when the effect operation button 24 is pressed within a predetermined time (S4102: YES), the effect mode XH1 is triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24. Execute a different presentation mode XH2 (S4103). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect mode XH2 is an effect mode in which a female character appears from the treasure box. However, the effect aspect XH2 may be another aspect. On the other hand, when there is no depression of the rendering operation button 24 within the predetermined time (S4102: NO), the rendering mode XH3 different from the rendering mode XH1 and the rendering mode XH2 is executed with the elapse of the predetermined time (S4109) . In the example shown in FIG. 67, the effect aspect XH3 is an effect aspect in which the fish character carries away the treasure box. However, the effect aspect XH3 may be another aspect.

  When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment starts executing the second button effect XH, it executes the effect aspect XH1 as in the case of the first button effect XH (S4104 or S4110). Then, after the effect mode XH1 is executed, when there is a depression of the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time (S4105: YES or S4111: YES), a trigger that the effect operation button 24 is depressed is triggered. Then, the presentation aspect XH2 is executed (S4106 or S4112). On the other hand, when the rendering operation button 24 is not pressed within the predetermined time (S4105: NO or S4111: NO), the rendering mode XH3 is executed triggered by the passage of the predetermined time (S4107).

  And, the pachinko machine 10, when the effect aspect XH2 is executed in all of the button effect XH executed a plurality of times (two times in the above example), or in all of the button effect XH executed a plurality of times If XH3 is executed, the suggestion effect F is suggested to the player that the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content (S4108 or S4114). In the example shown in FIG. 67, the suggestive effect F is an effect in which the female character throws a message such as “Mee, dejabu !?” to the player. However, the suggestion effect F may be another aspect. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 executes other effects such as the battle effect described above. On the other hand, if the same content is not executed even once in the button effect XH executed a plurality of times, specifically, although the effect mode XH2 is executed in the first button effect XH, the second time When the effect mode XH3 is executed in the button effect XH, and even when the effect mode XH3 is executed in the first button effect XH, the effect mode XH2 is executed in the second button effect XH In order to perform the regular reach production etc. without executing the suggested production F.

  In addition, when performing button production XH three or more times, while performing repeatedly the control similar to the time of performing button production XH of the 2nd time, and performing suggestion production F after the end of the last button production XH It may be determined whether or not.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times, the button effect XH is performed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same It is possible to give the player a sense of devil (dejab) that the button effect XH of the content of has been executed a plurality of times. Furthermore, when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the suggestion effect F is executed, so that the player is made to recognize that the button effect XH with the same content is executed a plurality of times. As a result, the player can be convinced that the button effect XH of the same contents is executed a plurality of times and has a special meaning.

  Furthermore, when the player experiences the suggested effect F after the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content, every time the button effect XH is executed, in anticipation of the suggested effect F being executed, The rendering operation button 24 is operated such that the button rendering XH is executed with the same content by performing the same input operation, and generation of the suggested rendering F is expected. Therefore, the player's attention to the button effect XH to be sequentially executed can be suitably enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the effect operation button 24 within a predetermined time, the effect mode XH2 is triggered by the pressing of the effect operation button 24. Since the execution is performed, the player can be actively involved in the button effect XH, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. However, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute the effect mode XH2 at a predetermined timing without being triggered by the depression of the effect operation button 24.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment selects the button effect XH as an effect element for the notice of the visual acuity, and the button effect XH is performed a plurality of times in the case where the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied. In the case of execution, the time parameter indicating whether or not the depression of the rendering operation button 24 is accepted is not displayed. The reason will be described. The player may press the effect operation button 24 at different timings in each of the button effects executed a plurality of times. Here, if the time parameter is temporarily displayed, the player recognizes that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed at different timings in each of the button effects performed a plurality of times, and the button effect is performed with the same content. Even if the button is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that the player may not feel a sense of sight for the button effect performed a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the time parameter is not displayed when the button effect is performed a plurality of times as the effect element for the visual sense notice, and it is difficult for the player to feel the visual appearance. It is possible to suppress the However, in the case where the pachinko machine 10 selects the button effect as the effect element for the visual acuity notice and executes the button a plurality of times, the pachinko machine 10 is in a case where the generation condition of the visual acuity notice is satisfied. Parameters may be displayed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines whether or not the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sighting is satisfied before the hold information becomes a target of the big hit lottery, and the occurrence of the feeling of prior notice When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the button effect XH that is an object to be executed a plurality of times before the hold information determined to satisfy the occurrence condition of the prior notice of the feeling of sighting detection becomes a target of the big hit lottery Start running. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for a sense of visual appearance over a plurality of game times. However, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the condition of occurrence of the feeling of prior notice is satisfied when the on-hold information becomes the target of the big hit lottery, and the button effect is produced in one game round related to the on-hold information. It may be configured to execute XH multiple times.

  In the present embodiment, control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XH is executed based on the presence or absence of depression of the effect operation button 24. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect operation button 24 The control of the effect mode executed in the button effect XH may be executed based on whether or not the operation mode of the input operation of the effect operation button 24 satisfies a predetermined operation condition, such as the time and the number of times pressed. .

  Further, in the above example, the presentation operation button 24 is described as an example of the operation receiving means for receiving the input operation by the player, but the operation receiving means is not limited to this. For example, as the operation receiving means, a stick or a lever operated by the player back and forth or right and left, a button detecting a hand held by the player, a touch sensor detecting a hand approaching a liquid crystal screen, etc. Can. Hereinafter, an example of the processing of the button effect XH will be described.

  FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when the button effect XH is executed as an effect element (notice effect effect) for a feeling of prior notice. In step S4201, it is determined whether an initial execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 or not.

  If it is determined in step S4201 that the initial execution completion flag is not stored (S4201: NO), that is, if the button effect XH has not been executed even once after the visual appearance notice flag is stored. The process proceeds to step S4202, and the above-described effect aspect XH1 is executed by the symbol display device 41 as the effect execution means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47. The effect mode XH1 includes content that suggests the player to press the effect operation button 24. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4203.

  In step S4203, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4203 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4203: YES), the process proceeds to step S4204, and the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are described above. The presentation mode XH2 is executed. After step S4204 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4205, and the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94. The button pressing flag is a flag for the sound-light MPU 92 to specify that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed when the first button effect XH is executed. After executing step S4205, the process proceeds to step S4207.

  If it is determined in step S4203 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4203: NO), the process proceeds to step S4206, and it is determined whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4206 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4206: NO), the process returns to step S4203, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of depression of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4206 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4206: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4207, and symbol display as effect executing means The apparatus 41, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47 execute the above-described effect aspect XH3. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4208.

  In step S4208, the initial execution completion flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4209, the suggestion effect execution flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the RAM 94, and the first button effect XH is ended.

  The suggestion effect execution flag is that, when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times after the visual sensation notice flag is stored, the same effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the plurality of button effects XH. Alternatively, it is a flag for specifying in the sound light side MPU 92 that the effect mode XH2 has never been executed in all of the plurality of button effects XH.

  As described in the processing of each of the following steps, after the visual sensation advance flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is executed for the second and subsequent times when the effect mode XH2 is executed in the first button effect XH. When the effect mode XH3 is executed even once in the button effect XH, it is deleted. In addition, when the effect mode XH3 is executed in the first button effect XH after the visual effect notice flag is stored in the suggestion effect execution flag, the effect mode XH2 is performed even once in the second or subsequent button effect XH. Is erased if is executed. That is, when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times after the visible feeling advance flag is stored, the same effect mode XH2 is executed in all of the plurality of button effects XH, or the plurality When the same effect mode XH3 is executed in all of the button effects XH of the times, the suggestion effect execution flag remains stored without being deleted. In the present embodiment, when setting the content of the notice effect of the game round related to the hold information determined to satisfy the occurrence condition of the notice of the feeling of visible feeling, it is determined whether or not this suggestion effect execution flag is stored. If it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect F described above is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the normal reach effect or the like is executed without executing the suggestion effect F. Hereinafter, the description returns to the process of each step in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S4201 that the initial execution completion flag is stored (S4201: YES), that is, if the button effect XH has already been executed at least once after the visual appearance notice flag is stored. The process proceeds to step S4210, and causes the symbol display device 41 as the effect execution means, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 to execute the effect aspect XH1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4211.

  In step S4211, it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. If it is determined in step S4211 that the effect operation button 24 has been pressed (S4211: YES), the process proceeds to step S4212, and the symbol display device 41 as the effect executing means, the speaker 46 and the various lamps 47 effect aspect XH2 Run Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4213, and it is determined whether the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 or not.

  If it is determined in step S4213 that the button pressing flag is stored (S4213: YES), the second and subsequent button effects XH are ended without deleting the suggestion effect execution flag. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4213 that the button pressing flag is not stored (S4213: NO), the process proceeds to step S4217.

  In step S4217, when the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is deleted, and the button effect XH for the second and subsequent times is ended. When the suggestion effect execution flag is not stored, the second and subsequent button effects XH are ended.

  If it is determined in step S4211 that the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed (S4211: NO), the process proceeds to step S4214 to determine whether a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4214 that the predetermined time has not elapsed (S4214: NO), the process returns to step S4211, and it is determined whether or not the effect operation button 24 has been pressed. That is, the presence or absence of depression of the rendering operation button 24 is monitored until a predetermined time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S4214 that the predetermined time has elapsed (S4214: YES), that is, if the effect operation button 24 has not been pressed within the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S4215, and symbol display as effect execution means The apparatus 41, the speaker 46, and the various lamps 47 execute the effect mode XH3. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4216.

  In step S4216, it is determined whether the button pressing flag is stored in the various flag storage area 94a of the sound light side RAM 94 or not. If it is determined in step S4216 that the button pressing flag is stored (S4216: YES), the process proceeds to step S4217 described above, and if the suggestion effect execution flag is stored, the suggestion effect execution flag is erased . On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4216 that the button depression flag is not stored (S4216: NO), the second and subsequent button effects XH are ended without deleting the suggestion effect execution flag.

  According to the above-described process, it is possible to execute the suggested effect F only when the button effect XH is executed a plurality of times with the same content. The process described above is an example, and the process of the button effect XH may be realized by another algorithm.

  According to the embodiment described above, it is possible to give the player various expectations. In particular, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that at least two or more of the button effects XA, XB, XC, XG, and XH can be selected as effect elements for notice of a feeling of visible, the player is a button While paying attention to the rendering mode executed in the rendering, various predictions are made as to what kind of button rendering is being performed, and generation of a suggested rendering is expected. Therefore, the interest of the game can be further improved.

H. Eighth embodiment:
An eighth embodiment will now be described. The main difference between this embodiment and the first to seventh embodiments is that a second starting opening unit 200 including a second starting opening is provided in the right area of the game area GA, 2 It is a point that a kind of high frequency support mode is set. In the following description, the configuration of the second starting opening unit 200 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the control regarding the second starting opening unit 200 will be mainly described. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure and process the same as the said 1st-7th embodiment.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory view showing the game board 30 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the second starting opening unit 200 including the second starting opening is provided in the right side area of the game area GA. In the present embodiment, all game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a predetermined firing intensity or more are configured to enter the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory view showing the configuration of the second starting opening unit 200. As shown in FIG. The second starting opening unit 200 has an opening 202 through which game balls can enter, a route R1 provided on the left side downstream of the opening 202, and a route R2 provided on the right side downstream of the opening 202; An alternate distribution mechanism 204 is provided to alternately distribute the game ball having entered the opening 202 into the left route R1 and the right route R2. A through gate 206 through which gaming balls can pass is provided downstream of the route R1, and an open / close ball entering device 208 is provided downstream of the through gate 206 and the route R2.

  The alternate distribution mechanism 204 is configured to distribute the gaming balls having entered the opening 202 to the route R1 and to distribute the gaming balls reached later than the gaming balls distributed to the route R1 to the route R2. Specifically, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 has a central piece 204a formed at the center, a left piece 204b formed on the left of the central piece 204a, and a right formed on the right of the central piece 204a. It has a piece 204c and a rotation shaft 204d provided between the left piece 204b and the right piece 204c. An area sandwiched by the center piece 204a and the left piece 204b functions as a left holding portion 204e for temporarily holding the game ball. In addition, the region sandwiched by the center piece 204a and the right piece 204c functions as a right holding unit 204f that temporarily holds the gaming ball. The behavior of the alternate distribution mechanism 204 when the gaming balls reach the alternate distribution mechanism 204 will be described later.

  The open / close ball entering device 208 has an open / close door 208b as an electrically operated product that opens and closes back and forth with the lower rotation shaft as a base point, and a second start opening 208a into which the game ball can enter is placed inside the open / close door 208b Have. In addition, inside the opening and closing door 208b, a guiding path 208c inclined toward the second starting opening 208a is provided, and the gaming ball entered into the inside of the opening and closing door 208b is second along the guiding path 208c. It is guided to the starting opening 208a. The second start port 208a has the same role as the second start port 34 in the above embodiment. When the open / close door 208b is in the closed state, the game ball can not enter the second starting opening 208a. On the other hand, when the open / close door 208b is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second start opening 208a. That is, the open / close door 208b has a function of causing the state of the second starting opening 208a to transition between the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry possible state. In the normal state, the open / close door 208b is in the closed state, and the second start port 208a is in the ball entry impossible state.

  The through gate 206 is provided with a through hole extending in the longitudinal direction. When the game ball passes through gate 206, the main control device 60 performs internal lottery whether or not the above-mentioned open / close door 208b is changed to the open state when the game ball passes through gate 206 as a trigger Perform an item opening lottery). As a result of the electric combination opening lottery, when winning the transition of the open / close door 208b to the open state, the main control device 60 causes the spread unit 38 to display the result of the electric combination open lottery, and closes the opening / closing door 208b. Transition from the state to the open state.

  The route R1 is configured such that the distributed gaming ball can pass through the through gate 206, and the distributed gaming ball is in the open state of the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball entry device 208 In such a case, it is configured to be capable of entering the second starting opening 208a. In the present embodiment, a route R1x branched from the route R1 is provided, but the game balls distributed to the route R1 are configured to always pass through the through gate 206. However, as another embodiment, the game ball distributed to the route R1 may not pass through the through gate 206, and may pass the route R1x.

  The route R2 is configured such that the distributed gaming ball can not pass through the through gate 206, and the distributed gaming ball is in the open state of the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball entering device 208 In some cases, it is configured to be able to enter the second starting opening 208a.

  In the present embodiment, after the game ball passes through gate 206, the result of the motorized jackpot release lottery executed upon the passage of the game ball passing through gate 206 is displayed by the drawing unit 38. The time until the game ball is through (gate time until the stop display corresponding to the result of the motorized character opening lottery is performed after the light emission display unit of the drawing unit 38 starts the variable display) It is set to a time shorter than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the open / close ball entry device 208 after passing 206. Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the time it takes for the game ball to reach the opening / closing device 208 after the game ball passes through gate 206 is about 0.2 seconds, The fluctuation time of is set to 0.05 seconds.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is the time from the display of the result of the electric combination opening lottery by the drawing unit 38 to the start of the transition from the closed state to the open state of the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball entering device 208 Some open standby time is not provided. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when winning in the electric combination opening lottery, the open / close door 208b is closed immediately after the fluctuation of the common movement unit 38 is finished and the result of the electric combination opening lottery is displayed by the common arrangement unit 38. The transition from the state to the open state will be initiated.

  However, strictly speaking, there is a time required for control until the open / close door 208b starts transitioning from the closed state to the open state after the result of the motorized product open lottery is displayed by the drawing unit 38 . In this embodiment, the time required for the control from when the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball unit 208 starts transitioning from the closed state to the open state after the result of the electrically operated combination open lottery is displayed by the drawing unit 38 Is about 0.004 seconds. As for the reason why the time is about 0.004 seconds, main controller 60, as described above, takes 0.004 seconds for the electric-wave board support process (FIG. 12: S407, FIG. 76 described later) in the normal process (FIG. 12). In the case where it is repeatedly executed in a cycle and a winning combination is won in the electric combination opening lottery and the winning result is displayed on the spread unit 38 (FIG. 76: S4520), in the next patrol executed in a cycle of 0.004 seconds. This is because the open processing (FIG. 77: S4698) of the open / close door 208b is executed in the electronic combination open / close processing (FIG. 76: S4522, FIG. 77 described later) of the electronic support processing (FIG. 76). That is, in this embodiment, in addition to the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 and the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b, even after the time taken for control is taken into consideration, the game ball passes through the through gate 206, In a time until the open / close door 208b of the ball device 208 starts the transition from the closed state to the open state, the game ball passes through the through gate 206 and then the game ball reaches the open / close ball entering device 208 It will be shorter than time.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball passes through gate 206 and is elected in the electric combination opening lottery, main control device 60 opens / closes the gaming ball which triggered execution of the electric combination opening lottery. Before the timing to reach the ball device 208, the open / close door 208b is transitioned from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the game ball, which has triggered the execution of the electric combination opening lottery, enters the second starting opening 208a provided inside the open / close door 208b when the electric combination opening lottery is won. It will be done.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a first high frequency support mode and a second high frequency support mode as types of the high frequency support mode for controlling the open / close door 208b. In the first high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric combination opening lottery is set to 100%, and the opening frequency of the open / close door 208b is 1 when the electric combination opening lottery is elected, and the opening time is 0 It is set to .5 seconds. In the second high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric combination opening lottery is set to 100%, and the opening frequency of the open / close door 208b is one and the opening time is 1 when winning in the electric combination opening lottery It is set to 1 second. That is, the difference between the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode is the length of time in which the open state is maintained after the open / close door 208b transitions from the closed state to the open state. The number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a is different in a situation where the game balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds by 81.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory drawing showing the behavior of the second starting opening unit 200 when the first high frequency support mode is being executed. In the example shown in FIG. 71, the gaming ball is able to reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the gaming board 30 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at a constant firing intensity of 0.6. It is fired continuously at an interval of seconds. Therefore, the gaming balls enter the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  As shown in the state A1, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting opening unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting opening unit 200 from the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is reached. In the example shown in the state A1, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the right, so the gaming balls that have reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 are temporarily held by the left holding portion 204e. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left side holding unit 204e, and becomes state A2 .

  As shown in the state A2, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the left, the gaming ball GB1 held by the left holding unit 204e is dropped from the left holding unit 204e and distributed to the left route R1. . Thereafter, the gaming ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 passes through the through gate 206. When the gaming ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes an electric combination opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric combination opening lottery in the first high frequency support mode is set to 100%, and when the electric combination opening lottery is elected, the open / close ball entering device 208 The open / close door 208b is opened once, and the open time is set to 0.5 seconds. In addition, the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 for displaying the lottery result of the electric combination opening lottery is set to 0.05 seconds. And, as described above, in the present embodiment, the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b is not provided, and the winning result of the electric combination opening lottery is displayed on the spread unit 38 before the opening / closing ball entering device 208 is selected. The time required for control until the open / close door 208b starts transitioning to the open state is about 0.004 seconds. Therefore, the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball entering device 208 transitions to the open state about 0.06 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.5 seconds. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the opening / closing device 208 after the game ball passes through gate 206 is about 0.2 seconds, At the timing when the passing game ball GB1 reaches the open / close ball entry device 208, the open / close door 208b is in the open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting opening 208a. After that, the next game ball GB2 of the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202 and becomes the state A3.

  As shown in the state A3, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the left, and thus alternates The game ball GB2 that has reached the distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right holding unit 204f. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) around the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f, and becomes the state A4.

  As shown in the state A4, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the right, the gaming ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f is dropped from the right holding portion 204f and distributed to the right path R2. . Thereafter, the game balls GB2 distributed to the route R2 reach the opening and closing ball entering device 208. Here, in the present embodiment, since the interval of the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, after the game balls GB1 reach the opening and closing ball entering device 208, the game balls GB2 open and close. The interval for reaching the ball entry device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the first high frequency support mode of the present embodiment, since the open / close door 208b has already shifted to the closed state at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the open / close device 208, the game ball GB2 is It is not possible to enter the second starting port 208a provided inside the device 208. Thereafter, the state A1 is entered again, and the states A1 to A4 are repeated.

  That is, in the first high-frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the gaming balls continue at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200 by the gaming ball firing mechanism 81. In the situation where the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 and passed through the through gate 206 reaches the open / close device 208, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state and distributes to the route R2 At the timing when the played game ball GB2 reaches the open / close ball entry device 208, the open / close door 208b transitions to the closed state.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory drawing showing the behavior of the second starting opening unit 200 when the second high frequency support mode is being executed. The states A1 to A3 in FIG. 72 are the same as the states A1 to A3 in FIG. 71 described above. However, in the second high frequency support mode, since the opening time of the open / close door 208b is set to 1.1 seconds, as shown in the state A4 of FIG. 72, the next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 At the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the open / close ball entry device 208, the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball entry device 208 maintains the open state, and the game ball GB2 is a second starting opening provided inside the open / close door 208b. It will enter 208a.

  That is, in the second high frequency support mode of the present embodiment, the gaming balls continue at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81. And the open / close door 208b is shifted to the open state at the timing when the game ball GB1 distributed to the first path and passed through the through gate 206 reaches the open / close ball entry device 208, and The open / close door 208b maintains the open state also at the timing when the game ball GB2 distributed to the route of the game ball GB2 reaches the open / close ball entering device 208.

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory view showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. In FIG. 73, for reference, the types of high-frequency support modes to be executed after the end of the open / close execution mode and the contents thereof are also described. As described above, in this embodiment, the first high frequency support mode and the second high frequency support mode are set as the types of the high frequency support mode to be executed after the end of the open / close execution mode. In the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls to be paid out as a winning ball is set to one when the gaming ball enters the second starting opening 208a.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (a), in the case of winning a big hit lottery based on the entry of gaming balls into the first starting opening 33 and the value of the obtained big hit type counter C2 being 0 to 9, 8R. In addition to transitioning to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and transition to the first high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 10 to 19, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 24, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and is shifted to the second high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode is ended. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 25-29, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the mode is shifted to the second high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (b), if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 208a is won and the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 0-5, 8R. In addition to transitioning to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and transition to the first high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. When the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, the mode is switched to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and the mode is shifted to the first high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. When the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the mode is shifted to the second high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the mode is switched to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the mode is shifted to the second high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Here, the gaming ball is fired in a situation where it is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity which can reach the second starting opening unit 200 by the gaming ball firing mechanism 81. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls is defined as the ball game rate, and the ball game rate in the case where the i-th (i is an integer of 1 or more) high frequency support mode is being executed It defines as ball rate Mi. Below, the ball exit rate M1 in the case where the first high frequency support mode is executed and the ball exit rate M2 in the case where the second high frequency support mode is executed will be described.

In the first high frequency support mode, the gaming balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81. Then, as described above, one gaming ball out of the two launched gaming balls enters the second starting opening 208a of the open / close ball entry device 208, and one gaming ball is paid out as a winning ball It will be. Therefore, when the first high frequency support mode is being executed, the bowling rate M1 is as follows.
M1 = 1/2 = 0.50

  Here, that the ball out ratio is less than 1 means that the gaming balls can be continuously reached at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity which can reach the second starting opening unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It means that the game ball of the player's hand decreases in the situation where it is fired. Therefore, in the first high frequency support mode, it means that the game balls held by the player are reduced. Specifically, in the first high frequency support mode, two game balls are fired in 1.2 seconds and one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, so the game ball of the player's hand is , Will decrease by 1 in 1.2 seconds.

In the second high frequency support mode, the gaming ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 200 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81. Then, as described above, two gaming balls out of the two launched gaming balls enter the second starting opening 208a of the open / close ball entry device 208, and two gaming balls are paid out as prize balls It will be. Therefore, when the second high frequency support mode is being executed, the ball population rate M2 is as follows.
M2 = 2/2 = 1.00

  Here, that the ball out ratio is 1 means that the gaming balls can reach the second starting opening unit 200 by the gaming ball firing mechanism 81 continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity. In the situation of being fired, it means that the game ball of the player's hand does not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the second high frequency support mode, it means that the player's game ball does not increase or decrease. Specifically, in the second high-frequency support mode, two game balls are fired during 1.2 seconds and two game balls are paid out as prize balls, so the game balls held by the player are It will not increase or decrease.

  In addition, the ratio at which the i-th high-frequency support mode is executed is defined as PAi when the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 33. Then, a ratio PA1 for executing the first high frequency support mode and a ratio PA2 for executing the second high frequency support mode are as follows.

PA1 = number of jackpot type counter C2 values (0 to 19) that will be switched to the first high frequency support mode by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 33 / jackpot Total value of type counter C2 = 20/30
PA2 = number of jackpot type counter C2 values (20-29) that will be switched to the second high frequency support mode by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the first start hole 33 / jackpot Total number of values of type counter C2 = 10/30

  In addition, if the winning rate in a big hit lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 is won and the high frequency support is being executed, then the total bowling rate is defined as the first overall bowling rate T1. , And the first overall ball extraction rate T1 can be defined by the following equation (1).

  In the above equation (1), n is the number of types of the high frequency support mode, and in the present embodiment, n = 2. Therefore, the first comprehensive ball throwing rate T1 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T1 = M1 × PA1 + M2 × PA2
= 0.50 x (20/30) + 1.00 x (10/30) = 0.67

  That is, the first comprehensive ball ratio T1 is the sum of the ball ratio of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the ball entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 multiplied by the execution ratio, It means the expected value of the ball rate.

In addition, the ratio at which the i-th high-frequency support mode is executed is defined as PBi when the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 208a. Do. Then, a ratio PB1 in which the first high frequency support mode is executed and a ratio PB2 in which the second high frequency support mode is performed are as follows.
PB1 = Number of jackpot type counter C2 value (0 to 11) / jackpot that will win the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 208a and shift to the first high frequency support mode Total value of type counter C2 = 12/30
PB2 = Number of jackpot type counter C2 value (12-29) / jackpot that will win the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 208a and shift to the second high frequency support mode Total value of type counter C2 = 18/30

  In addition, if winning a big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 208a and winning the high frequency support is defined, the total ball-out rate in the case of defining the second integrated ball-out rate T2 , And the second overall ball exit rate T2 can be defined by the following equation (2).

  In the above equation (2), n is the number of types of high frequency support modes, and n = 2 in this embodiment. Therefore, the second integrated ball throwing rate T2 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T2 = M1 × PB1 + M2 × PB2
= 0.50 x (12/30) + 1.00 x (18/30) = 0.80

  That is, the second overall ball exit rate T2 is the sum of the ball exit rates of the respective high frequency support modes executed based on the ball entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 208a multiplied by the execution rate, It means the expected value of the ball rate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total ball exit ratio T1 and the value of the second total ball exit ratio T2 are less than one. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the game balls held by the player in total do not increase but decrease.

  Next, an example of a process performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processing different from the first embodiment will be described, and the description of the same processing will be omitted.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a winning opening process for the starting opening performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the process (FIG. 10) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described.

  In step S4306, main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets a winning ball command for causing payout controller 70 to pay out one game ball. The processes in the other steps are the same as the processes (FIG. 10) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. Below, the difference with the process (FIG. 19) which the main control apparatus 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the said 1st Embodiment performs is demonstrated.

  In step S4404, main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the second high frequency support flag. As a result, after the open / close execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is ended, the game mode shifts to the gaming state in which the support mode is the second high frequency support mode. The second high frequency support flag is used to determine whether the second high frequency support mode is being executed.

  Further, in step S4407, main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the first high-frequency support flag. As a result, after the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is ended, the game mode shifts to the gaming state in which the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. The processes in the other steps are the same as the processes (FIG. 19) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted. The first high frequency support flag is used to determine whether the first high frequency support mode is being executed.

  FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing a process for electronic structure support performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. Below, the difference with the process (FIG. 20) which the main control apparatus 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the said 1st Embodiment performs is demonstrated.

  In step S4509, main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment performs a motorized combination open lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the motorized winning combination opening lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 100%. Specifically, since the possible value of the motorized product release counter C4 is 0 to 249, when the value of the motorized product release counter C4 is 0 to 249, the winning of the motorized product open lottery is won. . Further, at the same time as the motor-operated combination release lottery, "25" (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2.

  Further, main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the support winning flag in step S 4511 and sets “1” in second round counter area RC 2 provided in various counter areas 64 d of RAM 64. Do. This means that the number of times of opening and closing the door 208b is one in the case of winning the motorized product open lottery in the high frequency support mode of the present embodiment. The processes in the other steps are the same as the processes (FIG. 20) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the electric wave opening and closing process performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 21) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that different opening times are set for each of the two types of high frequency support modes. The details will be described below.

  In step S4601, it is determined whether the open / close door 208b as a motorized prize is open. Whether or not the open / close door 208b is open is determined based on whether or not the motorized accessory drive unit 34b is in a driven state. If it is determined that the open / close door 208b is open (S4601: YES), the process proceeds to step S4602.

  In step S4602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open continuation time of the open / close door 208b. If it is determined in step S4602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4602: NO), the present electronic combination processing is ended. That is, when the open continuation time of the open / close door 208b has not ended, the present opening / closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S4602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4602: YES), the process proceeds to step S4603 to perform closing processing for controlling the open / close door 208b in a closed state. [2] Set "25" (ie, 0.05 sec) in the timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the measuring means of the opening continuation time of the open / close door 208b is "0", the open / close door 208b is closed, and this time, the second timer counter area T2 is opened / closed door 208b The second timer counter area T2 is set to "25", which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the second timer. After executing step S4603, the process proceeds to step S4604.

  In step S4604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S4605 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S4605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S4605: NO), the present electronic combination processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S4605: YES), the process proceeds to step S4606, and the in-support flag is erased. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S4601 that the open / close door 208b is not open (S4601: NO), the process proceeds to step S4607 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the open / close door 208b. If it is determined in step S4607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4607: NO), the present electronic combination processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4607 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4607: YES), the process proceeds to step S4608 to execute open processing for controlling the open / close door 208b. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4609.

  In step S4609, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S4609: NO), the process proceeds to step S4610 and the first high frequency support mode is Determine if

  If it is determined in step S4610 that the first high frequency support mode is in progress (S4610: YES), the process proceeds to step S4611 to set "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4610 that the first high frequency support mode is not in progress (S4610: NO), the process proceeds to step S4612, and it is determined whether the second high frequency support mode is in progress.

  If it is determined in step S4612 that the second high frequency support mode is in progress (S4612: YES), the process proceeds to step S4613, and "550" (i.e., 1.1 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4609 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (S4609: YES), or if it is determined in step S4612 that the second high frequency support mode is not in progress (S4612: NO), step S4614 is performed. Proceed to set "100" (ie 0.2 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the gaming ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 can pass through the through gate 206, and the second door 208b is opened. It becomes possible to enter the starting opening 208a. On the other hand, since the game ball GB2 reached after the game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R2, it is impossible to pass through the through gate 206 and the second start opening 208a when the open / close door 208b is open. It is possible to enter the That is, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, only the game ball GB1 can pass through gate 206, and each of two game balls GB1 and GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a. Whether or not it depends on whether or not the open / close door 208b is in the open state at the timing when each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 reaches the open / close device 208. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 208a while the number of game balls passing through the through gate 206 is one. It can be changed depending on the state of the open / close door 208b.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 executes the electric combination opening lottery as triggered by the game ball GB1 passing through the through gate 206, and based on the result of the electric combination opening lottery. It controls the open / close door 208b. Since the game ball GB2 reached after the game ball GB1 does not pass through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 controls the opening / closing door 208b at the timing when each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 reaches the opening / closing device 208 It is triggered that the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206 whether the state is set to the closed state or the open state, that is, whether each of the game balls GB1 and GB2 is to be inserted into the second starting opening 208a. It is determined by the result of the motorized jackpot opening lottery to be executed and the type of the support mode. Therefore, control of whether or not each of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 is caused to enter the second starting opening 208a is a series of control triggered by one game ball GB1 passing through the through gate 206 Can be realized by

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time from the start of the variable display of the light-emitting display unit of the drawing unit 38 to the display of the stop corresponding to the result of the electric combination opening symbol is the electric combination. It is set to a time shorter than the time it takes for the game ball GB1 to reach the opening and closing ball entry device 208 after the first game ball GB1 that has triggered the opening lottery passes through the through gate 206. Therefore, the drawing unit 38 can display the result of the lottery before the game ball GB1 which has passed the through gate 206 and becomes the trigger of the lottery reaches the opening / closing device 208. Here, since the main control device 60 starts control based on the result of the lottery after the result of the lottery is displayed by the drawing unit 38, the game which has passed through the through gate 206 and triggered the lottery The control based on the result of the lottery can be started prior to the timing when the ball GB1 reaches the opening / closing device 208.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, after the light emission display unit of the drawing unit 38 starts the variable display, the stop display corresponding to the winning result of the electric combination opening lottery is performed, and the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball entering device 208 In the time until the transition to the open state is started, the first gaming ball GB1 that has triggered the electric combination opening lottery passes the through gate 206, and then the gaming ball GB1 is opened and closed. It is set to a time shorter than the time up to 208. Therefore, the main control device 60 can realize the high frequency support mode in which the open / close door 208b is in the open state at the timing when the gaming ball GB1 passing through the through gate 206 reaches the open / close ball device 208.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the open / close door 208b transitions from the closed state to the open state, the main control device 60 changes the time length for maintaining the open state for each type of high frequency support mode. Since the control is performed, the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 208a of the two gaming balls GB1 and GB2 can be made to be different for each type of high frequency support mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the second start opening 208a and the game ball GB2 reached after the game ball GB1 does not enter the second start opening 208a. Second high frequency support mode (ball ratio M2 = 1.00) in which both the first high frequency support mode (ball ratio M1 = 0.50) and gaming balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second starting opening 208a And has been realized. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes having different bowling rates, so it is possible to add intonation to a game and to improve the interest of the game.

I. Ninth embodiment:
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described. The difference between the present embodiment and the eighth embodiment is that the configuration of the second starting opening unit is different, and that three types of high-frequency support modes are set. In the following description, the configuration of the second starting opening unit 300 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment and the control regarding the second starting opening unit 300 will be mainly described. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure and the process same as the said 1st-8th embodiment.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory view showing a configuration of a second starting opening unit 300 provided in the pachinko machine of the ninth embodiment. The second starting opening unit 300 has an opening 302 through which game balls can enter, a route R1 provided on the left side downstream of the opening 302, and a route R2 provided on the right side downstream of the opening 302; A first alternate distribution mechanism 304 is provided which alternately distributes the gaming ball having entered the opening 302 into the left route R1 and the right route R2. The second start port unit 300 further includes a second alternate distribution mechanism 305 provided downstream of the route R1, a route R11 provided downstream of the second alternate distribution mechanism 305, and a second alternating vibration. And a path R12 provided on the right side downstream of the dividing mechanism 305. A through gate 306 through which gaming balls can pass is provided downstream of the route R11, and an open / close ball entering device 308 is provided downstream of the through gate 306, the route R12 and the route R2.

  The first alternate distribution mechanism 304 is configured to distribute game balls having entered the opening 302 alternately to the left route R1 and the right route R2. Specifically, the alternating distribution mechanism 304 has a central piece 304a formed at the center, a left piece 304b formed on the left of the central piece 304a, and a right formed on the right of the central piece 304a. It has a piece 304c, and a rotating shaft 304d provided between the left piece 304b and the right piece 304c. The area sandwiched between the center piece 304a and the left piece 304b functions as a left holding portion 304e for temporarily holding the game ball. Further, the region sandwiched by the central piece portion 304a and the right side piece 304c functions as a right side holding portion 304f for temporarily holding the gaming ball. The behavior of the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 when the game ball arrives is the same as the behavior of the alternate distribution mechanism 204 described in the eighth embodiment.

  The second alternate distribution mechanism 305 is configured to distribute the gaming balls distributed to the route R1 alternately to the left route R11 and the right route R12. Specifically, the second alternating distribution mechanism 305 is formed on the central piece 305a formed at the center, the left piece 305b formed on the left of the central piece 305a, and the right of the central piece 305a. And a rotary shaft 305d provided between the left side 305b and the right side 305c. An area sandwiched by the central piece 305a and the left piece 305b functions as a left holding portion 305e for temporarily holding the game ball. Further, the region sandwiched by the central piece 305a and the right piece 305c functions as a right holding portion 305f for temporarily holding the gaming ball. The behavior of the second alternate distribution mechanism 305 when the game ball arrives is the same as the behavior of the alternate distribution mechanism 204 described in the eighth embodiment.

  The open / close ball input device 308 includes an open / close door 308b that opens and closes back and forth with a lower rotation shaft as a base point, and has a second start opening 308a inside of the open / close door 308b where the game ball can enter. In addition, inside the opening and closing door 308b, a guiding path 308c inclined toward the second starting opening 308a is provided, and the gaming ball entered into the inside of the opening and closing door 308b is second along the guiding path 308c. It is guided to the starting opening 308a. The second start port 308a has the same role as the second start port 34 in the above embodiment. When the open / close door 308b is in the closed state, the game ball can not enter the second starting opening 308a. On the other hand, when the open / close door 308b is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting opening 308a. That is, the open / close door 308b has a function of causing the state of the second starting opening 308a to transition between the ball entry impossible state and the ball entry possible state. In the normal state, the open / close door 308b is in the closed state, and the second start port 308a is in the ball entry impossible state.

  The through gate 306 is provided with a through hole extending in the longitudinal direction. When the game ball passes through gate 306, the main control device 60 performs internal lottery whether or not the above-mentioned open / close door 308b is shifted to the open state when the game ball passes through gate 306 as a trigger Perform an item opening lottery). As a result of the electric combination opening lottery, when it is elected to shift the open / close door 308b to the open state, the main control device 60 causes the spread unit 38 to display the result of the electric combination open lottery, and closes the opening / closing door 308b. Transition from the state to the open state.

  The route R11 is configured such that the distributed gaming ball can pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed gaming ball is in the open state of the open / close door 308b of the open / close ball entry device 308 In such a case, it is configured to be able to enter the second starting opening 308a. In the present embodiment, a route R11x branched from the route R11 is provided, but the game balls distributed to the route R11 are configured to always pass through the through gate 306. However, as another embodiment, the game ball distributed to the route R11 may not pass through the through gate 306, and may pass the route R11x.

  The route R2 and the route R12 are configured such that the distributed gaming ball can not pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed gaming ball is the open / close door 308b of the open / close ball entry device 308. When in the open state, it is configured to be capable of entering the second starting opening 308a.

  In the present embodiment, after the game ball passes through gate 306, the result of the motorized jackpot opening lottery executed when the game ball passes through gate 306 is displayed by the drawing unit 38. The time until the game ball is through (gate time until the stop display corresponding to the result of the motorized character opening lottery is performed after the light emission display unit of the drawing unit 38 starts the variable display) It is set to a time shorter than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the open / close ball entry device 308 after passing through 306. Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the time it takes for the game ball to reach the open / close ball entry device 308 after the game ball passes through the through gate 306 is about 0.2 seconds, The fluctuation time of is set to 0.05 seconds.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, it is the time from the display of the result of the electric combination opening lottery by the drawing unit 38 to the start of the transition from the closed state to the open state of the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball entering device 208 Some open standby time is not provided. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when winning in the electric combination opening lottery, the open / close door 208b is closed immediately after the fluctuation of the common movement unit 38 is finished and the result of the electric combination opening lottery is displayed by the common arrangement unit 38. The transition from the state to the open state will be initiated.

  In the present embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment described above, the open / close door 208b starts transitioning from the closed state to the open state after the result of the electric combination open lottery is displayed by the spread unit 38. There is a time required for control of about 0.004 seconds, but in addition to the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 and the open standby time of the open / close door 208b, the game requires time for control, After the game ball passes through the through gate 306, the time from when the open / close door 308b of the open / close device 308 starts transitioning from the closed state to the open state after the ball passes through the through gate 306 is It is set to a time shorter than the time until the game ball reaches the opening and closing entering device 308.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball passes through gate 306 and is elected in the electric combination opening lottery, the main control device 60 opens and closes the gaming ball which triggered the execution of the electric combination opening lottery. Before the timing to reach the ball device 308, the open / close door 308b is transitioned from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the game ball that triggered the execution of the electric combination opening lottery enters the second starting opening 308a provided inside the open / close door 308b when the electric combination opening lottery is won. It will be done.

  In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has a first high frequency support mode, a second high frequency support mode, and a third high frequency support mode as the types of high frequency support modes for controlling the open / close door 308b. ing. In the first high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric combination opening lottery is set to 100%, and the opening frequency of the open / close door 308b is 1 when the electric combination opening lottery is elected, and the opening time is 0 It is set to .5 seconds. In the second high frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric combination opening lottery is set to 100%, and the opening frequency of the open / close door 308b is one and the opening time is 1 when winning in the electric combination opening lottery It is set to 1 second. In the third high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the electric combination opening lottery is set to 100%, and the opening frequency of the open / close door 308b is one and the opening time is 1 when winning in the electric combination opening lottery It is set to .7 seconds. That is, the difference between the first to third high-frequency support modes is the length of time in which the open / close door 308b maintains the open state after transitioning from the closed state to the open state.

  FIG. 79 is an explanatory view showing a trajectory of the game ball when the game ball enters the second starting opening unit 300. FIG. When the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 provided in the second start port unit 300 is inclined to the right and the second alternating distribution mechanism 305 is inclined to the right, the first When the game ball GB1 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB1 is distributed to the path R1 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and is distributed to the path R11 by the second alternate distribution mechanism 305. As a result, the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 306, and enters the second starting opening 308a provided inside the open / close door 308b if the open / close door 308b of the open / close ball entry device 308 is open. It will be. That is, the locus of the game ball GB1 that has entered the first ball is the locus L1 shown in FIG.

  When the second game ball GB2 following the game ball GB1 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB2 is distributed to the path R2 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304. As a result, the game ball GB2 does not pass through the through gate 306 and reaches the open / close ball input device 308, and provided inside the open / close door 308b if the open / close door 308b of the open / close ball input device 308 is open. It enters the second starting opening 308a. That is, the trajectory of the game ball GB2 that has entered the second game is the trajectory L2 shown in FIG.

  When the third game ball GB3 following the game ball GB2 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB3 is distributed to the path R1 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and the path by the second alternate distribution mechanism 305. It is distributed to R12. As a result, the game ball GB3 will reach the open / close ball entry device 308 without passing through the through gate 306, and provided inside the open / close door 308b if the open / close door 308b of the open / close ball entry device 308 is open. It enters the second starting opening 308a. That is, the locus of the game ball GB3 which has entered the third ball is the locus L3 shown in FIG.

  When the fourth game ball GB4 following the game ball GB3 enters from the opening 302, the game ball GB4 is distributed to the path R2 by the first alternate distribution mechanism 304. As a result, the game ball GB4 does not pass through the through gate 306 and reaches the open / close ball input device 308, and provided inside the open / close door 308b if the open / close door 308b of the open / close ball input device 308 is open. It enters the second starting opening 308a. That is, the locus of the game ball GB4 that has entered the fourth ball is the locus L4 shown in FIG.

  In the situation where the fifth game ball following the game ball GB4 enters from the opening 302, the first alternate distribution mechanism 304 is inclined to the right, and the second alternate distribution mechanism 305 is It is inclined to the right. Therefore, the locus of the gaming ball having entered the fifth game is the same as the locus L1 of the gaming ball GB1 having entered the first game. That is, the second starting opening unit 300 of the present embodiment returns to the original state by the four game balls entering.

  Here, in the situation where the gaming balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 300 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81, A case where the first to third high frequency support modes are executed will be described.

  When the first high-frequency support mode is being executed, the probability of winning in the electric combination opening lottery performed with the game ball passing through the through gate 306 is set to 100%, and the electric combination is electrically The opening frequency of the open / close door 308b is set to one, and the opening time is set to 0.5 second when winning in the bonus open lottery. Therefore, the open / close door 308b is in an open state at the timing when the first gaming ball GB1 having passed through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing device 308, but the second to fourth gaming balls GB2 to GB4 Is closed at the timing when it reaches the open / close ball entry device 308. As a result, when the first high frequency support mode is being executed, only the first game ball GB1 among the four game balls GB1 to GB4 is provided inside the open / close door 308b. It will enter the mouth 308a.

  When the second high frequency support mode is being executed, the probability of winning in the electric combination opening lottery performed with the game ball passing through the through gate 306 as a trigger is set to 100%, and the electric combination is electrically The opening frequency of the open / close door 308b is set to one, and the opening time is 1.1 seconds, in the case of winning in the bonus open lottery. Therefore, the open / close door 308b is open at the timing when the first gaming ball GB1 passing through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing device 308 and the timing when the second gaming ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing device 308 However, at the timing when the third to fourth gaming balls GB3 to GB4 reach the open / close ball entry device 308, the third to fourth gaming balls GB3 to GB4 are closed. As a result, when the second high frequency support mode is being executed, the first and second gaming balls GB1 and GB2 of the four gaming balls GB1 to GB4 are provided inside the open / close door 308b. It enters the second starting opening 308a.

  When the third high-frequency support mode is being executed, the probability of winning in the electric combination opening lottery performed with the game ball passing through the through gate 306 is set to 100%, and the electric combination is electrically The opening frequency of the open / close door 308b is set to one, and the opening time is 1.7 seconds when winning in the bonus item opening lottery. Therefore, the open / close door 308b is the timing when the first gaming ball GB1 passing through the through gate 306 reaches the opening / closing device 308, the timing when the second gaming ball GB2 reaches the opening / closing device 308 and the third The game ball GB3 is in the open state at the timing when it reaches the opening / closing device 308, but it is in the closed state when the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the opening / closing device 308. As a result, when the third high frequency support mode is being executed, the first to third gaming balls GB1 to GB3 of the four gaming balls GB1 to GB4 are provided inside the opening / closing door 308b. The ball will enter the second starting opening 308a.

  FIG. 80 is an explanatory view showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. In FIG. 80, for reference, the types of high-frequency support mode to be executed after the end of the open / close execution mode and the contents thereof are also described. As described above, in this embodiment, as the types of the high frequency support mode executed after the end of the open / close execution mode, the first high frequency support mode, the second high frequency support mode, and the third high frequency support mode Is set. In the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls to be paid out as the winning balls when the gaming balls enter the second starting opening 308a is set to two.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (a), if the player wins a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, and the acquired jackpot type counter C2 has a value of 0 to 9, 8R. In addition to transitioning to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and transition to the first high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 10 to 19, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and shifts to the first high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 24, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and is shifted to the second high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode is ended. When the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 25-29, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the mode is shifted to the third high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the case of winning the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 308a and the value of the obtained big hit type counter C2 being 0-5, 8R. In addition to transitioning to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, and transition to the first high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. When the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, the mode is switched to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot, and the mode is shifted to the first high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. When the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the mode is shifted to the second high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends. When the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the mode is shifted to the third high frequency support mode after the open / close execution mode ends.

  Here, the gaming ball is fired in a situation where it is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity which can reach the second starting opening unit 300 by the gaming ball firing mechanism 81. The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls is defined as the ball game rate, and the ball game rate in the case where the i-th (i is an integer of 1 or more) high frequency support mode is being executed It defines as ball rate Mi. In the following, the ball-raising rate M1 when the first high-frequency support mode is being executed, the ball-raising rate M2 when the second high-frequency support mode is being performed, and the second high-frequency support mode are being performed The ball exit rate M3 in the case will be described.

In the first high frequency support mode, the gaming ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity which can reach the second starting opening unit 300 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81. Then, as described above, one game ball out of the four game balls launched is entered into the second starting opening 308a of the open / close ball entry device 308, and two game balls are paid out as a prize ball It will be. Therefore, when the first high frequency support mode is being executed, the bowling rate M1 is as follows.
M1 = 2/4 = 0.50

  Here, that the ball out ratio is less than 1 means that the gaming balls can be continuously reached at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity which can reach the second starting opening unit 200 by the game ball launching mechanism 81. It means that the game ball of the player's hand decreases in the situation where it is fired. Therefore, in the first high frequency support mode, it means that the game balls held by the player are reduced. Specifically, in the first high frequency support mode, four game balls are fired during 2.4 seconds and two game balls are paid out as prize balls, so the game balls held by the player are , At a rate of two in 2.4 seconds (one in 1.2 seconds).

In the second high frequency support mode, the gaming ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 300 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81. Then, as described above, two game balls out of the four game balls launched enter the second starting opening 308a of the open / close ball entry device 308, and four game balls are paid out as prize balls It will be. Therefore, when the second high frequency support mode is being executed, the ball population rate M2 is as follows.
M2 = 4/4 = 1.00

  Here, that the ball out ratio is 1 means that the gaming balls can reach the second starting opening unit 200 by the gaming ball firing mechanism 81 continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity. In the situation of being fired, it means that the game ball of the player's hand does not increase or decrease. Therefore, in the second high frequency support mode, it means that the player's game ball does not increase or decrease. Specifically, in the second high frequency support mode, four game balls are fired during 2.4 seconds and four game balls are paid out as prize balls, so the game balls held by the player are It will not increase or decrease.

In the third high frequency support mode, the gaming ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity that can reach the second starting opening unit 300 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81. Then, as described above, three game balls out of the four game balls launched enter the second starting opening 308a of the open / close ball entry device 308, and six game balls are paid out as prize balls It will be. Therefore, when the third high frequency support mode is being executed, the ball population rate M3 is as follows.
M3 = 6/4 = 1.50

  Here, that the ball release rate exceeds 1 means that the game balls can reach the second starting opening unit 200 by the game ball discharge mechanism 81 continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds. It means that the player's hand-held game ball increases in the situation of being fired. Therefore, in the third high frequency support mode, it means that the player's game balls are increased. Specifically, in the third high-frequency support mode, four game balls are fired in 2.4 seconds and six game balls are paid out as prize balls, so the game balls held by the player are , Will increase at a rate of 2 in 2.4 seconds (rate of 1 in 1.2 seconds).

  In addition, the ratio at which the i-th high-frequency support mode is executed is defined as PAi when the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 33. Do. Then, a ratio PA1 in which the first high frequency support mode is executed, a ratio PA2 in which the second high frequency support mode is performed, and a ratio PA3 in which the third high frequency support mode is performed are as follows.

PA1 = number of jackpot type counter C2 values (0 to 19) that will be switched to the first high frequency support mode by winning the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the first start opening 33 / jackpot Total value of type counter C2 = 20/30
PA2 = number (20-24) of jackpot type counter C2 that wins a jackpot lottery based on entry of gaming balls into the first starting opening 33 and shifts to the second high frequency support mode / Jackpot Total value of type counter C2 = 5/30
PA3 = number of jackpot type counter C2 (25-29) that will win the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 and shift to the third high frequency support mode / big hit Total value of type counter C2 = 5/30

  In addition, if the winning rate in a big hit lottery based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 is won and the high frequency support is being executed, then the total bowling rate is defined as the first overall bowling rate T1. , And the first overall ball throwing rate T1 can be defined by the following equation (3).

  In the above equation (3), n is the number of types of high frequency support modes, and n = 3 in this embodiment. Therefore, the first comprehensive ball throwing rate T1 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T1 = M1 × PA1 + M2 × PA2 + M3 × PA3
= 0.50 × (20/30) + 1.00 × (5/30) + 1.50 × (5/30)
= 0.75

  That is, the first comprehensive ball ratio T1 is the sum of the ball ratio of each high-frequency support mode executed based on the ball entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33 multiplied by the execution ratio, It means the expected value of the ball rate.

  In addition, the ratio at which the i-th high-frequency support mode is executed is defined as PBi when the high-frequency support mode is executed by winning the jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 308a. Do. Then, a ratio PB1 in which the first high frequency support mode is executed, a ratio PB2 in which the second high frequency support mode is performed, and a ratio PB3 in which the third high frequency support mode is performed are as follows.

PB1 = Number of jackpot type counter C2 value (0 to 11) / jackpot that will win the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 308a and shift to the first high frequency support mode Total value of type counter C2 = 12/30
Number of jackpot type counter C2 value (12 to 20) / jackpot that will win a big hit lottery based on the entry of gaming balls into the second starting opening 308a and shift to the second high frequency support mode Total value of type counter C2 = 9/30
PB3 = Number of big hit type counter C2 (21-29) that will win the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 308a and shift to the third high frequency support mode / Big hit Total value of type counter C2 = 9/30

  In addition, if winning a big hit lottery based on the entry of gaming balls into the second starting opening 308a and high frequency support is being executed, the total ball exit rate is defined as the second overall ball exit rate T2 , And the second overall ball exit rate T2 can be defined by the following equation (4).

  In the above equation (4), n is the number of types of the high frequency support mode, and n = 3 in this embodiment. Therefore, the second comprehensive ball throwing rate T2 in the present embodiment is as follows.

T2 = M1 × PB1 + M2 × PB2 + M3 × PB3
= 0.50 × (12/30) + 1.00 × (6/30) + 1.50 × (6/30)
= 0.95

  That is, the second overall ball exit rate T2 is the sum of the ball exit rates of the respective high frequency support modes executed based on the ball entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 308a multiplied by the execution rate, It means the expected value of the ball rate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, although the third high frequency support mode in which the ball out rate exceeds 1 can be executed, the first integrated ball out rate T1 and the second integrated ball out rate T2 All of the values are less than one. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the game balls held by the player in total do not increase but decrease.

  Next, an example of a process performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the following, processing different from the eighth embodiment is described, and the description of the same processing is omitted.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a winning opening process for the starting opening performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. In the following, differences from the processing (FIGS. 10 and 74) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and eighth embodiments will be described.

  In step S4706, main controller 60 of pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment sets a winning ball command for causing payout control device 70 to pay out two game balls. The processes in the other steps are the same as the processes (FIGS. 10 and 74) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first and eighth embodiments, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, which is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 75) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is the first to third high-frequency support corresponding to each of the three high-frequency support modes. The point is to store the flag. The first to third high frequency support flags are used to determine whether the first to third high frequency support modes are being executed, respectively. The details will be described below.

  In step S4801, it is determined whether the 16R probability change flag is stored in the RAM 64 as the big hit type flag.

  If it is determined in step S4801 that the 16R positive variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S4801: YES), the process proceeds to step S4802 to execute flag deletion processing. The flag erasing process is a process of erasing information for specifying a gaming state. Specifically, if the open / close execution mode flag, the high probability mode flag, the first high frequency support flag, the second high frequency support flag, and the third high frequency support flag are stored, they are erased, If these flags are not stored, the state is maintained. After executing step S4802, the process proceeds to step S4803.

  In step S4803, the high probability mode flag is stored, and then, in step S4804, the third high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, after the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot is ended, the game mode is shifted to the gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the third high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big hit is generated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4805.

  In step S4805, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4806, and the third high frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the third high frequency support mode, is sent to the voice emission control device 90. Set as a command to be sent. Thereafter, the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode is ended. The voice emission control device 90 that has received the third high frequency support command starts control to execute an effect that suggests the player that the support mode is the third high frequency support mode. As an effect that suggests that the support mode is the third high frequency support mode, for example, an effect that indicates that it is advantageous for the player even if the game ball is increasing and it is difficult to win the jackpot. Can be mentioned.

  If it is determined in step S4801 that the 16R definite variation flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S4801: NO), the process proceeds to step S4807 to determine whether the 8R probable variation flag is stored in the RAM 64 as the big hit type flag. judge. If it is determined in step S4807 that the 8R probable change flag is stored in the RAM 64 (S4807: YES), the process proceeds to step S4808 to execute the flag deletion process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4809.

  In step S4809, the high probability mode flag is stored, and then, in step S4810, the second high frequency support flag is stored. As a result, after the open / close execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot is ended, the game mode is shifted to the gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the second high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big hit is generated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4811.

  In step S 4811, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the success or failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio light emission control device 90 Do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S 4812, and the second high frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the second high frequency support mode, is sent to the voice emission control device 90. Set as a command to be sent. Thereafter, the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode is ended. The voice emission control device 90 that has received the second high frequency support command starts control to execute an effect that suggests that the support mode is the second high frequency support mode. As an effect that suggests that the support mode is the second high frequency support mode, for example, there is neither increase nor decrease in the number of gaming balls, and it is not disadvantageous for the player even if it is a situation where jackpot is not won easily I can mention the suggested effect.

  If it is determined in step S4807 that the 8R probability variation flag is not stored in the RAM 64 (S4807: NO), the process proceeds to step S4813 to execute the flag erasing process. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4814.

  In step S4814, after the first high frequency support flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S4815, and "100" is set in the game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The value set in the number-of-games counter area is a value indicating the number of games played when the first high-frequency support mode is executed with the number of games limited. As a result, after the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is ended, the game mode is shifted to the gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. However, in this case, the first high frequency support mode ends after 100 game runs are executed, and thereafter, the normal gaming state in which the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode Transition. After executing step S4815, the process proceeds to step S4816.

  In step S4816, the first high frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the first high frequency support mode, is to be transmitted to the voice emission control device 90. Set as a command of. Thereafter, the transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode is ended. The voice emission control device 90 that has received the first high frequency support command starts control to execute an effect that suggests the player that the support mode is the first high frequency support mode. As an effect that suggests that the support mode is the first high frequency support mode, for example, mention an effect that indicates that the situation in which the game ball is decreasing and it is not easy to win the jackpot is disadvantageous for the player. Can.

  FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing the electric combination opening and closing process performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 77) executed by the main controller 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment is that different opening times are set for each of the three types of high-frequency support modes. The details will be described below.

  In step S4901, it is determined whether the open / close door 308b as the motorized role is open. Whether or not the open / close door 308b is open is determined based on whether or not the motorized accessory drive unit 34b is in a driven state. If it is determined that the open / close door 308b is open (S4901: YES), the process proceeds to step S4902.

  In step S4902, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open continuation time of the open / close door 308b. If it is determined in step S 4902 that the value of the second timer counter area T 2 is not “0” (S 4902: NO), the present electronic combination processing ends. That is, when the open continuation time of the open / close door 308 b has not ended, the present electric wave open / close processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S4902 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S4902: YES), the process proceeds to step S4903, and closing processing for controlling the open / close door 308b is performed. [2] Set "25" (ie, 0.05 sec) in the timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as the measuring means of the opening continuation time of the open / close door 308b is "0", the open / close door 308b is closed, and this time, the second timer counter area T2 is opened / closed door 308b The second timer counter area T2 is set to "25", which is used as a parameter for measuring the closing continuation time of the second timer. After executing step S4903, the process proceeds to step S4904.

  In step S4904, after the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, the process proceeds to step S4905, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". If it is determined in step S4905 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S4905: NO), the present electronic combination processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4905 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S4905: YES), the process proceeds to step S4906, and the in-support flag is erased. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S4901 that the open / close door 308b is not open (S4901: NO), the process proceeds to step S4907 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the open / close door 308b. If it is determined in step S4907 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S4907: NO), the present electronic combination processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4907 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S4907: YES), the process proceeds to step S4908 to execute open processing for controlling the open / close door 308b. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S4909.

  In step S4909, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S4909: NO), the process proceeds to step S4910 to determine whether or not the first high frequency support mode is selected. Determine if

  If it is determined in step S4910 that the first high frequency support mode is in progress (S4910: YES), the process proceeds to step S4911 to set "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended. If it is determined in step S4910 that the first high frequency support mode is not in progress (S4910: NO), the process proceeds to step S4912, and it is determined whether the second high frequency support mode is in progress.

  If it is determined in step S4912 that the second high-frequency support mode is in progress (S4912: YES), the flow advances to step S4913 to set "550" (ie, 1.1 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4912 that the second high frequency support mode is not in progress (S4912: NO), the process proceeds to step S4914 to determine whether the third high frequency support mode is in progress.

  If it is determined in step S4914 that the third high frequency support mode is in progress (S4914: YES), the process proceeds to step S4915, and "850" (that is, 1.7 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4909 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (S4909: YES), or if it is determined in step S4914 that the third high frequency support mode is not in progress (S4914: NO), the process proceeds to step S4916. Proceed to set "100" (ie 0.2 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first gaming ball GB1 distributed to the route R11 can pass through the through gate 306 and the open / close door 308b is in the open state. It is possible to enter the second starting opening 308a. On the other hand, the three game balls GB2, GB3 and GB4 which reach after the first game ball GB1 are distributed to the route R2 or the route R12, so that they can not pass through the through gate 306 and open and close When the door 308b is in the open state, it is possible to enter the second starting opening 308a. That is, of the four game balls, only the first game ball GB1 can pass through gate 306, and each of the four game balls is the second start opening 308a. Whether or not to enter the ball depends on whether or not the open / close door 308b is in the open state at the timing when the respective game balls of the four game balls reach the open / close device 308. Therefore, while the number of gaming balls passing through gate 306 is one among four gaming balls, the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 308a is changed depending on the state of opening / closing door 308b. It can be done.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the main control device 60 controls the open / close door 308b based on the result of the motorized combination opening lottery performed with the game ball passing through the through gate 306 as a trigger. Since the three game balls GB2, GB3 and GB4 reached after the first game ball GB1 do not pass through gate 306, main controller 60 controls each of four game balls to open / close ball device 308 Whether the state of the open / close door 308b at the reached timing is to be closed or opened, that is, whether or not each of the four game balls is to be entered into the second starting opening 308a, the first game It is determined based on the result of the motor-operated combination opening lottery executed upon the passage of the ball GB1 through the through gate 306 and the type of the support mode. Therefore, control of whether or not each of the four gaming balls is to be entered into the second starting opening 308a is realized by a series of control triggered by the passage of the first gaming ball GB1 through the through gate 306 can do.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time from the start of the variable display of the light-emitting display unit of the drawing unit 38 to the display of the stop corresponding to the result of the electric combination opening symbol is the electric combination. It is set to a time shorter than the time it takes for the game ball GB1 to reach the opening and closing ball entry device 208 after the first game ball GB1 that has triggered the opening lottery passes through the through gate 206. Therefore, the general drawing unit 38 opens the motorized part prior to the timing when the first gaming ball GB1 that has passed the through gate 306 and triggered the electric part opening lottery has reached the open / close ball entry device 308. It becomes possible to display the result of the lottery. Here, since the control based on the result of the motorized product opening lottery is started after the result of the motorized character opening lottery is displayed by the drawing unit 38, the main control device 60 passes through the through gate 306. It is possible to start control based on the result of the electric combination open lottery before the timing when the first gaming ball GB1 which has triggered the electric combination opening lottery reaches the opening / closing device 308. As a result, the main control device 60 realizes the high frequency support mode in which the open / close door 308b is in the open state at the timing when the first gaming ball GB1 passing through the through gate 306 reaches the open / close ball entering device 308. Is possible.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, after the open / close door 208b transitions from the closed state to the open state, the main control device 60 varies the length of time for maintaining the open state for each type of high frequency support mode. The number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 308a among the four gaming balls GB1 to GB4 can be made different for each type of high frequency support mode. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first gaming ball GB1 enters the second starting opening 308a and the three gaming balls GB2, GB3 and GB4 which reach after the gaming ball GB1 are second starting openings. The first high-frequency support mode (ball-out rate M1 = 0.50) not to enter the ball 308a, and the first and second gaming balls GB1 and GB2 enter the second starting opening 308a and the third And the fourth game ball GB3, GB4 does not enter the second starting opening 308a second high frequency support mode (ball ratio M2 = 1.00), and the first to third game balls GB1, GB2 and GB3 enter the second start opening 308a and the fourth game ball GB4 does not enter the second start opening 308a. A third high-frequency support mode (ball ratio M3 = 1.50) is realized. It is done. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes with different ball-drawing rates, so it is possible to impart tonation to a game and to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the alternating distribution mechanism (the first alternating distribution mechanism 304, the second alternating distribution mechanism 305) for allocating the gaming balls alternately to any of the two paths is two stages. Since one game ball GB1 which has reached the second starting opening unit 300 is distributed to the route R11 and three game balls GB1, GB2, which arrive later than the game ball GB1, are adopted. The function of allocating GB3 to routes (routes R2 and R12) different from the route R11 can be realized with a simple configuration as compared with a configuration implemented using electronic control or the like. In addition, as a structure which realizes the said function using electronic control etc., for example, the number of objects of the game ball which reached the 2nd starting opening unit 300 is measured using a counter etc., and a structure driven by electric power The composition which distributes a game ball using etc. can be mentioned.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the case where the high frequency support mode is executed despite the fact that the third high frequency support mode in which the bowling rate exceeds 1 can be executed as the type of the high frequency support mode. Since the total ball-out rate (first overall ball-out rate T1 and second overall ball-out rate T2) is less than 1, giving the player a feeling of uplifting in the third high frequency support mode where game balls increase By making it possible to suppress the first total ball exit ratio T1 and the second total ball exit ratio T2 to less than 1, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the player's euphoria. As a result, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the third high frequency support mode in which the ball-out rate exceeds 1 is being executed, the number of gaming balls held by the player increases. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an expectation that the third high frequency support mode is desired to continue for a long time. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the 16R probability variation jackpot is won, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the third high frequency support mode is executed. Then, the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode continue until the jackpot lottery is won next time. That is, since the high probability mode does not end until the jackpot lottery is won next time (so-called loop machine), it is guaranteed to win the jackpot lottery during the high probability mode, and until the jackpot lottery is won, The 3rd high frequency support mode which a game ball increases will continue. Therefore, it is guaranteed that the player will win the jackpot lottery during the high probability mode, so that the third high frequency support mode is desired to be continued for a long time without winning the jackpot lottery for as long as possible. You will feel a sense of expectation. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the player is provided with a new expectation that the third high frequency support mode is desired to continue for a long time without winning the jackpot lottery for as long as possible in the high probability mode. Since it can, it can aim at the interest improvement of a game.

  Furthermore, in such a configuration, if the winning probability of the jackpot lottery in the high probability mode is set low, the probability that the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode will continue long becomes large. Therefore, the expected value of the number of game balls that can be increased in the third high frequency support mode can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When the high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode are configured to end after the jackpot lottery of a predetermined number of times (for example, 120 times) is executed (so-called special time machine (ST machine)), Since the player wants to continue the third high frequency support mode as long as possible to increase the number of gaming balls, the player has an expectation that he does not want to win the jackpot lottery in the game round soon after transitioning to the high probability mode. Before the high probability mode ends, you will have a sense of expectation that you want to win the jackpot lottery.

  Then, when the player wins the jackpot lottery in the game round immediately after transitioning to the high probability mode, the player feels regrettable that the third high frequency support mode has ended in a short period. So, you will have a sense of satisfaction that you have won the jackpot lottery before the high probability mode ends. In addition, when winning the big hit lottery at the game round just before the high probability mode ends, it is said that the player continued the third high frequency support mode for a long period and was able to increase the game balls significantly You will have a sense of satisfaction and satisfaction, such as winning a big hit lottery before the high probability mode is over. That is, when the player wins the jackpot lottery at the game round just before the high probability mode ends, the player can enjoy double satisfaction. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is not won by the end of the high probability mode, the player is satisfied that the third high frequency support mode continues for a long period and the game balls can be increased significantly. While having a feeling, it will have the regrettable feeling that he did not win the jackpot lottery before the high probability mode ended. That is, since it is possible to provide the player with complicated intonation of the heart condition in the high probability mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Next, another example of the configuration of the second starting opening unit will be described. As described below, various configurations can be adopted as the second starting opening unit.

  FIG. 84 is an explanatory view schematically showing another example of the configuration of the second starting port unit. As a reference, FIG. 84 (A) schematically shows the second starting opening unit 300 of the ninth embodiment. Further, FIG. 84 shows the order and the distribution destinations of the game balls having entered the second starting opening unit.

  In FIG. 84 (B), a second starting port unit 300B is schematically shown as Example 1. The difference with the second starting opening unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 84 (A) is that the game ball distributed to the route R2 has the second starting opening 308a even when the open / close door 308b is open. It is a point configured to be impossible to enter the Specifically, since the length in the horizontal direction of the opening / closing device 308 is short, the second and fourth gaming balls are selected regardless of the control mode of the opening / closing door 308 b in each high frequency support mode. Can not enter the second starting opening 308a. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 308a among the gaming balls entering the opening 302 of the second starting opening unit 300.

  In FIG. 84 (C), a second starting opening unit 300C is schematically shown as Example 2. Further, FIG. 85 shows a specific configuration of the second starting opening unit 300C. The difference with the second starting opening unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIGS. 84A and 78 is that the route R2 and the route R12 merge to form one route. According to such a configuration, the second starting opening unit can be miniaturized, so that the mountability to the game board 30 can be improved.

  In FIG. 84 (D), a second starting port unit 300D is schematically shown as Example 3. The difference with the second starting opening unit 300 of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 84 (A) is that the third alternating distribution mechanism 305A is provided on the downstream side of the second alternating distribution mechanism 305. is there. The third alternating distribution mechanism 305A distributes the gaming balls flowing down the path R11 alternately to the path R111 on the left side and the path R112 on the right side.

  The route R111 is configured such that the distributed gaming ball passes through the through gate 306, and the distributed gaming ball is second when the open / close door 308b of the open / close ball entry device 308 is in the open state. It is comprised so that it is possible to enter into the starting opening 308a. The route R112 is configured such that the distributed gaming ball can not pass through the through gate 306, and the distributed gaming ball is in an open state of the open / close door 308b of the open / close ball entry device 308 In some cases, it is configured to be able to enter the second starting opening 308a.

  According to such a configuration, among the eight game balls entered in the opening 302 of the second starting opening unit 300D, only one game ball passes through the through gate 306. In other words, after one gaming ball passes through gate 306, the following seven gaming balls do not pass through gate 306, and the ninth gaming ball passes through through gate 306 again. Therefore, by setting the opening time of the open / close door 308b to a different length for each high frequency support mode, the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 308a can be any number from 1 to 8 It can be set to a value. For example, in the case where the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball (the number of prize balls) is set to 2 when one game ball enters the second starting opening 308a, the following eight types High frequency support mode can be realized.

First high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 0.5 seconds The number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 1/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls 1: 1 × 2 pieces = 2 pieces of game balls: 8 pieces of game balls are fired 4.8 seconds of game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds Ball ratio: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls launched = 2 pieces / Eight pieces = 0.25

Second high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 1.1 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 2/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls × 2 × 2 pieces = 4 pieces of game balls: 4 pieces of game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball ratio: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls launched = 4 pieces / 8 pieces = 0.50

Third high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 1.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 3/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls × 3 × 2 = 6 increase or decrease of game balls: 2 game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball ratio: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls launched = 6 Eight pieces = 0.75

4th frequent support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 2.3 seconds The number of game balls entered / number of game balls launched: 4/8 number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls × 4 × 2 pieces = 8 pieces increase or decrease of game balls: No increase or decrease Sphere rate: the number of game balls to be paid out / the number of game balls released = 8 pieces / 8 pieces = 1.00

・ 5th frequent support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 2.9 seconds The number of game balls entered / number of game balls launched: 5/8 number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls × 5 × 2 pieces = 10 pieces of game balls: 8 pieces of game balls are fired 4.8 seconds of 2 pieces of game balls are increased Ball ratio: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls launched = 10 pieces / Eight pieces = 1.25

6th frequent support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 3.5 seconds Entering number of gaming balls / launching number of gaming balls: 6/8 number of gaming balls to be paid out = entering number of gaming balls × number of award balls: 6 × 2 = 12 increase or decrease of game balls: 4 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball ratio: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls released = 12 Eight pieces = 1.50

・ 7th frequent support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 4.1 seconds The number of game balls entered / number of game balls launched: 7/8 number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls ×: 7 × 2 = 14 game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 seconds increase game balls by 6 ball increase rate: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls released = 14 / Eight pieces = 1.75

・ 8th frequent support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 4.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls launched: 8/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls × 8 × 2 = 16 game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 seconds increase in game balls Ball ratio: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls launched = 16 / 8 pieces = 2.00

  As described above, if the configuration of the second start port unit 300D is adopted, the types of the high frequency support mode can be set in multiple stages. Further, if the alternating distribution mechanism is further configured in multiple stages, the number of gaming balls not passing through the through gate 306 can be further increased, and the types of the high frequency support mode can be set in multiple stages. It becomes possible. In addition, the number of gaming balls to be paid out as a winning ball (the number of winning balls) when one gaming ball enters the second starting opening 308a can be set to a value other than one or two. For example, when the number of winning balls is set to three in the eight types of high frequency support modes described above, each high frequency support mode is as follows.

First high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 0.5 seconds The number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 1/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls 1: 1 × 3 pieces = 3 pieces of game balls: 5 pieces of game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds when 8 pieces of game balls are fired Ball ratio: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls launched = 3 pieces / 8 pieces = 0.375

Second high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 1.1 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 2/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls × 2 × 3 = 6 increase or decrease of game balls: 2 game balls are reduced in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball ratio: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls launched = 6 Eight pieces = 0.75

Third high frequency support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 1.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls fired: 3/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls × 3 × 3 = 9 increase or decrease of game balls: 1 increase of game balls in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball ratio: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls released = 9 / Eight pieces = 1.125

4th frequent support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 2.3 seconds The number of game balls entered / number of game balls launched: 4/8 number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls × 4 × 3 = 12 increase or decrease of game balls: 4 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball ratio: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls released = 12 Eight pieces = 1.50

・ 5th frequent support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 2.9 seconds The number of game balls entered / number of game balls launched: 5/8 number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls × 5 × 3 = 15 game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are fired 4.8 seconds increase the game balls by ball increase rate: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls released number = 15 / Eight pieces = 1.875

6th frequent support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 3.5 seconds Entering number of gaming balls / launching number of gaming balls: 6/8 number of gaming balls to be paid out = entering number of gaming balls × number of award balls: 6 × 3 = 18 increase or decrease of game balls: 10 increase of game balls in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball ratio: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls released = 18 8 = 2.25

・ 7th frequent support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 4.1 seconds The number of game balls entered / number of game balls launched: 7/8 number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls ×: 7 × 3 = 21 increase or decrease of game balls: 13 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds when 8 game balls are fired Ball ratio: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls released = 21 Eight pieces = 2.625

・ 8th frequent support mode:
Opening time of the opening and closing door 308b: 4.7 seconds Number of game balls entered / number of game balls launched: 8/8 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of game balls entered × number of balls × 8 × 3 = 24 game balls increase / decrease: 8 game balls are fired, 16 game balls increase in 4.8 seconds Ball ratio: number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls launched = 24 / 8 pieces = 3.00

  FIG. 84 (E) schematically shows a second starting port unit 300E as Example 4. The difference with the second starting opening unit 300D of Example 3 shown in FIG. 84 (D) is that the gaming ball distributed to the route R2 enters the second starting opening 308a even if the open / close door 308b is open. It is a point that is configured to be impossible to ball. Specifically, since the length in the horizontal direction of the open / close ball feeder 308 is short, the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth ones can be used regardless of the control mode of the open / close door 308b in each high-frequency support mode. The game ball can not enter the second starting opening 308a. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 308a among the gaming balls entering the opening 302 of the second starting opening unit 300E.

  FIG. 84 (F) schematically shows a second starting opening unit 300F as Example 5. The difference with the second starting opening unit 300D of Example 3 shown in FIG. 84 (D) is that the route R2, the route R12 and the route R112 are merged to form one route. According to such a configuration, the second starting opening unit can be miniaturized, so that the mountability to the game board 30 can be improved.

J. Tenth embodiment:
A tenth embodiment will now be described. The present embodiment is provided with a second starting opening unit 200 (FIG. 70) identical to the eighth embodiment. The difference from the eighth embodiment is that the aspect of controlling the open / close door 208b is different. Below, the aspect of control of the opening / closing door 208b is mainly demonstrated. Description of the same configuration and processing as those of the eighth embodiment is omitted.

  In this embodiment, one type of high frequency support mode is set, and there are two types of winning in the case of winning the electric combination opening lottery in the high frequency support mode (type 1 electric combination opening and Two kinds of electric wave release is set. In addition, in the low frequency support mode, one type (type 3 electronic combination release) of winning is set in the case of winning the electric combination opening lottery. The details of the control of the open / close door 208b for each variation type of the drawing unit 38 and the type of winning of the electric combination opening lottery are as follows.

-Electric combination release lottery in high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the percentage that can be distributed to the first kind of electric wave opening: 50%
As a result of winning, the proportion distributed to the second-class electric wave opener: 50%
・ When winning the first type electric connector opening Wait time for opening the opening and closing door 208b: 0.05 seconds Number of opening of the opening and closing door 208b: 1 time Opening time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds In the case of winning the opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.25 seconds The number of times of opening the opening and closing door 208b: 1 time The opening time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

-Electric combination opening lottery in the low frequency support mode Variation time of the drawing unit 38: 29.5 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning, the percentage that can be distributed to the third kind of electric wave company opening: 100%
-When winning the third kind of electric wave combination opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.25 seconds Number of opening times of the opening and closing door 208b: 1 time opening time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.2 seconds

  In the control mode of the open / close door 208b described above, the difference between the case where the first type electric power opening is won during the high frequency support mode and the case where the type 2 electric power opening is elected is the variable display of the drawing unit 38 Is the length of the open standby time which is the time from when the open / close door 208b starts transitioning to the open state after the stop of the game, and as will be described later The number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 208a is different in the situation where they are fired continuously. In addition, the time of 0.8 seconds set as the open time of the open / close door 208b is longer than the 0.6 seconds which is the firing interval of the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game It is a time shorter than 1.2 seconds which is a firing interval between the ball and the third game ball.

  FIG. 86 is an explanatory view showing the behavior of the second starting opening unit 200 when the first type electric power opening is won. FIG. 87 is a timing chart showing timings when the game balls reach the through gate 206 and the opening / closing device 208, and showing a control mode of the opening / closing door 208b when winning the first type electric combination opening. In the example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the gaming ball is able to reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the gaming board 30 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81, It is fired continuously at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, the gaming balls enter the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  As shown in the state A1 of FIG. 86, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting opening unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting opening unit 200 from the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is reached. In the example shown in the state A1, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the right, so the gaming balls that have reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 are temporarily held by the left holding portion 204e. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates approximately 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) around the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the gaming ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e, and the state of FIG. 86 It becomes A2.

  As shown in the state A2 of FIG. 86, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the left, the gaming ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e drops from the left holding portion 204e, and the left path R1. Distributed to Thereafter, the gaming ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 passes through the through gate 206. When the gaming ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes an electric combination opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.05 seconds, and the probability of winning the electric character opening symbol lottery in the high frequency support mode Is set to 100%. Then, when winning the first type electric combination opening in the electric combination opening lottery, the opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b is 0.05 seconds, the opening number of the opening and closing door 208b is one, and the opening time is 0. 0. It is set to 8 seconds. In the present embodiment, as described later, when the main control device 60 determines that the open standby time has elapsed (FIG. 91 described later: S5123), the transition of the open / close door 208b to the open state is started The processing to be performed is executed in the electronic combination opening and closing processing (FIG. 91: S5124, FIG. 92 described later) in the same circulation, not the electronic combination opening and closing processing in the next circulation which is executed in a cycle of 0.004 seconds. Therefore, the time required for the control until the open / close door 208b of the open / close device 208 starts to open after the open standby time has elapsed is significantly shorter than 0.004 seconds. There is.

  Therefore, the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball entering device 208 transitions to the open state about 0.1 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 87). As described above, in the present embodiment, since the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the opening / closing device 208 after the game ball passes through gate 206 is about 0.2 seconds, At the timing when the passing game ball GB1 reaches the open / close ball entry device 208, the open / close door 208b is in the open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting opening 208a. Thereafter, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, and the state A3 of FIG. 86 is reached.

  As shown in the state A3 of FIG. 86, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the left. Because of this, the game ball GB2 that has reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right holding unit 204f. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) around the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the gaming ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f, and the state A4 of FIG. 86 It becomes.

  As shown in the state A4 in FIG. 86, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the right, the gaming ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f drops from the right holding portion 204f, and the right path R2 Distributed to Thereafter, the game balls GB2 distributed to the route R2 reach the opening and closing ball entering device 208. Here, in the present embodiment, since the interval of the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, after the game balls GB1 reach the opening and closing ball entering device 208, the game balls GB2 open and close. The interval for reaching the ball entry device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Further, in the present embodiment, since the open time of the open / close door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, the open / close door 208b maintains the open state even at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the open / close ball entering device 208 . As a result, the game ball GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a provided inside the opening and closing ball entry device 208. After the gaming ball GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a, the open / close door 208b is closed, and is again in the state A1. Since the opening time of the open / close door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, the open / close door 208b is, as shown in FIG. 87, before the next game ball GB3 of the game ball GB2 passes through the through gate 206. In the closed state.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the gaming balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity which can reach the second starting opening unit 200 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81. In the case where the winning combination of the first type electric combination is won in the electric combination opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode, the timing at which the game ball GB1 that triggered the electric combination opening lottery reaches the opening / closing device 208 The open / close door 208b is maintained in the open state, and the open / close door 208b is maintained in the open state also at the timing when the gaming ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the open / close ball entering device 208. As a result, of the two game balls GB1 and GB2, both game balls enter the second starting opening 208a.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory view showing the behavior of the second starting opening unit 200 when the second type electric power opening is won. FIG. 89 is a timing chart showing timings when the game balls reach the through gate 206 and the opening / closing device 208, and showing a control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the case of winning the second type electric combination opening. The difference between the example shown in FIGS. 88 and 89 and the example shown in FIGS. 86 and 87 is that the open standby time of the open / close door 208b is set to 0.25 seconds and it passes through the through gate 206. The game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting opening 208a. The details will be described below.

  As shown in the state A1 of FIG. 88, when the game ball GB1 reaches the second starting opening unit 200 and enters the inside of the second starting opening unit 200 from the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is reached. In the example shown in the state A1, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the right, so the gaming balls that have reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 are temporarily held by the left holding portion 204e. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 rotates about 90 degrees counterclockwise (counterclockwise) about the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB1 held by the left side holding unit 204e, and becomes state A2 .

  As shown in the state A2 of FIG. 88, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the left, the gaming ball GB1 held by the left holding portion 204e drops from the left holding portion 204e, and the left path R1. Distributed to Thereafter, the gaming ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 passes through the through gate 206. When the gaming ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, the main control device 60 executes an electric combination opening lottery. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.05 seconds, and the probability of winning the electric character opening symbol lottery in the high frequency support mode Is set to 100%. Then, when the first type electric combination opening is won in the electric combination opening lottery, the opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b is 0.25 seconds, the opening number of the opening and closing door 208b is one, and the opening time is 0. 0. It is set to 8 seconds. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the time required for control from when the open standby time has elapsed to when the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball unit 208 starts transitioning to the open state is 0.004. The time is much shorter than the second.

  Therefore, the open / close door 208b of the open / close ball entering device 208 transitions to the open state about 0.3 seconds after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206, and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 89). As described above, in the present embodiment, since the time it takes for the gaming ball to reach the opening / closing device 208 after the game ball passes through gate 206 is about 0.2 seconds, The open / close door 208b maintains the closed state at the timing when the passed game ball GB1 reaches the open / close ball entry device 208, and the game ball GB1 does not enter the second starting opening 208a, and the open / close ball entry device Go through 208. Thereafter, the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, and the state A3 in FIG. 88 is reached.

  As shown in the state A3 of FIG. 88, when the game ball GB2 next to the game ball GB1 distributed to the route R1 enters the opening 202, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the left. Because of this, the game ball GB2 that has reached the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is temporarily held by the right holding unit 204f. Then, the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is rotated approximately 90 degrees clockwise (clockwise) around the rotation axis 204d by the weight of the game ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f, and becomes the state A4.

  As shown in the state A4 in FIG. 88, when the alternate distribution mechanism 204 is inclined to the right, the gaming ball GB2 held by the right holding portion 204f drops from the right holding portion 204f, and the right path R2 Distributed to Thereafter, the game balls GB2 distributed to the route R2 reach the opening and closing ball entering device 208. Here, in the present embodiment, since the interval of the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 81 is 0.6 seconds, after the game balls GB1 reach the opening and closing ball entering device 208, the game balls GB2 open and close. The interval for reaching the ball entry device 208 is also about 0.6 seconds. Further, in the present embodiment, since the open standby time of the open / close door 208b is set to 0.25 seconds, the open / close door 208b is open at the timing when the game ball GB2 reaches the open / close ball entering device 208 . As a result, the game ball GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a provided inside the opening and closing ball entry device 208. After the gaming ball GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a, the open / close door 208b is closed, and is again in the state A1. Since the open time of the open / close door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, as shown in FIG. 89, the open / close door 208b is before the next game ball GB3 of the game ball GB2 passes through the through gate 206. In the closed state.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the gaming balls are continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds with a predetermined firing intensity which can reach the second starting opening unit 200 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81. In the case of winning the second type electric combination opening in the electric combination opening lottery in the high frequency support mode, at the timing when the gaming ball GB1 which became the trigger of the electric combination opening opening lottery reaches the opening and closing entering device 208 The open / close door 208b maintains the closed state, and the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state at the timing when the game ball GB2 distributed to the route R2 reaches the open / close ball entry device 208. As a result, one game ball GB2 out of the two game balls GB1 and GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the open standby time of the open / close door 208b, the number of times per 1.2 seconds (FIG. 87, FIG. 89) after the gaming ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206 The number of gaming balls entering the starting opening 208a can be changed.

  In the low-frequency support mode, in the case of winning the third type electric combination opening in the electric combination opening lottery, the fluctuation time of the spread unit 38 is 29.5 seconds, and the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b is 0. 0. Since it is set to 25 seconds, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state after the gaming ball GB1 and the gaming ball GB2 pass through the opening / closing device 208. That is, when the third electric symbol combination opening is won in the electric combination opening lottery in the low frequency support mode, both the game ball GB1 and the game ball GB2 will not enter the second starting opening 208a.

  Next, an example of a process performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the following, processing different from the eighth embodiment is described, and the description of the same processing is omitted.

  FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode, which is executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 75) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is that the high frequency support mode is one type in the present embodiment and therefore the high frequency support flag The type is not set. The details will be described below.

  In step S5004, the main control unit 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the high frequency support flag. As a result, after the open / close execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is ended, the game mode shifts to the gaming state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Further, in step S5007, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment stores the high frequency support flag. As a result, after the open / close execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot is ended, the game mode shifts to the gaming state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode. The processes in the other steps are the same as the processes (FIG. 75) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing a process for electronic structure support performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 76) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is the open standby time corresponding to the type of electronic combination opened in the electric combination opening lottery. It is a point to set. The details will be described below.

  In step S5101, it is determined whether support is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the in-support flag is stored in the in-support flag storage area provided in the various-flag storage area 64 e of the RAM 64. If it is determined in step S5101 that the in-support flag is not stored (S5101: NO), the process proceeds to step S5102.

  In step S5102, it is determined whether a support winning flag is stored in the support winning flag storage area provided in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 or not. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when the winning combination is won in the electric-powered combination opening lottery, and is erased when the in-supporting flag is stored. If it is determined in step S5102 that the support winning flag is not stored (S5102: NO), the process proceeds to step S5103.

  In step S5103, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  When it is determined in step S5103 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5103: NO), the electronic control support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5103: YES), the process proceeds to step S5104.

  In step S5104, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the fluctuation display of the symbol in the drawing unit 38 or not. If it is determined in step S5104 that the end timing of the variable display is reached (S5104: YES), the process advances to step S5105 to set the out-of-page display, and then the electronic control support process ends. By setting the off-set display, the variation display of the symbols in the common drawing unit 38 is ended in the state where the off-display is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5104 that the end timing of the variable display is not reached (S5104: NO), the process proceeds to step S5106.

  In step S5106, it is determined whether the value of the bonus item holding number SN is greater than "0". When it is determined in step S5106 that the value of the number of holdings of the bonus item SN is “0” (S5106: NO), the processing for electronic bulletin board support is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5106 that the value of the number of bonus items held SN is larger than "0" (S5106: YES), the process proceeds to step S5107.

  In step S5107, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then, in step S5108, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is selected. If it is not the open / close execution mode at step S5107 (S5107: NO) and if it is the high frequency support mode at step S5108 (S5108: YES), the process proceeds to step S5109 to perform the electric combination open lottery. Specifically, the value stored in the electronic combination holding area 64c is shifted to the lottery execution area, and the value of the lottery execution area is collated with the table for the motorized opening of the high-frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the motor vehicle combination open lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 100%, the ratio of being distributed to the first class electric vehicle opening is 50%, and the second type electric vehicle opening is The distribution rate is set to 50%. Specifically, since the possible value of the motorized product release counter C4 is 0 to 249, when the value of the motorized product release counter C4 shifted to the lottery execution area is 0 to 124, If it is elected to open the first type electronic combination and the value of the motorized combination release counter C4 is 125 to 249, it will be elected to the second type electronic combination open. Then, after executing the motor-operated combination opening lottery, “25” (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5110.

  In step S5110, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric combination open lottery in step S5109 is a winning combination open (support selection). If it is determined in step S5110 that the result of the motorized character opening lottery is the support winning (S5110: YES), the process proceeds to step S5111, stores the support winning flag, and is provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Set “1” in the second round counter area RC2. In the present embodiment, as a result of the electric combination opening lottery in the high frequency support mode, when the first kind electric wire opening is elected, the first kind support winning flag is stored, and the second kind electric wire opening is performed. If the player wins, the second kind support win flag is stored. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5112. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5110 that the result of the electric combination open lottery is not the support winning (S5110: NO), the process proceeds to step S5112 without executing the process of step S5111.

  In step S5112, it is determined whether the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S5112 that the success or failure lottery mode is the low probability mode (S5112: YES), the process proceeds to step S5113. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5112 that the success or failure lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S5112: NO), the electronic control support process ends.

  In step S5113, it is determined whether the game number counter area is "0". In the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the game number counter is decremented by one each time one game cycle is over. If it is determined in step S5113 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S5113: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5113 that the number-of-games counter area is "0", the process proceeds to step S5114, and the high frequency support flag is erased. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5115.

  In step S5115, a low frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the support mode is the low frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Do. After that, the electronic mail support process ends.

  If it is determined in step S5107 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S5107: YES), or if it is determined in step S5118 that it is not the high frequency support mode (S5108: NO), the process proceeds to step S5116 to open the electric combination I do. Specifically, while shifting the value stored in the electronic combination holding area 64c, the value of the lottery execution area is compared with the table for the electric combination opening table for the low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning in the motorized combination opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set to 10%, and the ratio to be distributed to the third type electric combination opening is set to 100%. Specifically, since the possible value of the motorized product release counter C4 is 0 to 249, when the value of the motorized product release counter C4 shifted to the lottery execution area is 0 to 24, I will be elected to open three kinds of electronic combination. Further, after executing the motor-operated combination opening lottery, “14750” (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5117.

  In step S5117, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric combination opening lottery in step S5116 is a winning combination (support selection). If it is determined in step S5117 that support has not been won (S5117: NO), the electronic control support process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5117 that support is won (S5117: YES), the process proceeds to step S5118, stores the support winning flag, and sets "1" in the second round counter area RC2 End the process for supporting the board of directors.

  If it is determined in step S5102 that the support winning flag is stored (S5102: YES), the process proceeds to step S5119, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. In step S5119, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5119: NO), since the symbol in the drawing unit 38 is in a fluctuating display, the processing for the electric wave support as it is Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5119 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5119: YES), the flow proceeds to step S5120.

  In step S5120, a hit display is set corresponding to the type of open winning combination. Thereby, the variation display of the symbols in the common drawing unit 38 ends, and the symbols corresponding to the type of the hit display are stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5121.

  In step S5121, an open standby time corresponding to the winning type of electronic combination open is set. Specifically, when winning the first type electronic combination, “25” (that is, 0.05 sec) is set in the open standby time timer counter area Tw, and the second type electronic combination or the third type electronic combination is released. When the player is elected to open, "125" (that is, 0.25 sec) is set in the open standby time timer counter area Tw. The open standby time timer counter area Tw is decremented by one each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5122 to store the in-support flag and erase the support winning flag. After that, the processing for the electric wave support is finished.

  If it is determined in step S5101 that the in-support flag is stored (S5101: YES), the process proceeds to step S5123 to determine whether the open standby time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the open standby time timer counter area Tw is “0”. If it is determined in step S 5123 that the value of the open standby time timer counter area Tw is “0” (S 5123: YES), the process proceeds to step S 5124 to open and close the open / close door 208 b as a motorized product. Execute electronic gear opening and closing processing. The details of the electronic switch opening and closing process will be described later. After that, the processing for the electric wave support is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S 5123 that the value of the open standby time timer counter area Tw is not “0” (S 5123: NO), the electronic control support processing is ended without executing the electronic opening and closing processing. Do.

  FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the electric wave opening and closing process performed by the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment. The main difference from the processing (FIG. 77) executed by the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is that when the electronic combination is elected in the high frequency support mode, the electronic combination is elected. Regardless of the type of opening, the open time of the open / close door 208b is set to 0.8 seconds, and the open time of the open / close door 208b is 0.2 seconds if the electric jack release is won during the low frequency support mode. It is a point to set to. The details will be described below.

  In step S5201, it is determined whether the open / close door 208b as the motorized prize is open. Whether or not the open / close door 208b is open is determined based on whether or not the motorized accessory drive unit 34b is in a driven state. If it is determined that the open / close door 208b is open (S5201: YES), the process proceeds to step S5202.

  In step S5202, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open continuation time of the open / close door 208b. When it is determined in step S5202 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not “0” (S5202: NO), the present electronic combination processing is ended. That is, when the open continuation time of the open / close door 208b has not ended, the present opening / closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S5202 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5202: YES), the process proceeds to step S5203, and closing processing for controlling the open / close door 208b is performed. [2] Set "25" (ie, 0.05 sec) in the timer counter area T2. The value of the second timer counter area T2 set in step S5203 is the value of the opening / closing door 208b when the opening / closing door 208b as the electric combination is opened multiple times in one winning of the electric combination opening lottery. It means the length of time (interval) from the closing to the next opening, which is the last transition from the open state to the closed state of the open / close door 208b triggered by one win of the electric combination open lottery In this case, it means the length of time to wait before performing the next motorized part opening lottery after the open / close door 208b is closed. After executing step S5203, the process proceeds to step S5204.

  In step S5204, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S5205, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. In step S5205, when it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S5205: NO), the present electronic combination processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5205 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S5205: YES), the process proceeds to step S5206, and the in-support flag is erased. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S5201 that the open / close door 208b is not open (S5201: NO), the process proceeds to step S5207 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the open / close door 208b. In step S5207, when it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S5207: NO), the present electronic combination opening and closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5207 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S5207: YES), the process proceeds to step S5208 to execute an opening process of controlling the open / close door 208b. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S5209.

  In step S5209, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S5209: NO), the process proceeds to step S5210 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in progress. Determine

  If it is determined in step S5210 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S5210: YES), the process proceeds to step S5211, and "400" (ie, 0.8 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5210 that the high frequency support mode is not in progress (S5210: NO), and if it is determined in step S5209 that the open / close execution mode is in progress (S5209: YES), the process proceeds to step S5212. Proceed to set "100" (ie 0.2 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Thereafter, the electronic control unit closing process is ended.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206 by changing the open standby time of the open / close door 208b while achieving the same effects as the eighth embodiment described above. It is possible to change the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 208a per 1.2 seconds after that (FIG. 87, FIG. 89). Therefore, intonation can be added to the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, according to the present embodiment, even when the open time of the open / close door 208b is set to the same length (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), the length of the open standby time is changed. Since the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 208a can be changed, the degree of freedom in design of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even in the high frequency support mode, the open / close door 208b is set even when the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 is set to the same length (0.05 seconds in the present embodiment). By setting the open standby time to a plurality of types of lengths (0.05 seconds and 0.25 seconds in the present embodiment), the open / close door 208b is released from the closed state after the gaming ball passes through the through gate 206 The time until the start of transition to the state (variation time of the drawing unit 38 + waiting time for opening the open / close door 208b) can be set to a plurality of types of lengths. That is, according to the present embodiment, the time from when the result of the motor vehicle combination opening lottery is displayed by the drawing unit 38 to when the open / close door 208b starts transitioning from the closed state to the open state (the open / close door 208b is opened The time from when the game ball passes through the through gate 206 to when the open / close door 208b starts transitioning from the closed state to the open state by changing the standby time) (variation time of the drawing unit 38 + open / close door 208b Can be changed, and the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 208a can be changed.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, the main control device 60 opens and closes the game ball GB1 after the game ball GB1 passes through the through gate 206 during the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. A time shorter than the time to reach the ball device 208 is set. Therefore, the general drawing unit 38 passes the through gate 206, and before the game ball GB1 that triggers the electric combination opening lottery, reaches the opening / closing device 208, the result of the electric combination opening lottery is It becomes possible to display. As a result, main controller 60 is a game ball GB1 that has passed through gate 206 and has become a trigger for the electric combination opening lottery after the result of the electric combination opening lottery is displayed by the drawing unit 38. It is possible to execute control to start the transition from the closed state of the open / close door 208b to the open state (control in the case of winning the first type electric work opening) before the timing when the open / close ball entering device 208 is reached Become. Therefore, the game ball GB1 (the game ball GB1 which passed through the through gate 206 and became the trigger for the electric combination opening lottery) which caused the open / close door 208b to transition to the open state is caused to enter the second starting opening 208a It becomes possible to execute control.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when winning the first type electric combination opening (FIG. 86, FIG. 87), main controller 60 sets the open standby time of open / close door 208 b to 0.05 seconds. At the timing when the game ball GB1 that has passed through the through gate 206 reaches the open / close ball entry device 208, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state, and the game ball GB1 enters the second starting opening 208a. On the other hand, when winning the second type electric power opening (FIG. 88, FIG. 89), the main control device 60 sets the open standby time of the open / close door 208b to 0.25 seconds, so it passes through the through gate 206 The open / close door 208b has not yet transitioned to the open state at the timing when the game ball GB1 reaches the open / close ball entry device 208, and the game ball GB1 does not enter the second start opening 208a. That is, according to the present embodiment, since the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 208a can be changed by changing the open standby time, it is possible to add intonation in the game It is possible to improve interest.

  In the present embodiment, the open standby time of the open / close door 208b is set based on the type of winning of the electric combination open lottery in the high-frequency support mode, but the open / close door is based on other elements. It is good also as composition which sets up open waiting time of 208b. For example, in a configuration capable of executing a plurality of types of support modes, the open standby time of the open / close door 208b may be set to a different length for each type of support mode. In addition, the open standby time of the open / close door 208b may be set to a different length for each type of lottery mode (low probability mode and high probability mode) of the jackpot lottery. In addition, a random number counter may be provided to set the open standby time, and the open standby time of the open / close door 208b may be set based on the acquired value of the random number counter. In addition, when the jackpot lottery is won, in the predetermined number of game times after the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the win is ended, the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b based on the type of winning the jackpot lottery May be set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 208a is changed by changing the open standby time of the open / close door 208b, but the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 is changed The number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 208a may be changed by changing the setting. The number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 208a may be changed by changing both the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 and the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b. In addition to the open standby time of the open / close door 208b and the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38, the open time of the open / close door 208b is changed to change the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 208a. It may be

  In addition, the second start opening unit 300, 300B to 300 of the ninth embodiment described above is configured to change the number of gaming balls entering the second start opening 208a by changing the open standby time of the open / close door 208b. The present invention may be applied to 300F (FIGS. 78, 84, and 85).

K. Eleventh embodiment:
An eleventh embodiment will now be described. The present embodiment is provided with a second starting port unit 200 (FIG. 70) identical to the tenth embodiment. The difference from the tenth embodiment is that the aspect of controlling the open / close door 208b is different. Below, the aspect of control of the opening / closing door 208b is mainly demonstrated. The description of the same configuration and processing as those of the tenth embodiment will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, three types of high frequency support modes are set, and one type of winning type is set (type 1 electronic part release) when the winning combination is won in the electric combination opening lottery during the high frequency support mode. It is done. In addition, one type of winning (in the second type of electric combination opening) is set when the electric combination opening is selected in the low frequency support mode. The details of the control of the open / close door 208b for each variation type of the drawing unit 38 and the type of winning of the electric combination opening lottery are as follows.

-Electric combination opening lottery during the first high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the common unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the percentage that can be distributed to the first kind of electric wave combination opening: 100%
・ When winning the first kind electric wire connector Open standby time of the open / close door 208b: 0.95 seconds Number of open the open / close door 208b: 1 time Open time of the open / close door 208b: 0.8 second

-Electric combination opening lottery during the second high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the percentage that can be distributed to the first kind of electric wave combination opening: 100%
・ When winning the first type electric power opening opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.25 seconds Number of opening times of the opening and closing door 208b: 1 time opening time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

-Electric combination opening lottery during the 3rd high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the common drawing unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 100%
As a result of winning, the percentage that can be distributed to the first kind of electric wave combination opening: 100%
・ When winning the first type electric power opening opening standby time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.05 seconds Number of opening times of the opening and closing door 208b: 1 time opening time of the opening and closing door 208b: 0.8 seconds

-Electric combination opening lottery in the low frequency support mode Variation time of the drawing unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning, the ratio that can be distributed to the second kind of electric wave company opening: 100%
-When winning the second kind of electric utility combination Open standby time of the open / close door 208b: 0.35 seconds Number of opening the open / close door 208b: 1 time Open time of the open / close door 208b: 0.2 seconds

  In the control mode of the open / close door 208b described above, the difference between the three high-frequency support modes is the time from when the variable display of the drawing unit 38 stops to when the open / close door 208b starts transitioning to the open state. The length of the open standby time, and as described later, in the situation where the gaming ball is continuously fired by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the game ball entering the second starting opening 208a The number is different. In addition, the time of 0.8 seconds set as the open time of the open / close door 208b is longer than the 0.6 seconds which is the firing interval of the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game It is a time shorter than 1.2 seconds which is a firing interval between the ball and the third game ball.

  FIG. 93 is a timing chart showing timings when the game balls reach the through gate 206 and the opening / closing device 208 and showing a control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the first high frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 93, the gaming ball is able to reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the gaming board 30 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at a constant firing intensity of 0.6. It is fired continuously at an interval of seconds. Therefore, the gaming balls enter the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls having entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. About the behavior at the time of a game ball being distributed, it is the same as that of FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of gaming balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 93, in the first high frequency support mode of this embodiment, when the first gaming ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the common drawing unit 38 starts . When 0.05 seconds, which is a fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38, and 0.95 seconds, which is an open standby time, elapse, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

  The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 pass through the open / close door 208b in the closed state during 0.10 seconds until the open / close door 208b changes to the open state. Then, the third game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, and the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state at the timing when the open / close ball device 208 is reached, so the ball enters the second start opening 208a. Do. At the timing when the game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, since the open / close door 208b is in the open state, the variable display of the drawing unit 38 is not started but is held.

  Then, when 0.8 seconds elapses and the open / close door 208b shifts to the closed state, the variable display of the general drawing unit 38 that has been suspended starts. As can be understood from FIG. 93, the fourth gaming ball GB4 reaches the open / close entering device 208 0.2 seconds after the start of the variable display of the drawing unit 38. This relationship is the same as the relationship in which the first gaming ball GB1 reaches the open / close ball entering device 208 0.2 seconds after the start of the variable display of the drawing unit 38. Accordingly, among the game balls GB1 to GB3, the relationship that only the game ball GB3 enters the second starting opening 208a continues even after the game ball GB4. The first high frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above can be summarized as follows. In the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls to be paid out as the winning balls is set to two when the gaming balls enter the second starting opening 208a.

First high frequency support mode:
Number of entering game balls / Number of launching game balls: 1/3 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of entering game balls × number of prize balls: 1 × 2 = 2 increase / decrease of game balls: 3 The number of game balls is decreased by one in 1.8 seconds when each game ball is fired. Ball rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls launched = 2/3/3 = 0.67

  FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing timings when the game balls reach the through gate 206 and the opening / closing device 208 and showing a control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the second high frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 94, the gaming ball is able to reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the gaming board 30 by the gaming ball firing mechanism 81 at a constant firing strength of 0.6. It is fired continuously at an interval of seconds. Therefore, the gaming balls enter the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls having entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. About the behavior at the time of a game ball being distributed, it is the same as that of FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of gaming balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 94, in the second high frequency support mode of this embodiment, when the first gaming ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the common drawing unit 38 starts . When 0.05 seconds, which is a fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38, and 0.25 seconds, which is an open standby time, elapse, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

  The first gaming ball GB1 passes through the open / close door 208b in the closed state during 0.30 seconds until the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state. The second game ball GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a because the open / close door 208b is transitioned to the open state at the timing when the open / close ball entry device 208 is reached. The behavior of the third and subsequent gaming balls is a repetition of the behavior of the first gaming ball GB1 and the second gaming ball GB2, so the description will be omitted. The second high frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above can be summarized as follows.

Second high frequency support mode:
Number of entering game balls / Number of launching game balls: 1/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of entering game balls × number of prize balls: 1 × 2 = 2 game balls increase / decrease: increase / decrease Ball release rate: The number of game balls to be paid out / the number of game balls launched = 2 pieces / 2 pieces = 1.00

  FIG. 95 is a timing chart showing timings when the game balls reach the through gate 206 and the opening / closing device 208 and showing a control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the third high frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 95, the gaming ball is able to reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the gaming board 30 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at a constant firing intensity of 0.6. It is fired continuously at an interval of seconds. Therefore, the gaming balls enter the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls having entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. About the behavior at the time of a game ball being distributed, it is the same as that of FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of gaming balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 95, in the third high frequency support mode of this embodiment, when the first gaming ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the common drawing unit 38 starts . When 0.05 seconds, which is a fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38, and 0.05 seconds, which is an open standby time, elapse, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds.

  The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 enter the second starting opening 208a because the open / close door 208b is transitioned to the open state at the timing when the open / close ball device 208 is reached. The behavior of the third and subsequent gaming balls is a repetition of the behavior of the first gaming ball GB1 and the second gaming ball GB2, so the description will be omitted. The third high frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above can be summarized as follows.

Third high frequency support mode:
Number of entering game balls / number of launching game balls: 2/2 The number of game balls to be paid out = the number of entering game balls × number of prize balls: 2 × 2 = 4 pieces Increase / decrease of game balls: 2 Two game balls increase in 1.2 seconds when individual game balls are fired. Ball ratio: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls launched = 4/2 = 2.00

  FIG. 96 is a timing chart showing timings when the game balls reach the through gate 206 and the opening / closing device 208 and showing a control mode of the opening / closing door 208b in the low frequency support mode. In the example shown in FIG. 96, the gaming ball is able to reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the gaming board 30 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at a constant firing intensity of 0.6. It is fired continuously at an interval of seconds. Therefore, the gaming balls enter the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls having entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. About the behavior at the time of a game ball being distributed, it is the same as that of FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of gaming balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 96, in the low frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first gaming ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the drawing unit 38 starts. When 0.05 seconds, which is a fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38, and 0.35 seconds, which is an open standby time, elapse, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state with a probability of 10%, and the open state is changed to 0.2. Hold for a second. Below, the case where it is elected with a probability of 10% and a type 2 electric officer opening is demonstrated.

  The first game ball GB1 passes through the open / close door 208b in the closed state during 0.40 seconds until the open / close door 208b changes to the open state. Since the open / close door 208b has already shifted to the closed state at the timing when the second game ball GB2 reaches the open / close ball entering device 208, the open / close door in the closed state without entering the second starting opening 208a Go through 208b. The behavior of the third and subsequent gaming balls is a repetition of the behavior of the first gaming ball GB1 and the second gaming ball GB2, so the description will be omitted. The low frequency support mode of the present embodiment described above can be summarized as follows.

Low frequency support mode:
Number of entering game balls / number of launching game balls: 0/2 number of game balls to be paid out = number of entering game balls × number of prize balls: 0 × 2 = 0 = 0 increase / decrease of game balls: 2 The number of game balls is reduced by two in 1.2 seconds when each game ball is fired. Ball rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls launched: 0 pieces / 2 pieces = 0

  FIG. 97 is an explanatory drawing showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment. In FIG. 97, for reference, the types of high-frequency support mode to be executed after the end of the open / close execution mode and the contents thereof are also described. As described above, in this embodiment, as the types of the high frequency support mode executed after the end of the open / close execution mode, the first high frequency support mode, the second high frequency support mode, and the third high frequency support mode Is set.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (a), if the player wins the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 15, distribution is The result is 4R normal jackpot A, and transition to the open / close execution mode corresponding to 4R normal jackpot, and transition to the first high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 16 to 19, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot is performed, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends 3 Transition to high frequency support mode. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 29, the distribution result is 8R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the second after the opening / closing execution mode ends Transition to high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 97 (b), if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the second starting opening 208a is won and the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 5, distribution is performed. The result is 4R normal jackpot A, and transition to the open / close execution mode corresponding to 4R normal jackpot, and transition to the first high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 6 to 11, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot is performed, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends 3 Transition to high frequency support mode. In addition, when the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 12 to 20, the distribution result is 8R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the second after the opening / closing execution mode ends Transition to high frequency support mode. If the value of the obtained jackpot type counter C2 is 21 to 29, the distribution result is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and the second after the opening / closing execution mode ends Transition to high frequency support mode.

  The high-frequency support mode, which is shifted after the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, ends when a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) of game rounds are executed without winning the jackpot lottery. , Transition to low frequency support mode. Further, the high-frequency support mode, which is shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the definite variation jackpot, continues without ending until the jackpot lottery is won next time. In addition, the high probability mode, which is shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, continues without ending until the jackpot lottery is won next time.

  Moreover, 1st synthetic | combination ball-opening rate T1 and 2nd comprehensive ball-injecting ratio T2 in this embodiment become as follows.

T1 = M1 × PA1 + M2 × PA2 + M3 × PA3
= 0.67 x (16/30) + 1.00 x (10/30) + 2.00 x (4/30) = 0.96
T2 = M1 × PB1 + M2 × PB2 + M3 × PB3
= 0.67 x (6/30) + 1.00 x (18/30) + 2.00 x (6/30) = 0.83

  As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total ball exit ratio T1 and the value of the second total ball exit ratio T2 are less than one. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the game balls held by the player in total do not increase but decrease.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the first high frequency support mode in which the ball out rate is less than 1 and the second high frequency support in which the ball out rate is 1 by changing the open standby time Since the mode and the third high frequency support mode in which the bowling rate exceeds 1 can be executed, it is possible to add intonation to the game and to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the present embodiment, even when the time for which the open / close door 208b is maintained in the open state is set to the same length (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment), the length of the open standby time is set. If changed, the above-described three high-frequency support modes can be executed, so that the design freedom of the gaming machine can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the first high frequency support having a ball extraction rate of less than 1 by the second starting opening unit 200 (FIG. 70) having a simple configuration using only one alternate distribution mechanism 204. A mode, a second high frequency support mode in which the bowling rate is 1 and a third high frequency support mode in which the bowling rate exceeds 1 can be executed. That is, in order to execute three high frequency support modes as compared with a configuration in which three high frequency support modes are performed by the second start port unit 300 (FIG. 78) provided with two alternate distribution mechanisms 304 and 305 Since the mechanism of the above can be realized in a space-saving manner, it is possible to effectively utilize the game area, such as arranging other features in the vacant game area.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is 4R normal jackpot A, the high probability mode is not started but the first high frequency support mode is started. When the first high frequency support mode is started, the entry of the game ball into the entry part is promoted, so the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. However, since the bowling rate in the first high frequency support mode is less than 1, the game balls held by the player are decreasing. The first high-frequency support mode ends when the jackpot lottery execution count reaches the specified number (100 times) without the jackpot lottery result becoming the jackpot. Therefore, the player plays a game while expecting that he wants to be a big hit in the big hit lottery before the number of times of execution of the big hit lottery reaches the specified number and the first high frequency support mode ends. Also, since the player wants to minimize the decrease in the number of gaming balls on hand, he / she plays a game while expecting to be a big hit in an early big hit lottery as much as possible.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is the 8R probability variation jackpot, the high probability mode is started and the second high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability of the jackpot lottery result becoming a jackpot is improved. In addition, when the second high frequency support mode is started, the entry of the gaming ball into the entry portion is promoted, so the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. In addition, since the bowling rate in the second high frequency support mode is 1, the player's game balls do not increase or decrease. Then, the high probability mode continues at least until the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot (various jackpots). The second high frequency support mode continues until the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot (various jackpots). Therefore, since the high probability mode and the second high frequency support mode continue until the jackpot becomes a jackpot in the jackpot lottery, the player expects the result of the jackpot lottery to be an 8R probability variation jackpot and the high probability mode will continue. Play while playing. In addition, since the player does not increase or decrease the number of game balls held, the player can concentrate on the type of the result when the result of the jackpot lottery becomes the jackpot.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is 4R normal jackpot, the high probability mode is not started but the third high frequency support mode is started. When the third high frequency support mode is started, the entry of the gaming ball into the entry part is promoted, so the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Furthermore, since the ball release rate in the third high frequency support mode exceeds 1, the gaming balls held by the player increase. The third high-frequency support mode ends when the jackpot lottery execution count reaches the specified number (100 times) without the jackpot lottery result becoming the jackpot. Therefore, before the third high frequency support mode is finished, the player continues the third high frequency support mode until the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed reaches the specified number and increases the number of game balls held. Play the game while expecting you want the result of the jackpot lottery to be the jackpot. And, even if the result of the jackpot lottery does not become the jackpot until the number of times the jackpot lottery has been executed reaches the specified number (100 times), the third high frequency support mode in which the game ball increases You can get the satisfaction that it lasted for the longest period.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to create new playability of giving a player various senses of expectation by effectively using the three control modes, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be Further, according to the present embodiment, even in the same 4R normal jackpot, it is possible to add tonation to the game by providing a difference in the high-frequency support mode which is shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is reach generation, a longer fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 than when the result of the jackpot lottery is not set. Ru. During the period in which the third high frequency support mode is being executed, the larger the number of times that the result of the jackpot lottery reaches reach is large, that is, as the number of times that the long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 is larger, The time required for the number of times of execution of the jackpot lottery (game times) to reach the specified number of times 100 becomes long. As a result, since the period during which the third high frequency support continues is also extended, the period during which the player's game balls increase is also extended. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, in the period in which the third high frequency support mode is being executed, creating a new game characteristic that the game ball increases as the number of times the result of the jackpot lottery becomes reach generation increases. Can improve the interest of the game.

  As another embodiment, the configuration may be such that a longer time is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 as the number of jackpot lottery performed after the third high frequency support mode is started is increased. According to this configuration, as the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed approaches the prescribed number of times 100, the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 set becomes longer, so the third high frequency support mode in which the game balls increase is continued Period of time is longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of frustration of the player that the jackpot lottery is not won even though the number of times of execution of the jackpot lottery is approaching 100 times.

  Further, as another embodiment, a high frequency support mode may be executed in which the open standby time is set to a time longer than 0.95 seconds in the first high frequency support mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the high-frequency support mode with a smaller ball ratio than the first high-frequency support mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes are executed by setting the open standby time to a plurality of lengths, but as another embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation times of the common drawing unit 38 are provided. It may be configured to execute a plurality of types of frequent support modes by setting to a length of.

L. Twelfth embodiment:
A twelfth embodiment will now be described. The present embodiment is provided with a second starting opening unit 200 (FIG. 70) identical to the eleventh embodiment. The difference from the eleventh embodiment is that the high probability mode ends when a predetermined number (100 in this embodiment) of game rounds is executed without winning a big hit lottery (so-called special time) The point is that the machine (ST machine) and the content of the distribution table are different. The differences from the eleventh embodiment are mainly described below. The description of the same configuration and processing as those of the eleventh embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 98 is an explanatory drawing showing the contents of the distribution table in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment. In FIG. 98, for reference, the types of high-frequency support mode to be executed after the end of the open / close execution mode and the contents thereof are also described.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball to the first starting opening 33 is won and the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 15, distribution is The result is 4R normal jackpot A, and transition to the open / close execution mode corresponding to 4R normal jackpot, and transition to the first high frequency support mode after the end of the open / close execution mode. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 16 to 19, the distribution result is 4R normal jackpot B, and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 4R normal jackpot is performed, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends 3 Transition to high frequency support mode. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 20 to 29, the distribution result is 8R probability variation jackpot, and shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the second after the opening / closing execution mode ends Transition to high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (b), if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of gaming balls into the second starting opening 208a is won and the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 0 to 17, distribution is The result is a 10R probability variation jackpot A, and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot, and the transition to the first high frequency support mode after the termination of the opening / closing execution mode. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 18 to 26, the distribution result is 10R probability variation jackpot B, and shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 10R probability variation jackpot, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends 2 Transition to high frequency support mode. When the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is 27 to 29, the distribution result is 10R probability variation jackpot C, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 10R probability variation jackpot, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends 3 Transition to high frequency support mode.

  The high-frequency support mode, which is shifted after the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot, ends when a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) of game rounds are executed without winning the jackpot lottery. , Transition to low frequency support mode. Further, in the present embodiment, even in the high-frequency support mode, which shifts after completion of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, the game round of a predetermined number of times (100 in this embodiment) without winning the jackpot lottery Exit when in progress and transition to infrequent support mode. In addition, the high probability mode which is shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the definite variation big hit is also ended when a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) of game rounds are executed without winning the big hit lottery.

  Moreover, 1st synthetic | combination ball-opening rate T1 and 2nd comprehensive ball-injecting ratio T2 in this embodiment become as follows.

T1 = M1 × PA1 + M2 × PA2 + M3 × PA3
= 0.67 x (16/30) + 1.00 x (10/30) + 2.00 x (4/30) = 0.96
T2 = M1 × PB1 + M2 × PB2 + M3 × PB3
= 0.67 x (18/30) + 1.00 x (9/30) + 2.00 x (3/30) = 0.90

  As described above, in the present embodiment, both the value of the first total ball exit ratio T1 and the value of the second total ball exit ratio T2 are less than one. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it means that the game balls held by the player in total do not increase but decrease.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is 10R probability variation jackpot A, the high probability mode is started and the first high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability of the jackpot lottery result becoming a jackpot is improved. In addition, when the first high frequency support mode is started, the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 208a is promoted, so the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. However, since the bowling rate in the first high frequency support mode is less than 1, the game balls held by the player are decreasing. The high probability mode and the first high frequency support mode end when the jackpot lottery execution count reaches the specified number (100 times) without the jackpot lottery result becoming the jackpot. Therefore, the player plays the game while hoping that he wants the jackpot lottery to be as fast as possible before the high probability mode is finished, until the number of times the jackpot lottery has been executed reaches the specified number of times. Furthermore, the player plays the game while expecting to be a big hit in an earlier big hit lottery from the expectation that the player wants to minimize the decrease of the game balls held.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is 10R probability variation jackpot B, the high probability mode is started and the second high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability of the jackpot lottery result becoming a jackpot is improved. In addition, when the second high frequency support mode is started, the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 208a is promoted, so the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. In addition, since the bowling rate in the second high frequency support mode is 1, the player's game balls do not increase or decrease. Then, the high probability mode and the second high frequency support mode are ended when the jackpot lottery execution count reaches the specified number (100 times) without the jackpot lottery result becoming the jackpot. Therefore, the player plays the game while hoping that he wants the jackpot lottery to be as fast as possible before the high probability mode is finished, until the number of times the jackpot lottery has been executed reaches the specified number of times.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is 10R probability variation jackpot C, the high probability mode is started and the third high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability mode is started, the probability of the jackpot lottery result becoming a jackpot is improved. In addition, when the third high frequency support mode is started, the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 208a is promoted, so the execution of the jackpot lottery is promoted. Furthermore, since the ball release rate in the third high frequency support mode exceeds 1, the gaming balls held by the player increase. The high probability mode and the third high frequency support mode end when the jackpot lottery execution count reaches the specified number (100 times) without the jackpot lottery result becoming the jackpot. Therefore, the player continues the third high-frequency support mode until the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed reaches the prescribed number and increases the number of game balls held, but the jackpot lottery execution frequency reaches the prescribed number and is high. By the time the probability mode and the third high frequency support mode are finished, the game is played while expecting that the result of the jackpot lottery should be a jackpot. And, even if the result of the jackpot lottery does not become the jackpot until the number of times the jackpot lottery has been executed reaches the specified number (100 times), the third high frequency support mode in which the game ball increases You can get the satisfaction that it lasted for the longest period.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to create new playability of giving the player various senses of expectation in a period in which the high probability mode limited to the specified number of times is being executed. It is possible to improve interest. Further, according to the present embodiment, even in the same 10R probability variation jackpot, it is possible to add tonation to the game by providing a difference in the high-frequency support mode which is shifted after the end of the open / close execution mode.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery is reach generation, a longer fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 than when the result of the jackpot lottery is not set. Ru. During the period in which the third high frequency support mode is being executed, the larger the number of times that the result of the jackpot lottery reaches reach is large, that is, as the number of times that the long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 is larger, The time required for the number of times of execution of the jackpot lottery (game times) to reach the specified number of times 100 becomes long. As a result, since the period during which the third high frequency support continues is also extended, the period during which the player's game balls increase is also extended. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, in the period in which the third high frequency support mode is being executed, creating a new game characteristic that the game ball increases as the number of times the result of the jackpot lottery becomes reach generation increases. Can improve the interest of the game.

  As another embodiment, the configuration may be such that a longer time is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 as the number of jackpot lottery performed after the third high frequency support mode is started is increased. According to this configuration, as the number of times the jackpot lottery is executed approaches the prescribed number of times 100, the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 set becomes longer, so the third high frequency support mode in which the game balls increase is continued Period of time is longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of frustration of the player that the jackpot lottery is not won even though the number of times of execution of the jackpot lottery is approaching 100 times.

  Further, as another embodiment, a high frequency support mode may be executed in which the open standby time is set to a time longer than 0.95 seconds in the first high frequency support mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the high-frequency support mode with a smaller ball ratio than the first high-frequency support mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes are executed by setting the open standby time to a plurality of lengths, but as another embodiment, a plurality of fluctuation times of the common drawing unit 38 are provided. It may be configured to execute a plurality of types of frequent support modes by setting to a length of.

M. Thirteenth embodiment:
A thirteenth embodiment will now be described. The present embodiment is provided with a second starting opening unit 200 (FIG. 70) identical to the twelfth embodiment. The difference with the twelfth embodiment is that the aspect of controlling the open / close door 208b is different. Below, the aspect of control of the opening / closing door 208b is mainly demonstrated. The description of the same configuration and processing as those of the twelfth embodiment will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, one type of high frequency support mode is set, and the type of winning in the case of winning the electric combination opening lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to one type (type 1 combination opening). It is done. Then, three types (0.95 seconds, 0.25 seconds, and 0.05 seconds) of fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 set in the high frequency support mode are prepared. In addition, one type of winning (in the second type of electric combination opening) is set when the electric combination opening is selected in the low frequency support mode. The details of the control of the open / close door 208b for each variation type of the drawing unit 38 and the type of winning of the electric combination opening lottery are as follows.

・ Motorized character object opening lottery in high frequency support mode Fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38: 0.95 seconds, 0.25 seconds, 0.05 seconds Any chance of winning: 100%
As a result of winning, the percentage that can be distributed to the first kind of electric wave combination opening: 100%
・ When winning the first kind electric wire connector Open standby time of the open / close door 208b: 0.95 seconds Number of open the open / close door 208b: 1 time Open time of the open / close door 208b: 0.8 second

-Electric combination opening lottery in the low frequency support mode Variation time of the drawing unit 38: 0.05 seconds Winning probability: 10%
As a result of winning, the ratio that can be distributed to the second kind of electric wave company opening: 100%
-When winning the second kind of electric utility combination Open standby time of the open / close door 208b: 0.35 seconds Number of opening the open / close door 208b: 1 time Open time of the open / close door 208b: 0.2 seconds

  In the present embodiment, the game ball is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds by the game ball launching mechanism 81 by the difference in the length of the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 set in the high frequency support mode. The number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening 208a in different situations is different. The details will be described below. In addition, the time of 0.8 seconds set as the open time of the open / close door 208b is longer than the 0.6 seconds which is the firing interval of the first game ball and the second game ball, and the first game It is a time shorter than 1.2 seconds which is a firing interval between the ball and the third game ball.

  FIG. 99 shows the timing when the game ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing device 208, and the opening / closing door in the case where the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 is set to 0.95 seconds in the high frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows a control mode of 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 99, the gaming ball is able to reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the gaming board 30 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at 0.6 at a certain firing intensity. It is fired continuously at an interval of seconds. Therefore, the gaming balls enter the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls having entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. About the behavior at the time of a game ball being distributed, it is the same as that of FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of gaming balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 99, in the high frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first gaming ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the common drawing unit 38 starts. When 0.95 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 and 0.05 seconds which is the open standby time elapse, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds .

  The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 pass through the open / close door 208b in the closed state during 0.10 seconds until the open / close door 208b changes to the open state. Then, the third game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, and the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state at the timing when the open / close ball device 208 is reached, so the ball enters the second start opening 208a. Do. At the timing when the game ball GB3 passes through the through gate 206, since the open / close door 208b is in the open state, the variable display of the drawing unit 38 is not started but is held.

  Then, when 0.8 seconds elapses and the open / close door 208b shifts to the closed state, the variable display of the general drawing unit 38 that has been suspended starts. As can be understood from FIG. 99, the fourth game ball GB4 reaches the opening and closing entering device 208 0.2 seconds after the start of the variable display of the drawing unit 38. This relationship is the same as the relationship in which the first gaming ball GB1 reaches the open / close ball entering device 208 0.2 seconds after the start of the variable display of the drawing unit 38. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 continues and is set to 0.95 seconds, only the game ball GB3 of the game balls GB1 to GB3 enters the second starting opening 208a. The relationship will continue even after the game ball GB4.

  The aspect when the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 is set to 0.95 seconds in the high frequency support mode described above is summarized as follows. In the present embodiment, the number of gaming balls to be paid out as the winning balls is set to two when the gaming balls enter the second starting opening 208a.

High frequency support mode (variation time of the drawing unit 38 = 0.95 seconds):
Number of entering game balls / Number of launching game balls: 1/3 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of entering game balls × number of prize balls: 1 × 2 = 2 increase / decrease of game balls: 3 The number of game balls is decreased by one in 1.8 seconds when each game ball is fired. Ball rate: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls launched = 2/3/3 = 0.67

  FIG. 100 shows the timing when the gaming ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing device 208, and the opening / closing door in the case where the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 is set to 0.25 seconds in the high frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows a control mode of 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 100, the gaming ball is able to reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the gaming board 30 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at a constant firing intensity of 0.6. It is fired continuously at an interval of seconds. Therefore, the gaming balls enter the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls having entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. About the behavior at the time of a game ball being distributed, it is the same as that of FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of gaming balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 100, in the high frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first gaming ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the common drawing unit 38 starts. When 0.25 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 and 0.05 seconds which is the open standby time elapse, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds .

  The first gaming ball GB1 passes through the open / close door 208b in the closed state during 0.30 seconds until the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state. The second game ball GB2 enters the second starting opening 208a because the open / close door 208b is transitioned to the open state at the timing when the open / close ball entry device 208 is reached. For the behavior of the third and subsequent gaming balls, when the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 continues and is set to 0.25 seconds, the first gaming ball GB1 and the second gaming ball GB2 The description is omitted because the operation is repeated.

  The aspect when the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 is set to 0.25 seconds in the high frequency support mode described above is summarized as follows.

・ High frequency support mode (variation time of the drawing unit 38 = 0.25 seconds):
Number of entering game balls / Number of launching game balls: 1/2 Number of game balls to be paid out = number of entering game balls × number of prize balls: 1 × 2 = 2 game balls increase / decrease: increase / decrease Ball release rate: The number of game balls to be paid out / the number of game balls launched = 2 pieces / 2 pieces = 1.00

  FIG. 101 shows the timing when the gaming ball reaches the through gate 206 and the opening / closing device 208, and the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds in the third high frequency support mode. It is a timing chart which shows a control mode of opening and closing door 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 101, the gaming ball is able to reach the second starting opening unit 200 provided on the right side of the gaming board 30 by the gaming ball launching mechanism 81 at 0.6 at a certain firing intensity. It is fired continuously at an interval of seconds. Therefore, the gaming balls enter the opening 202 of the second starting opening unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. The game balls having entered the opening 202 are alternately distributed to the route R1 or the route R2. About the behavior at the time of a game ball being distributed, it is the same as that of FIG. However, the opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing door 208b and the number of gaming balls entering the second start opening 208a are different.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the high frequency support mode of the present embodiment, when the first gaming ball GB1 is distributed to the route R1 and passes through the through gate 206, the variable display of the common drawing unit 38 starts. When 0.05 seconds set as the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 and 0.05 seconds which is the open standby time elapse, the open / close door 208b transitions to the open state and maintains the open state for 0.8 seconds .

  The first game ball GB1 and the second game ball GB2 enter the second starting opening 208a because the open / close door 208b is transitioned to the open state at the timing when the open / close ball device 208 is reached. As to the behavior of the third and subsequent gaming balls, when the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 continues and is set to 0.05 seconds, the first gaming ball GB1 and the second gaming ball GB2 The description is omitted because the operation is repeated.

  The aspect when the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 is set to 0.05 seconds in the high frequency support mode described above is summarized as follows.

・ High frequency support mode (variation time of the drawing unit 38 = 0.05 seconds):
Number of entering game balls / number of launching game balls: 2/2 The number of game balls to be paid out = the number of entering game balls × number of prize balls: 2 × 2 = 4 pieces Increase / decrease of game balls: 2 Two game balls increase in 1.2 seconds when individual game balls are fired. Ball ratio: Number of game balls to be paid out / number of game balls launched = 4/2 = 2.00

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the bowling rate in the high-frequency support mode by changing the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 in the high-frequency support mode. That is, by changing the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 in the high frequency support mode, it is possible to increase, maintain, or decrease the game balls held by the player.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is normally won as a result of the jackpot lottery, the high-frequency support mode is entered after the open / close execution mode ends. Then, when the jackpot lottery after the transition of the high frequency support mode is won or the jackpot lottery execution frequency reaches 100 times without winning the jackpot lottery after the transition of the high frequency support mode High frequency support mode ends.

  In this embodiment, after winning the jackpot and shifting to the high frequency support mode, the period until the high frequency support mode ends is referred to by referring to the fluctuation time table for the high frequency support mode. , And the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 and the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. However, even if it is a period to refer to the fluctuation time table for the high frequency support mode, when setting the fluctuation time of the game times that will win the jackpot lottery, or set the fluctuation time of the game times that will be reach In this case, the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 is set by referring to the jackpot fluctuation time table and the reach generation fluctuation time table.

  FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation time table for the high frequency support mode. FIG. 102 (A) shows the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode, and FIG. 102 (B) shows the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode.

  In this embodiment, when transitioning to the high frequency support mode, the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 and the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 are set by referring to the fluctuation time table set A for the high frequency support mode. Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is set as a result of the big hit lottery, and when the small hit is won during the high frequency support mode, the table to be referenced is the fluctuation time table set A for the high frequency support mode, Switch between the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode. The small hit is a lottery result in which the mode is switched to the open / close execution mode but the support mode and the lottery mode are not changed.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the fluctuation time table set A for the high frequency support mode is configured by the special drawing unit table A and the common drawing unit table A.

  In the special drawing unit table A, the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 are stored correspondingly. In the present embodiment, 1.0 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 during the period in which the number of times of game play after transition to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. During the period in which the number of game times after transition to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, 1.6 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37. During a period in which the number of game times after transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, 2.2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37.

  In the common drawing unit table A, the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the common drawing unit 38 are stored correspondingly. In FIG. 102 (A), for reference, the game ball enters the second starting opening 208a when the fluctuation time is set and the fluctuation time is set. Intervals are shown.

  In the present embodiment, 0.05 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 during the period in which the number of game times after transition to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting opening 208a at a rate of one in 0.6 seconds, and the game balls held by the player increase. During the period in which the number of game times after transition to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, 0.25 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the gaming balls enter the second starting opening 208a at a rate of one in 1.2 seconds, and the gaming balls held by the player neither increase nor decrease. During a period in which the number of game times after transition to the high-frequency support mode is 71 to 100, 0.95 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the gaming balls enter the second starting opening 208a at a rate of one in 1.8 seconds, and the gaming balls held by the player decrease.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (B), the fluctuation time table set B for the high frequency support mode is configured by the special drawing unit table B and the common drawing unit table B.

  In the special drawing unit table B, the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 are stored correspondingly. In the present embodiment, 2.2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 during the period in which the number of times of game play after transition to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. During the period in which the number of game times after transition to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, 1.6 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37. During the period in which the number of game times after transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100 times, 1.0 second is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37.

  In the common drawing unit table B, the number of game times after the transition to the high frequency support mode and the fluctuation time of the common drawing unit 38 are stored correspondingly. In FIG. 102 (B), for reference, the game ball enters the second starting opening 208a when the fluctuation time is set and the fluctuation time is set. Intervals are shown.

  In the present embodiment, 0.95 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 during the period in which the number of game times after transition to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 times. Therefore, during this period, the gaming balls enter the second starting opening 208a at a rate of one in 1.8 seconds, and the gaming balls held by the player decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after transition to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, 0.25 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the gaming balls enter the second starting opening 208a at a rate of one in 1.2 seconds, and the gaming balls held by the player neither increase nor decrease. During a period in which the number of game times after transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, 0.05 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38. Therefore, during this period, the game balls enter the second starting opening 208a at a rate of one in 0.6 seconds, and the game balls held by the player increase.

  FIG. 103 is an explanatory view schematically showing the increase and decrease of the game balls held by the player in the high frequency support mode. FIG. 103 (A) shows an example of increase and decrease of gaming balls when the variable time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, and FIG. 103 (B) shows a change time table for the high frequency support mode. An example of increase and decrease of a game ball when set B is chosen is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (A), when the variation time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, a period in which the number of times played after transition to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 During the game, the player's game balls increase. During the period in which the number of game times after transition to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, the number of balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, the game balls held by the player decrease. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (A), the gaming balls held by the player at the time when 100 game runs are over are greater than the start time of the high frequency support mode.

  As shown in FIG. 103 (B), when the variation time table set B for the high frequency support mode is selected, a period in which the number of times played after transition to the high frequency support mode is 1 to 30 During the game, the player's game balls are reduced. During the period in which the number of game times after transition to the high frequency support mode is 31 to 70, the number of balls held by the player does not increase or decrease. During the period in which the number of game times after transition to the high-frequency support mode is 71 to 100, the game balls held by the player increase. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (B), the gaming balls held by the player at the time when 100 game runs are over are greater than the start time of the high frequency support mode.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the shorter the fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 in the high frequency support mode, the more the ratio of the game ball entering the second starting opening 208a is large. It is set (FIG. 102). Therefore, the jackpot lottery held by the game ball entering the second starting opening 208a while the special drawing unit 37 is moving can be quickly digested.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 in the high frequency support mode is set to a fluctuation time longer than the interval of the game balls entering the second starting opening 208a (FIG. 102) . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the suspension of the jackpot lottery being interrupted and the sense of rhythm of the jackpot lottery being lost in the high frequency support mode being impaired.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the player wins a jackpot or reach as a result of the jackpot lottery, a long fluctuation time (for example, 30 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37. If a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time of the special drawing unit 37 during the period in which the game balls increase in the high frequency support mode, the period in which the game balls increase is extended. Therefore, the player plays a game while expecting to reach as many reach occurrences as possible while the game balls increase. That is, according to this embodiment, new value can be added to reach generation.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the fluctuation time table set A for the high frequency support mode is selected, and during the period in which the number of game times after transition to the high frequency support mode is 71 to 100, The player's game ball decreases. If a small hit is won during this period and the variable time table set B for the high frequency support mode is selected, the player's game balls will increase again. Therefore, the player plays a game while expecting to win a small hit and switching the table while the gaming ball decreases. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide the player with a new sense of expectation in the high frequency support mode, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this embodiment, two types of fluctuation time table sets of A and B are stored. However, the number of types of fluctuation time table sets may be one, and three or more types. It is also good.

  Further, as another embodiment, during the high frequency support mode, only the variation time of the drawing unit 38 may be set with reference to the drawing unit table A or the drawing unit table B. With this configuration as well, since the player's game balls can be increased or decreased during the high frequency support mode, the interest of the game can be improved.

N. Modification:
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and can be carried out in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the following modifications are possible.

N1. Modification 1:
In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 stores the contents of the game effect or the effect element constituting the game effect executed in the most recent game run, regardless of the presence or absence of the hold information, and executes the visual notice. In such a case, the content of the effect element constituting the stored game effect or game effect may be executed in the next game run. With such a configuration, even when there is no winning information, even if there is a new winning, in the gaming round related to the winning, configure the game effect or game effect executed in the previous game round Since the effect element to be executed is executed, the effect element constituting the game effect or the game effect of the same content can be executed a plurality of times, and the player can be given a sense of sight.

N2. Modification 2:
In the above embodiment, in the case of performing the rendering element with the same content multiple times, the rendering element to be executed next may be started at the same time as the rendering element to be executed first is finished. By doing this, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of sight.

N3. Modification 3:
In the above-described embodiment, after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the suggested effect is suggested to the player that the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times. However, before the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it may be configured to execute a pre-suggested effect that suggests to the player that the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times. . In this way, it is possible to make the player who has recognized the pre-suggested effect have a strong interest in the effect element to be executed thereafter. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the game effect, and the interest can be improved.

N4. Modification 4:
In the eighth and ninth embodiments, although the length of time in which the open / close doors 208b and 308b maintain the open state is different for each type of high frequency support mode, high frequency support is used instead. The configuration may be such that the number of times the open / close doors 208b and 308b transition from the closed state to the open state and the timing at which the open / close doors 208b and 308b transition from the closed state to the open state differ depending on the type of mode. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to set a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes in which the number of gaming balls entering the second starting opening is different.

N5. Modification 5:
In the ninth embodiment, the main control device 60 is configured to be able to execute only one type of the third high-frequency support mode as the high-frequency support mode in which the ball-drawing rate exceeds 1; The configuration may be configured to be able to execute a plurality of types of high-frequency support modes in which the ball-drawing rate exceeds one.

  For example, in the ninth embodiment, the fourth high frequency support mode in which the open time of the open / close door 308b is set to 2.3 seconds may be configured to be executable. In the fourth high frequency support mode in which the opening time of the open / close door 308b is set to 2.3 seconds, the game ball can reach the second starting opening unit 300 by the game ball emission mechanism 81 at a predetermined emission intensity. , In the situation where it is continuously fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds, all four gaming balls will enter the second starting opening 308a, and eight gaming balls will be paid out as winning balls become. Therefore, when the fourth high frequency support mode is being executed, the ball extraction rate is 2.00. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make a difference in the degree of feeling of uplifting given to the player in the high frequency support mode in which the bowling rate exceeds 1. As a result, it is possible to impart tonation to the game, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even when the fourth high frequency support mode is configured to be executable, the above-described first total ball population ratio is adjusted by adjusting the ratio of executing the first to fourth high frequency support modes. The value of T1 and the second overall ball exit rate T2 can be less than one.

N6. Modification 6:
In the ninth embodiment, among the four game balls, one game ball GB1 is distributed to the route R11, and the three game balls GB2, GB3 and GB4 which reach after the game ball GB1 are the route R11. The configuration is such that different routes (route R2 and route R12) are distributed, but instead of this configuration, one game ball GB1 is distributed to a predetermined route, and the two game balls reached after the game ball GB1 The configuration may be such that a route different from the predetermined route is distributed, or one game ball GB1 is distributed to the predetermined route, and at least four predetermined number of game balls reached after the game ball GB1 are determined. The route may be distributed to a route different from the route of. That is, even if one game ball GB1 is distributed to a predetermined route, N (N is an integer of 2 or more) game balls arriving after the game ball GB1 are distributed to a route different from the predetermined route. Good.

  In addition, instead of the through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment, a prize ball opening or a predetermined ball ball entry where the game ball can enter, at a position where only one game ball GB1 assigned to the predetermined route can reach. A feature may be provided. According to such a configuration, among the (N + 1) game balls, only one game ball GB1 is allowed to reach the prize ball opening or a predetermined feature, and the N game balls reached later than the game ball GB1. It is possible to prevent the player from reaching a prize ball mouth or a predetermined feature.

  Furthermore, a game that reaches a prize ball opening or a predetermined feature by setting the value of N (the number of gaming balls distributed to a route different from the predetermined route) to a desired value at the time of designing the gaming machine The proportion of spheres can be set to the desired proportion. Therefore, while being able to improve the freedom degree in design of a game machine, diversification of a game can be achieved.

N7. Modification 7:
In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, instead of the opening and closing doors 208b and 308b, the state of the second starting opening 208a and 308a, the state in which the game ball is difficult to enter and the state in which the game ball is easy to enter Other mechanisms for transitioning between may be employed. For example, a so-called electric tulip may be adopted as another mechanism instead of the open / close doors 208b and 308b.

N8. Modification 8:
In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning in the motorized combination opening lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to be other than 100%. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the probability of winning in the motorized winning combination opening lottery in the high frequency support mode is set to 99%, 60% or the like. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the ball-opening rate in the high-frequency support mode. For example, when the probability of winning in the electric combination opening lottery in the high-frequency support mode is set to 100%, the probability of winning in the electric combination opening lottery is 100, as opposed to the configuration in which the bowling rate is 1 in the case. If it sets to less than%, the ball-fall rate in the said high frequency support mode can be made less than one.

  In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, the number (the number of balls) of the gaming balls to be paid out as the winning balls when one gaming ball enters the second starting opening 208a, 308a is one or It may be set to any value other than two. In this way, the ball exit rate in the high frequency support mode can be set to an arbitrary value. In addition, the number of game balls to be paid out as a winning ball (the number of winning balls) when one gaming ball enters the second starting opening 208a, 308a may be changed according to the gaming state. According to such a configuration, since the bowling rate of the high frequency support mode changes according to the gaming state, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

N9. Modification 9:
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, the type of the high frequency support mode is set for each type of jackpot, but when the high frequency support mode is executed and the type of the high frequency support mode is determined Any other configuration can be adopted as the configuration to be performed. For example, the high-frequency support mode is executed according to the configuration in which the high-frequency support mode is executed when the number of consecutive times of game cycles not winning the jackpot lottery exceeds the predetermined number or the number of continuous game cycles not winning the jackpot lottery A random number counter is provided to determine the type of high frequency support mode, and whether or not high frequency support mode is executed according to the value of the acquired random number counter. Configuration to determine the type of mode, depending on the type of stop design, the configuration to determine the presence or absence of high-frequency support mode and the type of high-frequency support mode, high-frequency triggered by the execution of a specific reach effect The configuration to execute the support mode, the configuration to determine the type of the high-frequency support mode according to the type of reach effect to be executed, the start opening hold The high frequency support mode is triggered when the total number of game balls entering the ball exceeds the predetermined threshold at the timing when the number is at the upper limit value, and the number of starting openings reserved becomes the upper limit value. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the type of the high frequency support mode is determined according to the total number of game balls entering at the timing at which the game is played.

N10. Modification 10:
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, the configuration in which the ball out ratio and the execution ratio in each high frequency support mode are set such that the first total ball out ratio T1 and the second total ball out ratio T2 are less than 1 However, the ball out rate and the execution ratio in each high frequency support mode may be set such that the first total ball out rate T1 and the second overall ball out rate T2 become 1. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the player's gambling feeling.

N11. Modification 11:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which the motorized role opens a predetermined number of times when game balls enter a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as a pachinko machine that becomes a jackpot by generating rights and a pachinko machine equipped with other features, an arrange ball machine, and a ball.

  A non-ball-ball type game machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of kinds of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts the rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line visible from the display window after the reel is stopped by the passage of a predetermined time, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported in an openable and closable manner by the outer frame is provided with the storage section and the loading device, and the start lever is operated after the predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated by starting to rotate the reels.

  Further, a part of the functions realized by software in the above embodiment may be realized by hardware, or a part of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

O. About the invention group extracted from each said embodiment:
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary.

<Feature A group>
The feature group A is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof.

[Feature A1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information, before the special information becomes the target of the matching;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
In a gaming machine provided with
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the predetermined effect element is determined, and
In the effect executing means,
The execution of the determined effect element is started from the game play before the game play related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied,
A game machine characterized in that the determined effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content until the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is ended.

  According to the feature A1, since the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a sense of deception (dejav) that the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times. . The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  In addition, according to the feature A1, even if the effect (for example, the pre-reading lamp red lighting) is not directly performed that indicates that the possibility that the benefit is given is high, the effect element with the same content It is possible to realize a game in which attention is paid to whether or not is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, the player can play the game with a high sense of expectation with respect to the effect elements sequentially executed.

  Note that the game effect is executed by outputs from a plurality of hardware, such as a speaker, a display device, a light emitting device, and physically operating characters provided in the game machine. The term "reproduction element" refers to a combination of outputs at predetermined timings by the plurality of hardware responsible for game effects. For example, one rendering element (for example, a cut-in advance presentation effect, a reach effect, etc.) is configured by the speaker, the display device, and the light emitting device outputting each at a predetermined timing. And a game production is constituted by a plurality of production elements.

  As described above, since the effect element is a combination of outputs at predetermined timings by a plurality of hardware responsible for game effects, for example, it is constituted by outputs at predetermined timings from the speaker, the display device, and the light emitting device Effect element A and effect element B in which the output by the speaker is deleted from the effect element is the same as the effect element at the predetermined timing from the display device and the light emitting device. It will be included. When the game machine executes the presentation element A, the game element B does not include the voice (output from the speaker) for the game effect A when the game element B executes the game effect B, but other hardware Since the contents of the output from (the display device and the light emitting device) are the same, it is possible to give the player a sense of sight.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1,
A game machine characterized in that the control means controls the number of effect elements of the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature A2, the player's sense of expectation is increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements of the same content to be executed a plurality of times, or the player's sense of expectation is increased, for example. Can change it.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine according to the feature A2,
The control means is configured to execute the plurality of times in a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to when the game cycle related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is ended. A game machine characterized in that the number of effect elements of the content of is increased with the passage of time.

  According to the feature A3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes a sense of sight increases with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, further comprising:
And operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
The control means
It is possible to cause the effect executing means to execute an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element,
A game machine characterized by not selecting the operation reception effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature A4, since the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. This makes it possible to give a sense of visual certainty.

[Feature A5]
A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein
The control means is configured to indicate to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect executing means has been performed after the effect element having the same content has been performed a plurality of times A game machine characterized by being executed by the player.

  According to the feature A5, since the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggested effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is the same. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature A6]
A game machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein
The effect elements are a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and a background image changed to a mode different from that at normal times. Background change notice effect to be given, character item notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined action, lamp emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row fluctuation effect to change a pattern row with a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of reach effect for changing one remaining symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and at least one of symbol stop effects for stopping combination of predetermined symbols A game machine characterized by including.

  According to the feature A6, since it is possible to give the player a sense of sight by using various rendering elements, the player can determine whether the same content is executed a plurality of times for various rendering elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature B group>
The feature B group is extracted from the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof.

[Feature B1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
In a gaming machine provided with
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one of the effect elements before the end of the game cycle related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. While making the effect execution means execute the same contents multiple times,
The suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times is made to be performed by the effect execution means after the effect element of the same content has been performed a plurality of times A gaming machine characterized by having a certain feature.

  According to the feature B1, since the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a sense of deception (dejav) that the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times. . The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given.

  Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  Furthermore, since the effect execution means is made to execute the suggested effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed multiple times, and the effect element of the same content is executed multiple times. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to feature B1,
A game machine characterized in that the control means controls the number of effect elements of the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature B2, the player's sense of expectation is increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements of the same content to be executed a plurality of times, or the player's sense of expectation is increased, for example. Can change it.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine according to feature B2,
The control means is configured to execute the plurality of times in a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to when the game cycle related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is ended. A game machine characterized in that the number of effect elements of the content of is increased with the passage of time.

  According to the feature B3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes a sense of sight increases with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature B4]
A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein
The determination means determines, based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information is to be matched. And
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution unit is executed a plurality of times from the game play before the game play related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by starting execution of a rendering element which is an object to be played.

  According to the feature B4, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation of the feeling of visual appearance from the game play before the game play related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, further comprising:
And operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
The control means
It is possible to cause the effect executing means to execute an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element,
A game machine characterized by not selecting the operation reception effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature B5, since the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress that different contents are executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. This makes it possible to give a sense of visual certainty.

[Feature B6]
A game machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, wherein
The effect elements are a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and a background image changed to a mode different from that at normal times. Background change notice effect to be given, character item notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined action, lamp emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row fluctuation effect to change a pattern row with a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of reach effect for changing one remaining symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and at least one of symbol stop effects for stopping combination of predetermined symbols A game machine characterized by including.

  According to the feature B6, since various sense elements can be used to give a sense of sight to the player, the player is paid attention to whether or not the same content is executed a plurality of times in various effect elements. It can be done.

<Feature C group>
The feature C group is extracted from the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Determining means for determining a display continuation time which is a time required for one game run;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information, before the special information becomes the target of the matching;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
In a gaming machine provided with
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means performs at least two of the plurality of game times prior to the game cycle related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. In each game time, the effect executing means is caused to execute the effect element of the same content that can be executed within the shortest display duration time of the display duration time which can be decided by the decision means. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C1, since the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), a sense of visibility (dejab) that the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times to the player Can be given. The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  Further, according to the feature C1, since the control means causes the effect executing means to execute the effect element of the same content executable within the shortest display duration time among the display duration times which can be determined by the determination means, the decision is made Even when the display continuation time of each game time determined by the means is different, the effect executing means can be made to execute the effect element of the same content in each game time.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1,
The control means
If the length of the display continuation time of one game run executing the rendering element of the same content is such a length that the rendering element of the same content can be executed a plurality of times, the same during the one game circulation A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute the effect element of the contents of a plurality of times.

  According to the feature C2, since the effect element of the same content (hereinafter also referred to as effect element for visual sense notice) which is an object to be executed plural times can be executed more times, On the other hand, the sense of sight can be strongly recognized. Further, since the number of times the effect element for notice of a feeling of visual notice is executed is increased or decreased depending on the length of the display continuation time of one game time, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player.

  Furthermore, since the presentation element for the feeling of visual appearance notice is a presentation element executable within the shortest display continuation time of the display continuation times that can be determined by the determination means, the time required for one execution is 1 It is less than the length of the display continuation time of the game times. Therefore, even if the effect element for notice of a feeling of visual notice is executed once in one game session, an extra time may occur in the display continuation time. According to this gaming machine, in the case where the length of the display continuation time of one game turn is such that the effect element for visual sensation notice (the effect element of the same content) can be executed a plurality of times, Since the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times in one game, it is possible to minimize the remaining time of the display duration time.

[Feature C3]
A game machine according to feature C1 or feature C2, wherein
A game machine characterized in that the control means controls the number of effect elements of the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature C3, by increasing or decreasing the sense of expectation of the player by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements of the same content to be executed a plurality of times, to give an impression on the sense of expectation, etc. Can change it.

[Feature C4]
The gaming machine according to the feature C3,
The control means is configured to execute the plurality of times in a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to when the game cycle related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is ended. A game machine characterized in that the number of effect elements of the content of is increased with the passage of time.

  According to the feature C4, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes a sense of sight increases with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature C5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, further comprising:
And operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
The control means
It is possible to cause the effect executing means to execute an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element,
A game machine characterized by not selecting the operation reception effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature C5, since the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. This makes it possible to give a sense of visual certainty.

[Feature C6]
A game machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein
The control means is configured to indicate to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect executing means has been performed after the effect element having the same content has been performed a plurality of times A game machine characterized by being executed by the player.

  According to the feature C6, since the effect execution means is made to execute the suggested effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is the same. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature C7]
A game machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein
The effect elements are a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and a background image changed to a mode different from that at normal times. Background change notice effect to be given, character item notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined action, lamp emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row fluctuation effect to change a pattern row with a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of reach effect for changing one remaining symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and at least one of symbol stop effects for stopping combination of predetermined symbols A game machine characterized by including.

  According to the feature C7, since it is possible to give the player a sense of sight by using various rendering elements, the player can determine whether the same content is executed multiple times for various rendering elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature D1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information, before the special information becomes the target of the matching;
Effect execution means for executing a game effect;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
Effect storage means for storing the content of the game effect;
In a gaming machine provided with
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The effect storage means stores the content of at least a part of the game effect executed in a game play before the game play related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied,
The control means is a game cycle after the game cycle in which the content of the game effect is stored, and is a game cycle before the game cycle related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, A game machine characterized by causing the effect execution means to reproduce the content of at least a part of the stored game effect.

  According to the feature D1, the content in at least a partial period of the executed game effect is stored, and the content in at least a partial period of the stored game effect is reproduced. It is possible to give a sense of devil (dejab) that the game effect has been executed a plurality of times. The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the game effect of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the game effect is expected in the expectation that the game effect of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the game effects with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the game effect of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the game effect to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  Further, according to the feature D1, since the content of the executed game effect is stored and reproduced, the player experiences the game effect of the completely same content. Therefore, it is easy to give the player a sense of sight.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to feature D1, further comprising:
And operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
The control means
As the game effect, it is possible to cause the effect executing means to execute an operation acceptance effect including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player.
A game machine characterized by not selecting the operation acceptance effect as the game effect when making the game effect unit execute a game effect which is an object to be stored by the effect storage means.

  When the operation acceptance effect is reproduced as a game effect, it may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature D2, the operation reception effect is not selected as the game effect to be executed a plurality of times, so that different contents can be suppressed from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. It can surely give a sense of sight.

[Feature D3]
A game machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, wherein
The control means causes the effect execution means to execute suggestion effects suggesting to the player that the game effects of the same content have been reproduced, after the stored game effects are reproduced. A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature D3, since the effect execution means executes the suggestion effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game effect of the same content is reproduced, and the game effect of the same content is reproduced. The player can be convinced that it has a special meaning.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the third embodiment.

[Feature E1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information, before the special information becomes the target of the matching;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
Determining means for determining a display continuation time which is a time required for one game run;
The total duration of the shortest display durations that can be determined by the determining means is calculated as the display duration of each of a plurality of consecutive game times prior to the game times related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition Calculation means,
In a gaming machine provided with
When the control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means calculates the calculation means until the game round related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is completed. A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute an effect element of the same contents that can be executed plural times in the total time plural times.

  According to the feature E1, the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times (at least twice), so that the player feels that the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times (dejab) Can be given. The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  Further, according to the feature E1, the control means performs the effect element of the same content that can be executed a plurality of times in the total time calculated by the calculation means (total time of the shortest display duration that can be determined by the determination means). Since the effect executing means is executed a plurality of times, one effect of the effect element which is an object to be executed a plurality of times is not limited to one which can be completed within the display duration time which is the time required for one game. That is, the rendering element of the same content can be executed a plurality of times across a plurality of consecutive game times prior to the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. For example, it is also possible to execute one game effect element which is an object to be executed a plurality of times, across game times. Therefore, when selecting a rendering element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to select without taking into consideration the execution time of one of the rendering elements.

  Furthermore, since the effect element of the same content that can be executed a plurality of times is executed a plurality of times in the total time of the shortest display durations that can be determined by the determination means, the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times The time required for the game is less than or equal to the total duration of the display durations of the actual game times. Therefore, when the effect element of the same content is executed multiple times across a plurality of consecutive game times prior to the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition, time shortage will occur. It is possible to avoid and reliably execute the rendering element of the same content multiple times.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to the feature E1,
A game machine characterized in that the control means controls the number of effect elements of the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature E2, the player's sense of expectation is increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements of the same content to be executed a plurality of times, and the player's sense of expectation such as giving an expectation to the expectation. Can change it.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to the feature E2,
The control means is configured to execute the plurality of times in a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to when the game cycle related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is ended. A game machine characterized by increasing the number of effect elements of the content of with the passage of time.

  According to the feature E3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes a sense of sight increases with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature E4]
A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, further comprising:
And operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
The control means
It is possible to cause the effect executing means to execute an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element,
A game machine characterized by not selecting the operation reception effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature E4, since the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the different contents from being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. This makes it possible to give a sense of visual certainty.

[Feature E5]
A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, wherein
The control means is configured to indicate to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect executing means has been performed after the effect element having the same content has been performed a plurality of times A game machine characterized by being executed by the player.

  According to the feature E5, since the effect execution means is made to execute the suggested effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is the same. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature E6]
A game machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein
The effect elements are a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and a background image changed to a mode different from that at normal times. Background change notice effect to be given, character item notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined action, lamp emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row fluctuation effect to change a pattern row with a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of reach effect for changing one remaining symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and at least one of symbol stop effects for stopping combination of predetermined symbols A game machine characterized by including.

  According to the feature E6, since it is possible to give the player a sense of sight by using various rendering elements, the player can determine whether the same content is executed a plurality of times with respect to the various rendering elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature F group>
The feature F group is extracted from the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fourth embodiment.

[Feature F1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Determining means for determining a display continuation time which is a time required for one game run;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
In a gaming machine provided with
When the control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one game among the game times before the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute an effect element that can be executed a plurality of times in the display continuation time of the game times a plurality of times with the same content.

According to the feature F1, since the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a sense of debating (dejav) that the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times. .
The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given.
Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation.
Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

  Further, according to the feature F1, since the effect element that can be executed a plurality of times in the display continuation time of the game times is executed a plurality of times in at least one game time, the player feels a sense of sight Can be given one game time.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
A game machine characterized in that the control means controls the number of effect elements of the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature F2, the player's sense of expectation is increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements of the same content to be executed a plurality of times, and the player's sense of expectation such as giving an impression on the expectation. Can change it.

[Feature F3]
The gaming machine according to feature F2,
When the control means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game according to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized in that the number of effect elements of the same content to be executed a plurality of times is increased with the lapse of time in a period until the end of a cycle.

  According to the feature F3, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes a sense of sight increases with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3;
The determination means determines, based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information is to be matched. And
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution unit is executed a plurality of times from the game play before the game play related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by starting execution of a rendering element which is an object to be played.

  According to the feature F4, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation of the feeling of visual appearance from the game play before the game play related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

[Feature F5]
A game machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein
The control means is configured to indicate to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect executing means has been performed after the effect element having the same content has been performed a plurality of times A game machine characterized by being executed by the player.

  According to the feature F5, since the effect execution means executes the suggested effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is the same. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature F6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein
The effect elements are a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and a background image changed to a mode different from that at normal times. Background change notice effect to be given, character item notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined action, lamp emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row fluctuation effect to change a pattern row with a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of reach effect for changing one remaining symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and at least one of symbol stop effects for stopping combination of predetermined symbols A game machine characterized by including.

  According to the feature F6, since various sense elements can be used to give the player a sense of sight, the player is paid attention to whether or not the same content is executed a plurality of times in various effect elements. It can be done.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth embodiment.

[Feature G1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information, before the special information becomes the target of the matching;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
Determining means for determining a display continuation time which is a time required for one game run;
In a gaming machine provided with
The determining means is configured to display a display duration of a predetermined length for at least two game times among a plurality of game times prior to the game time related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition. To secure
The control means executes the effect element of the same content in each of the plurality of game times among the plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by being executed by means.

  According to the feature G1, the effect element of the same content can be executed in each of the at least two game times in which the duration of the predetermined length is secured by the determination means. Since the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a sense of debating (dejab) that the rendering element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times. The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least two games of the plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is for securing display continuation time of predetermined length for times,
The control means causes the effect executing means to execute the effect elements of the same contents that can be executed in each game turn in which the display continuation time of the predetermined length is secured by the determination means. A gaming machine characterized by having a certain feature.

  According to the feature G2, since the control means causes the effect executing means to execute the effect elements of the same contents that can be executed in each game time in which the determining means secures the display duration of the predetermined length, the effect executing means is The time required to execute the same effect element can be prevented from running short at each game time, and the effect element of the same content can be surely executed at each game time.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to feature G1,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the control means performs at least two of a plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information that is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is to make the effect executing means execute the effect element of the same content in the game time,
In the determination means, the effect execution means has the same content with respect to at least two game times among a plurality of game times before the game time related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine characterized by securing a display continuation time of a length which can execute a rendering element.

  According to the feature G3, since the determination means secures the display continuation time of the length in which the effect execution means can execute the effect element of the same content, the time required for the effect execution means to execute the same effect element However, it is possible to avoid running short in each game time, and to execute the rendering element of the same contents surely in each game time.

[Feature G4]
A game machine according to any one of features G1 to G3.
A game machine characterized in that the control means controls the number of effect elements of the same contents to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature G4, the player's sense of expectation is increased or decreased by increasing or decreasing the number of effect elements having the same content to be executed a plurality of times, or the tonality is given to the expectation, etc. Can change it.

[Feature G5]
A gaming machine according to feature G4,
The control means is configured to execute the plurality of times in a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to when the game cycle related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is ended. A game machine characterized in that the number of effect elements of the content of is increased with the passage of time.

  According to the feature G5, since the number of effect elements for which the player recognizes a sense of sight increases with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation can be increased with the passage of time.

[Feature G6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein
And operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
The control means
It is possible to cause the effect executing means to execute an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element,
A game machine characterized by not selecting the operation reception effect element as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature G6, since the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress that different contents are executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. This makes it possible to give a sense of visual certainty.

[Feature G7]
A game machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, wherein
The control means is configured to indicate to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect executing means has been performed after the effect element having the same content has been performed a plurality of times A game machine characterized by being executed by the player.

  According to the feature G7, since the effect execution means executes the suggested effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is the same. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature G8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7, wherein
The effect elements are a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and a background image changed to a mode different from that at normal times. Background change notice effect to be given, character item notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined action, lamp emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row fluctuation effect to change a pattern row with a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of reach effect for changing one remaining symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and at least one of symbol stop effects for stopping combination of predetermined symbols A game machine characterized by including.

  According to the feature G8, it is possible to give the player a sense of sight by using various rendering elements, so the player can determine whether the same content is executed a plurality of times for various rendering elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature H group>
The feature H group is extracted from the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth embodiment.

[Feature H1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
Time acquisition means for acquiring time information;
In a gaming machine provided with
The control means
The effect execution means is configured to cause the effect executing means to execute a time interlocking effect element which is continuously executed with the passage of time based on the time information as the effect element,
In the case where it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the execution of the time-linked effect element is started by the end of the game cycle related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, the effect executing means may have a plurality of the time interlocking effect elements to be executed in at least a part of the period until the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. A gaming machine characterized by being executed once.

  According to the feature H1, since the time-linked effect element performed in at least a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to provide the player with an effect with a new interest. In addition, since the time-linked effect element performed in at least a part of the period is executed a plurality of times, the player feels that the time-linked effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times (dejab) Can be given.

  The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that a benefit is given after the time-linked effect element has been executed a plurality of times, the time-linked effect element is executed in anticipation of the time effect element being performed a plurality of times. Always come to pay attention to the time-linked production elements with a high sense of expectation at all times. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times, and to suitably increase the player's attention to the time-linked effect element executed based on the time information. The interest of the game can be improved.

  If a plurality of gaming machines provided with the feature H1 are installed in the gaming hall, the gaming machine fulfilling the predetermined condition and the gaming machine not satisfying the predetermined condition have the same time interlocking effect element from the same time Even when is started, there is a time difference (shift) in the time-linked effect element to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to give a sense of superiority to a player who is playing a game with a gaming machine that satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to the feature H1,
The control means sets a specific temporal position of the time-linked effect element having a predetermined temporal length as a start position when the time-dependent effect element is executed by the effect executing means a plurality of times. A gaming machine characterized by having a certain feature.

  According to the feature H2, since the time-linked effect element is executed a plurality of times with the specific temporal position as the start position, the player has already been strong for the portion after the specific temporal position of the time-linked effect element. The visual sensation can be recognized.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine according to feature H2,
The determination means determines, based on at least one of the information included in the special information, whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, before the special information is to be matched. And
The control means is a game cycle in which execution is started after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the game time before the game cycle related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. The game is characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute the time-linked effect element with the specific temporal position as the start position, triggered by the timing of starting at least two of the game times. Machine.

  According to the feature H3, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of sight by synchronizing the timing of the start of each time-linked effect element executed a plurality of times and the timing of the start of the game round.

[Feature H4]
It is a game machine according to feature H2 or feature 3,
The control means stores, as the specific temporal position, the temporal position of the time-linked effect element being executed at the timing when the game play is started after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  Temporarily, when the specific temporal position is set at the end of the time interlocking effect element, when the time interlocking effect element is started from the specific temporal position, the time interlocking effect element corresponding to the specific temporal position is , It may not be executed even once at the timing of the start of the first game time of at least two game times. In this case, the time-linked effect element, which was being executed as a continuous series of flows until the first gaming round is started, is suddenly interrupted at the start of the first gaming round and is executed even once. The time-linked effect element will be started and executed from a specific temporal position that is not present.

  According to the feature H4, the game times after it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, in other words, the time-linked effect being executed at the timing when the first game time of the at least two game times is started Since the temporal position of the element is stored as a specific temporal position, and the stored specific temporal position is used as the start position of the second or later time-linked effect element among multiple executions, The temporal position, which has been executed once as a continuous series of flows, can be used as the second and subsequent start positions of the time-linked effect element that is executed a plurality of times. Therefore, the time-linked effect element, which has been executed as a continuous series of flows until the first game run is started, is prevented from being suddenly interrupted at the start of the first game run, and is executed even once. It is possible to avoid that the time-linked effect element is started and executed from a specific temporal position that is not present.

[Feature H5]
A game machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein
The control means
As the effect element, it is possible to cause the effect executing means to execute a non-time interlocking effect element that is executed without being based on the time information,
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the non-time interlocking rendering element is executed together with the time interlocking rendering element, the time interlocking rendering performed at least in a partial period The element and the non-time interlocking effect element are characterized in that the effect execution means is caused to execute a plurality of times until the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. A gaming machine to be.

  According to the feature H5, in addition to the time-link effect element, the non-time-link effect element is also executed a plurality of times, so that the player can be given a stronger sense of sight.

[Feature H6]
The gaming machine according to feature H5,
A game machine characterized in that the control means controls the number of the non-time interlocking effect elements to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature 6, by increasing or decreasing the number of non-time-linked effect elements to be executed a plurality of times, the player's sense of expectation is increased or decreased, or the expectation of the player is given an impression. It can give change.

[Feature H7]
A gaming machine according to feature H6,
The control means executes the plurality of times in a period from when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied to when the game cycle related to the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied is ended. A game machine characterized by increasing the number of non-time-locked effect elements with the passage of time.

  According to the feature H7, since the number of non-time interlocking rendering elements, which is one of the rendering elements for which the player recognizes a feeling of sight, increases with the passage of time, the player's sense of expectation is with the passage of time. It can be increased.

[Feature H8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H7, wherein
And operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
The control means
It is possible to cause the effect executing means to execute an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player as the effect element,
A game machine characterized by not selecting the operation acceptance effect element as the non-time interlocking effect element to be executed a plurality of times when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times. As a result, it may not be possible to give the player a sense of sight.

  According to the feature H8, since the operation receiving effect element is not selected as the non-time interlocking effect element to be executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress different contents being executed depending on the mode of the input operation by the player. People can be given a sense of visual certainty.

[Feature H9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8,
The control means is configured to indicate to the player that the effect element having the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect executing means has been performed after the effect element having the same content has been performed a plurality of times A game machine characterized by being executed by the player.

  According to the feature H9, since the effect execution means executes the suggested effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is the same. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

[Feature H10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9,
The effect elements are a cut-in notice effect for displaying a predetermined image in front of a background image, an object notice effect for displaying a predetermined object image in front of a background image, and a background image changed to a mode different from that at normal times. Background change notice effect to be given, character item notice effect to make a predetermined character perform a predetermined action, lamp emission effect to make various lamps emit light in a predetermined pattern, symbol row fluctuation effect to change a pattern row with a predetermined scroll pattern, At least one of reach effect for changing one remaining symbol row in a state where two identical symbols are stopped on at least one effective line, and at least one of symbol stop effects for stopping combination of predetermined symbols A game machine characterized by including.

  According to the feature H10, since it is possible to give the player a sense of sight by using various rendering elements, the player can determine whether the same content is executed a plurality of times with respect to the various rendering elements. Can be noticed.

<Feature I group>
The feature group I is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 1 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature I1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
Operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
In a gaming machine provided with
The control means
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect executing means until the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. Run multiple times,
When an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
The operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving means has a predetermined operation condition after the effect executing means has executed the first effect mode including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player. When satisfied, the effect executing means is caused to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode,
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means, the second effect mode is not executed by the effect executing means,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements,
When the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution means executes the operation receiving effect element for the first time:
Even if the operation mode satisfies or does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means, the second effect mode can be changed to the second effect mode. Let the production execution means execute
When the second effect mode is not executed when the effect execution means executes the first operation receiving effect element,
Even if the operation mode satisfies or does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means, the second effect mode can be changed to the second effect mode. A game machine characterized in that the effect execution means is not allowed to execute.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature I1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, when the second effect mode is executed in the first operation acceptance effect element, the second operation acceptance effect element in the second and subsequent times If the second rendering mode is not performed in the first operation receiving rendering element, the second rendering mode is not performed in the second and subsequent operation receiving rendering elements, Even when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element to be executed first and second can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of appearance (dejav) that the operation receiving effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

[Feature I2]
It is a game machine according to feature I1,
The control means
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed by the effect executing means when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition.
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements,
It is a case where the second effect mode is executed when the effect executing means performs the first operation receiving effect element, and the effect executing means performs the first effect mode. Later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed by the effect executing unit in response to the operation mode satisfying the operation condition.
It is a case where the second effect mode is executed when the effect executing means performs the first operation receiving effect element, and the effect executing means performs the first effect mode. Later, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is caused to be executed by the effect executing means, triggered by the passage of the predetermined time. A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature I2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation reception effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode can be executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. . Furthermore, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed, so that unexpectedness can be given to the game. The interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature I3]
A game machine according to feature I1 or feature I2, wherein
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control to cause the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether it is within a time when the input operation can be accepted. A game machine that features it.

  The player may perform the input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of visual perception with respect to the operation receiving effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature I3, since the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means when causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, it is suppressed that the player is unlikely to feel a sense of visual appearance Can.

[Feature I4]
A game machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, further comprising:
It comprises changing means for changing an aspect of the operation receiving means to an aspect upon receiving the input operation by the player,
The control means
When the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition, and the second effect mode is executed by the effect executing means,
The control means controls the changing means to change the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature I4, since the aspect of the operation receiving means changes, it is possible to give a surprise to the game. Furthermore, it is possible to have persuasiveness that the second effect mode is executed even though the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition.

[Feature I5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined information is satisfied before the special information becomes the target of the comparison.
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the target of the matching. A game machine characterized by starting execution of a rendering element which is a target to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature I5, since the execution of the effect element which is the target to be performed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied becomes the target of the collation. The player can be given a sense of anticipation for a sense of sight.

[Feature I6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, wherein
The control means may cause the player to perform a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation reception effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, to the effect execution means after the operation reception effect element is performed a plurality of times A game machine characterized by being to be executed.

  According to the feature I6, since the effect execution means executes the suggested effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is the same. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 2 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature J1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
Operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
In a gaming machine provided with
The control means
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect executing means until the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. Run multiple times,
When an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
The operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving means has a predetermined operation condition after the effect executing means has executed the first effect mode including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player. When satisfied, the effect executing means is caused to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after causing the effect executing means to execute the first effect mode, a third effect mode different from the first and second effect modes is selected. To be executed by the effect executing means,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements,
When the second effect mode is executed when the effect execution means executes the operation receiving effect element for the first time:
Even if the operation mode satisfies or does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means, the second effect mode can be changed to the second effect mode. Let the production execution means execute
When the third effect mode is executed when the effect execution means performs the first operation receiving effect element, the third effect mode is executed:
After the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means, the third effect mode is selected whether the operation mode satisfies or does not satisfy the operation condition. A game machine characterized by being executed by an effect execution means.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature J1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, when the second effect mode is executed in the first operation acceptance effect element, the second operation acceptance effect element in the second and subsequent times When the third rendering mode is executed in the first operation receiving rendering element, the third rendering mode is executed in the second and subsequent operation receiving rendering elements. Even when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element to be executed first and second can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of appearance (dejav) that the operation receiving effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to the feature J1,
The control means
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed by the effect executing unit in response to the operation mode satisfying the operation condition.
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode is executed by the effect executing means when the predetermined time elapses.
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements,
It is a case where the second effect mode is executed when the effect executing means performs the first operation receiving effect element, and the effect executing means performs the first effect mode. Later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed by the effect executing unit in response to the operation mode satisfying the operation condition.
It is a case where the second effect mode is executed when the effect executing means performs the first operation receiving effect element, and the effect executing means performs the first effect mode. Later, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the effect executing means is caused to execute the second effect mode triggered by the passage of the predetermined time.
It is a case where the third effect mode is executed when the effect executing means performs the first operation receiving effect element, and the effect executing means performs the first effect mode. Later, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode is executed by the effect executing unit in response to the operation mode satisfying the operation condition.
It is a case where the third effect mode is executed when the effect executing means performs the first operation receiving effect element, and the effect executing means performs the first effect mode. After that, when the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode is executed by the effect executing means when the predetermined time has elapsed. A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature J2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third operation mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since the effect mode is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation receiving effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. In addition, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third effect mode is executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. be able to. Furthermore, even if the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second or third effect mode is executed, so giving surprise to the game. Can improve the interest of the game.

[Feature J3]
A game machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, wherein
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control to cause the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether it is within a time when the input operation can be accepted. A game machine that features it.

  The player may perform the input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of visual perception with respect to the operation receiving effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature J3, since the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means when causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, it is suppressed that the player is unlikely to feel a sense of visual appearance. Can.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, further comprising:
It comprises changing means for changing an aspect of the operation receiving means to an aspect upon receiving the input operation by the player,
The control means
When the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition, and the second effect mode is executed by the effect executing means,
The control means controls the changing means to change the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature J4, since the mode of the operation receiving means changes, it is possible to impart unexpectedness to the game, and the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition. It can be convincing that the second rendering mode is executed.

[Feature J5]
A game machine according to any one of features J1 to J4, wherein
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined information is satisfied before the special information becomes the target of the comparison.
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the target of the matching. A game machine characterized by starting execution of a rendering element which is a target to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature J5, since the execution of the effect element which is the object to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied becomes the object of the collation. The player can be given a sense of anticipation for a sense of sight.
[Feature J6]
A game machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein
The control means may cause the player to perform a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation reception effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, to the effect execution means after the operation reception effect element is performed a plurality of times A game machine characterized by being to be executed.

  According to the feature J6, since the effect execution means executes the suggested effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is the same. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Feature K group>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 3 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature K1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
Operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
In a gaming machine provided with
The control means
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect executing means until the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. Run multiple times,
When an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
The operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving means has a predetermined operation condition after the effect executing means has executed the first effect mode including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player. A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode, in either of the case where the condition is satisfied and the case where the condition is not satisfied.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature K1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, the second effect mode is executed after the first effect mode is executed, so that the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times Even in this case, it is possible to make the contents of the operation acceptance effect elements to be executed first and second times the same.
Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of appearance (dejav) that the operation receiving effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to the feature K1,
The control means
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed by the effect executing unit in response to the operation mode satisfying the operation condition.
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is caused to be executed by the effect executing means when the predetermined time has elapsed. A gaming machine to be.

  According to the feature K2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation reception effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. Further, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode can be executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. . Furthermore, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed, so that unexpectedness can be given to the game. The interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature K3]
A game machine according to feature K1 or feature K2, wherein
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control to cause the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether it is within a time when the input operation can be accepted. A game machine that features it.

  The player may perform the input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of visual perception with respect to the operation receiving effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature K3, since the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means when causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, it is suppressed that the player is unlikely to feel a sense of visual appearance. Can.

[Feature K4]
A game machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, further comprising:
It comprises changing means for changing an aspect of the operation receiving means to an aspect upon receiving the input operation by the player,
The control means
When the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the operation condition, and the second effect mode is executed by the effect executing means,
The control means controls the changing means to change the mode of the operation receiving means to the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation satisfying the operation condition is received from the player. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature K4, since the mode of the operation receiving means changes, unexpectedness can be given to the game, and the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition. It can be convincing that the second rendering mode is executed.

[Feature K5]
A game machine according to any one of features K1 to K4,
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined information is satisfied before the special information becomes the target of the comparison.
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the target of the matching. A game machine characterized by starting execution of a rendering element which is a target to be executed a plurality of times.

According to the feature K5, since the execution of the effect element which is the target to be performed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied becomes the target of the collation. The player can be given a sense of anticipation for a sense of sight.
[Feature K6]
A game machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, wherein
The control means may cause the player to perform a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation reception effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, to the effect execution means after the operation reception effect element is performed a plurality of times A game machine characterized by being to be executed.

  According to the feature K6, since the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggested effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is the same. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Feature L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the embodiments described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from Example 4 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature L1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
Operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
In a gaming machine provided with
The control means
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect executing means until the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. Run multiple times,
When an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
It is a selection screen that includes a content that suggests acceptance of the input operation by the player and allows the player to select one of a plurality of options, and the operation of the input operation accepted by the operation receiving unit While displaying the selection screen on which the selection state is switched every time the mode satisfies the predetermined operation condition on the effect execution means,
The effect executing means is made to execute the effect mode corresponding to the option selected at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements,
While displaying the same selection screen as the first selection screen displayed on the effect execution means,
A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute the same effect mode as the effect mode corresponding to the first selected option at the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature L1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, in the operation reception effect elements executed in the second and subsequent times, the same effect mode as the effect mode performed in the first operation reception effect element Since the process is performed, even when the operation receiving effect element is performed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation receiving effect element performed in the first time and the second time or later can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of appearance (dejav) that the operation receiving effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
A game machine characterized in that the selection screen has the same mode before and after the selection state is switched.

  According to the feature L2, when the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, the same effect mode is executed from the selection screen of the same mode, thereby providing the player with a stronger sense of sight. Can.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2, wherein
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control to cause the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether it is within a time when the input operation can be accepted. A game machine that features it.

  The player may perform the input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of visual perception with respect to the operation receiving effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature L3, since the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means when causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, it is suppressed that the player is unlikely to feel a sense of visual appearance Can.

[Feature L4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3;
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined information is satisfied before the special information becomes the target of the comparison.
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the target of the matching. A game machine characterized by starting execution of a rendering element which is a target to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature L4, the execution of the effect element which is the object to be performed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is the object of the comparison. The player can be given a sense of anticipation for a sense of sight.

[Feature L5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4,
The control means may cause the player to perform a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation reception effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, to the effect execution means after the operation reception effect element is performed a plurality of times A game machine characterized by being to be executed.

  According to the feature L5, since the effect execution means is made to execute the suggested effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is the same. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Feature M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the fifth example of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature M1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
Operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
In a gaming machine provided with
The control means
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect executing means until the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. Run multiple times,
When an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
A selection screen that allows the player to select one of the effect modes from among a plurality of effect modes, including a content that suggests acceptance of the input operation by the player, wherein the selection state is switched with the passage of time Is displayed on the effect execution means, and
Even if the operation mode of the input operation accepted by the operation accepting means satisfies a predetermined operation condition or is not satisfied, one of the effect modes is selected from the plurality of effect modes. And the effect executing means to execute the selected effect mode.
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements,
While displaying the same selection screen as the first selection screen displayed on the effect execution means,
Even if the operation mode satisfies or does not satisfy the operation condition, the same effect mode as the effect mode selected for the first time is selected, and the selected effect A game machine characterized by causing the effect execution means to execute an aspect.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature M1, regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, in the operation reception effect elements executed for the second and subsequent times, the same effect mode as the effect mode performed in the first operation reception effect element Since selection and execution are performed, even when the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation receiving effect elements to be executed for the first time and for the second and subsequent times can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of appearance (dejav) that the operation receiving effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

[Feature M2]
A gaming machine according to feature M1,
The control means
As control for causing the effect executing means to execute the first operation acceptance effect element,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, one of the plurality of effect modes is selected with the operation mode satisfying the operation condition as a trigger. ,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, one of the plurality of effect modes is selected in response to the elapse of the predetermined time. And
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the second and subsequent operation acceptance effect elements,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within the predetermined time, the same effect mode as the one selected as the first effect mode is selected when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition. State,
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the same effect mode as the effect mode selected for the first time is selected in response to the elapse of the predetermined time. A gaming machine characterized by being one.

  According to the feature M2, when the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, one effect mode is selected from the plurality of effect modes triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition. Since the selected state is established, the player can be actively involved in the operation reception effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. In addition, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, one of the effect modes out of the plurality of effect modes triggered by the elapse of the predetermined time. Can be selected.

[Feature M3]
A game machine according to feature M1 or feature M2, wherein
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control to cause the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether it is within a time when the input operation can be accepted. A game machine that features it.

  The player may perform the input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of visual perception with respect to the operation receiving effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature M3, since the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means when causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, it is suppressed that the player is unlikely to feel a sense of visual appearance. Can.

[Feature M4]
A game machine according to any one of features M1 to M3;
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined information is satisfied before the special information becomes the target of the comparison.
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the target of the matching. A game machine characterized by starting execution of a rendering element which is a target to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature M4, the execution of the effect element which is the target to be performed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the target of the collation. The player can be given a sense of anticipation for a sense of sight.

[Feature M5]
A game machine according to any one of features M1 to M4, wherein
The control means may cause the player to perform a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation reception effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, to the effect execution means after the operation reception effect element is performed a plurality of times A game machine characterized by being to be executed.

  According to the feature M5, since the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggested effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is the same. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Feature N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the sixth example of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature N1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
Operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
In a gaming machine provided with
The control means
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect executing means until the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. Run multiple times,
When an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
The effect executing means executes a first effect mode that causes the effect executing means to display a predetermined parameter that changes in a predetermined direction with the passage of time, including content that suggests acceptance of the input operation by the player. Let
A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute a second effect aspect different from the first effect aspect after the parameter satisfies a predetermined parameter condition.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature N1, after the first effect mode is executed, the parameter satisfies the predetermined parameter condition regardless of the operation mode of the input operation by the player, and the second effect mode is executed. Therefore, even when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times, the contents of the operation acceptance effect element to be executed first and second and subsequent times can be made the same. Then, it is possible to give the player a sense of appearance (dejav) that the operation receiving effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times.

  The player who has recognized the sense of sight will have a sense of expectation that there is a special meaning to the sense of sight, for example, there is a possibility that a benefit may be given. Furthermore, when the player experiences that the benefit is given after the effect element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, the effect element is expected in the expectation that the effect element of the same content will be executed a plurality of times. Every time it is executed, it pays attention to the directing element with a high sense of expectation. Therefore, while making the player pay attention to whether or not the rendering element of the same content is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suitably increase the player's attention to the rendering element to be sequentially executed, thereby improving the interest of the game Can be

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to feature N1,
The control means causes the effect executing means to execute speed change processing for changing the change speed of the parameter when the operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving means satisfies a predetermined operation condition. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature N2, the player operates the operation receiving unit such that the operation mode of the input operation satisfies the predetermined operation condition in order to change the change speed of the parameter. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation reception effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine according to the feature N2,
When the control means changes the parameter in the decreasing direction with the passage of time, the reduction rate of the parameter decreases as the number of input operations accepted by the operation receiving means per unit time increases. A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute the speed change process.

  According to the feature N3, the player operates the operation receiving means so as to increase the number of input operations per unit time in an attempt to reduce the decrease rate of the parameter. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation reception effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature N4]
The gaming machine according to the feature N2,
When the control means changes the parameter in the direction of increasing with the lapse of time, the increase rate of the parameter increases as the number of input operations accepted by the operation receiving means per unit time increases. A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute the speed change process.

  According to the feature N4, the player operates the operation receiving unit so as to increase the number of input operations per unit time in an attempt to increase the increase rate of the parameter. Therefore, the player can be actively involved in the operation reception effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature N5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4, wherein
The control means
When making the effect execution means execute the first operation acceptance effect element, the process of changing the parameter is stored,
A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to reproduce a process in which the stored parameter changes when causing the effect executing means to execute the second and subsequent operation receiving effect elements.

  According to the feature N5, since the process of changing the parameter is the same in the operation receiving effect element executed a plurality of times, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of sight.

[Feature N6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N5, wherein
It comprises changing means for changing an aspect of the operation receiving means to an aspect upon receiving the input operation by the player,
The control means
When making the effect execution means execute the first operation receiving effect element, the process of the change of the mode of the operation receiving means when the input operation is received is stored,
When making the effect executing means execute the operation receiving effect element of the second and subsequent times, the changing means is made to reproduce the process of the change of the mode of the operation receiving means stored. Machine.

  According to the feature N6, since the aspect of the operation receiving means changes, it is possible to give a surprisingness to the game. Furthermore, in the second and subsequent operation receiving and effect elements, the process of changing the mode of the operation receiving means in the first operation receiving and effect elements is reproduced, so that the player can be given a stronger sense of sight.

[Feature N7]
A game machine according to any one of features N1 to N6, wherein
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined information is satisfied before the special information becomes the target of the comparison.
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the target of the matching. A game machine characterized by starting execution of a rendering element which is a target to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature N7, since the execution of the effect element which is the object to be executed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the object of the collation. The player can be given a sense of anticipation for a sense of sight.

[Feature N8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N7, wherein
The control means may cause the player to perform a suggestion effect that suggests to the player that the operation reception effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, to the effect execution means after the operation reception effect element is performed a plurality of times A game machine characterized by being to be executed.

  According to the feature N8, since the effect execution means executes the suggested effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the effect element of the same content has been executed a plurality of times, and the effect element of the same content is the same. The player can be convinced that there is a special meaning to being executed multiple times.

<Feature O group>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the example 7 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature O1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
Operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
In a gaming machine provided with
The control means
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect executing means until the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. Run multiple times,
When an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
The operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving means has a predetermined operation condition after the effect executing means has executed the first effect mode including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player. When satisfied, the effect executing means is caused to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode,
If the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition after the first effect mode is executed by the effect executing means, the second effect mode is not executed by the effect executing means,
When the second effect mode is executed in all of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, or in any of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, the second effect mode is executed even once If not run
A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute a suggested effect which suggests to a player that the operation receiving effect element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature O1, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the operation receiving effect elements executed a plurality of times, the operation receiving effect elements are executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same content It is possible to give the player a sense of devil (dejab) that the effect element of has been executed a plurality of times. Then, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggested effect, so that the player is notified that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times. While being able to make it recognize, a player can be convinced that it has special meaning that the operation reception effect element of the same content was performed in multiple times.

  Furthermore, when the player experiences a suggested effect after the operation receiving effect element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content, every time the operation receiving effect element is executed, in the expectation that the suggested effect will be executed, The operation receiving means is operated to perform the same input operation and the operation reception effect mode is executed with the same content, and generation of a suggested effect is expected. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the operation acceptance effect element to be sequentially executed can be suitably enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1,
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the control means executes the second effect mode to the effect execution means, triggered by the operation mode satisfying the operation condition. A game machine characterized by being made to

  According to the feature O2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since it is executed, the player can be actively involved in the operation reception effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game.

[Feature O3]
A game machine according to the feature O1 or the feature O2, wherein
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control to cause the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether it is within a time when the input operation can be accepted. A game machine that features it.

  The player may perform the input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of visual perception with respect to the operation receiving effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature O3, since the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means when causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, it is suppressed that the player is unlikely to feel a sense of visual appearance. Can.

[Feature O4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features O1 to O3, wherein
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined information is satisfied before the special information becomes the target of the comparison.
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the target of the matching. A game machine characterized by starting execution of a rendering element which is a target to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature O4, the execution of the effect element which is the object to be performed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the object of the comparison. The player can be given a sense of anticipation for a sense of sight.

<Feature P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the embodiments described above or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from example 8 of the seventh embodiment.

[Feature P1]
An information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means;
Collation means for collating whether or not the information included in the special information stored in the acquired information storage means matches the predetermined benefit grant information;
Notification means for notifying of the result of the comparison of the special information every game time;
Privilege giving means for giving a player a privilege when information included in the special information matches the privilege giving information as a result of the collation of the special information;
A determination unit that determines whether a predetermined condition is satisfied based on at least one of the information included in the special information;
An effect executing means for executing a game effect configured by the effect element;
Control means for controlling the effect executing means;
Operation receiving means for receiving an input operation by the player;
In a gaming machine provided with
The control means
If it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, at least one effect element is used as the effect executing means until the game round related to the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition is completed. Run multiple times,
When an operation receiving effect element including content suggesting acceptance of the input operation by the player is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As control for causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element,
The operation mode of the input operation received by the operation receiving means has a predetermined operation condition after the effect executing means has executed the first effect mode including the content suggesting the acceptance of the input operation by the player. When satisfied, the effect executing means is caused to execute a second effect mode different from the first effect mode,
A third effect mode different from the first and second effect modes when the operation mode does not satisfy a predetermined operation condition after the effect executing means executes the first effect mode To cause the effect executing means to
When the second effect mode is executed in all of the operation receiving effect elements executed a plurality of times, or the third effect mode is executed in all the operation receiving effect elements executed a plurality of times. in case of,
A game machine characterized by causing the effect executing means to execute a suggested effect which suggests to a player that the operation receiving effect element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content.

  The operation receiving effect element may be executed with different contents depending on the operation mode of the input operation by the player when executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature P1, when the player performs the same input operation in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, the operation acceptance effect elements are executed a plurality of times with the same content, and the same content It is possible to give the player a sense of devil (dejab) that the effect element of has been executed a plurality of times. Then, when the operation acceptance effect element is executed a plurality of times with the same content, the effect execution means is caused to execute the suggested effect, so that the player is notified that the effect element with the same content has been executed a plurality of times. While being able to make it recognize, a player can be convinced that it has special meaning that the operation reception effect element of the same content was performed in multiple times.

Furthermore, when the player experiences a suggested effect after the operation receiving effect element has been executed a plurality of times with the same content, every time the operation receiving effect element is executed, in the expectation that the suggested effect will be executed, The operation receiving means is operated to perform the same input operation and the operation reception effect mode is executed with the same content, and generation of a suggested effect is expected.
Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the operation acceptance effect element to be sequentially executed can be suitably enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine according to the feature P1,
The control means
When the operation mode satisfies the operation condition within a predetermined time, the second effect mode is executed by the effect executing unit in response to the operation mode satisfying the operation condition.
When the operation mode does not satisfy the operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode is executed by the effect executing means when the predetermined time has elapsed. A gaming machine to be.

  According to the feature P2, when the operation mode of the input operation by the player satisfies the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the second effect mode is triggered by the operation mode satisfying the predetermined operation condition. Since the execution is performed, the player can be actively involved in the operation reception effect element, and the player can be provided with a sense of unity with the game. In addition, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode can be executed when the predetermined time has elapsed. . Furthermore, even when the operation mode of the input operation by the player does not satisfy the predetermined operation condition within the predetermined time, the third effect mode is executed, so that unexpectedness can be given to the game. The interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature P3]
A game machine according to feature P1 or feature P2, wherein
The control means
When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the operation acceptance effect element is selected as the effect element to be executed a plurality of times,
As a control to cause the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, the effect execution means does not display a time parameter indicating whether it is within a time when the input operation can be accepted. A game machine that features it.

  The player may perform the input operation at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times. Here, when the time parameter is displayed on the effect execution means, the player recognizes that the input operation has been performed at different timings in each of the operation acceptance effect elements executed a plurality of times, and the same content is used. Even if the operation receiving effect element is executed a plurality of times, there is a possibility that it is difficult for the player to feel a sense of visual perception with respect to the operation receiving effect element executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature P3, since the time parameter is not displayed on the effect execution means when causing the effect execution means to execute the operation acceptance effect element a plurality of times, it is suppressed that the player is unlikely to feel a sense of visual appearance. Can.

[Feature P4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3.
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined information is satisfied before the special information becomes the target of the comparison.
The control means, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the effect execution means before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the target of the matching. A game machine characterized by starting execution of a rendering element which is a target to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature P4, the execution of the effect element which is the target to be performed a plurality of times is started before the special information determined to satisfy the predetermined condition becomes the target of the collation. The player can be given a sense of anticipation for a sense of sight.

<Feature Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eighth and ninth embodiments.

[Feature Q1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) for launching game balls;
A ball entry unit (in the eighth embodiment, the second starting opening 208a, in the ninth embodiment, the second starting opening 308a) capable of entering the launched game ball;
A passing portion through which the launched game ball can pass (through gate 206 in the eighth embodiment, through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment),
In the state of the ball entering portion, the first state in which the game ball can not or can not enter the ball into the ball entering portion, and the ball entering the ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. State transition means (on and off door 208b in the eighth embodiment, and on the on-off door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning to the second state which is the state;
Distribution means (allocation mechanism 204 in the eighth embodiment, and first alternate distribution mechanism 304 and second alternate distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for distributing the reached gaming balls into a plurality of paths;
The first route (route R1 in the eighth embodiment, route R11 in the ninth embodiment) configured to allow the distributed gaming balls to pass through the passage portion,
The second route (route R2 in the eighth embodiment, route R2 and route R12 in the ninth embodiment) configured such that the distributed gaming balls can not pass through the passage section,
Equipped with
The distribution means is
While distributing the reached game ball to the first route,
The game balls arriving later than the game balls distributed to the first path are distributed to the second path,
The game balls arriving after the game balls distributed to the second path are configured to be distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed gaming balls can enter the ball entry portion when the ball entry portion is in the second state. A game machine characterized in that it is configured.

  According to the feature Q1, the gaming balls distributed to the first path (hereinafter also referred to as the first gaming balls) can pass through the passing part and the ball entering part is in the second state In some cases, it is possible to enter the ball entry section. On the other hand, since the game ball reached after the first game ball (hereinafter also referred to as the second game ball) is distributed to the second route, it is impossible to pass through the passing part and the ball is entered. When the part is in the second state, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entry part. That is, of the first and second gaming balls, only the first gaming ball can pass through the passing part, and whether each of the first and second gaming balls enters the ball entry part Whether or not it depends on whether or not the ball entry part is in the second state at the timing when the first and second gaming balls reach the ball entry part. Therefore, among the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball), the number of game balls that may pass through the passing part is one, and the ball is entered into the ball entering part Since the number of balls can be changed depending on the state of the ball entry part, diversification of the game can be achieved.

  For example, the length of time in which the ball entry part transitions from the first state to the second state, or the number of times the ball entry part transitions from the first state to the second state, or the like When the timing at which the ball entering part transitions from the first state to the second state is controlled to be different for each mode, the ball entering part of the first and second gaming balls Since the number of game balls entering the ball can be made different for each mode, diversification of games can be achieved.

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine according to the feature Q1,
Lottery execution means (a process shown in step S4509 in FIG. 76) for executing a lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the passage portion;
Control means (process shown in FIG. 76, FIG. 77 and FIG. 83) for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature Q2, the control means controls the state transition means on the basis of the result of the lottery performed triggered by the passage of the gaming ball through the passing part. Since the second gaming ball does not pass through the passage section, the control means is configured to control the first and second gaming balls in a situation where the gaming ball is continuously fired at a predetermined interval and at a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means. Whether the state of the ball entering part at the timing when each of the balls reached the ball entering part is the first state or the second state, ie, each of the first and second gaming balls is put in the ball entering part Whether or not to enter the ball is determined according to the result of the lottery which is triggered by the passage of the first gaming ball through the passing part and the control mode of the state transition means by the control means. Therefore, one game ball (first game ball) controls whether or not each of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) is caused to enter the ball entry portion. It can be realized by a series of control triggered by passing through the passage part.

[Feature Q3]
The gaming machine according to the feature Q2,
The control means has a plurality of control modes (first and second high frequency support modes in the eighth embodiment, and first to third high frequency support modes in the ninth embodiment) for controlling the state transition means. Yes,
The length of time in which the second state is maintained after the ball entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state for each control mode, or after the gaming ball passes the passing portion The length of time until the ball entering part starts the transition from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball entering part transitions from the first state to the second state, A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the timings at which the ball entry section transitions from the first state to the second state is different.

  According to the feature Q3, the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion of the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball) may be made different for each control mode As it is possible, it is possible to diversify the game.

[Feature Q4]
The gaming machine according to the feature Q2 or the feature Q3, wherein
A display unit (general drawing unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution unit;
The time from when the game ball passes through the passage section until the display means displays the result of the lottery performed with the game ball passing through the passage section is:
A game machine characterized by being set to a time shorter than a time from the game ball passing through the passage part to the game ball reaching the ball entry part.

  According to the feature Q4, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing when the first gaming ball, which has passed the passage unit and became the trigger of the lottery, reaches the ball entry unit. . Since the control means starts the control based on the result of the lottery after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the first gaming ball that has passed the passing part and became the trigger for the lottery enters the ball The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing of reaching.

  For example, the control means can realize the control mode in which the ball entering portion is in the second state at the timing when the first gaming ball having passed the passing portion reaches the ball entering portion.

[Feature Q5]
The gaming machine according to the feature Q4,
After the game ball passes through the passage section, the display means displays the result of the lottery executed with the game ball passing through the passage section, and the ball entry unit is in the second state. The time to start the transition to
A game machine characterized by being set to a time shorter than a time from the game ball passing through the passage part to the game ball reaching the ball entry part.

  According to the feature Q5, the control means can realize the control mode in which the ball entering portion is in the second state at the timing when the first gaming ball having passed the passing portion reaches the ball entering portion Become.

[Feature Q6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q5,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where gaming balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals with a predetermined firing strength by the firing means, the gaming balls distributed to the first path and passing through the passing part reach the ball entering part The first ball entry portion is in the second state, and the second ball entry portion is in the first state at the timing when the game ball distributed to the second path reaches the ball entry portion. Control mode (the first high frequency support mode in the eighth embodiment), and
In a situation where gaming balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals with a predetermined firing strength by the firing means, the gaming balls distributed to the first path and passing through the passing part reach the ball entering part The second ball is in the second state at the timing, and the second ball is in the second state at the timing when the game ball distributed to the second path reaches the ball. Control mode (the second high frequency support mode in the eighth embodiment), and
A gaming machine characterized by having:

  According to the feature Q6, the first game ball enters the ball entry part, but the second game ball does not enter the ball entry part, the first control mode, the first game ball and the second Since it is possible to realize the second control mode in which both of the gaming balls enter the ball entry portion, it is possible to add tonation to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature Q7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q5, wherein
The distribution means is
While distributing the one game ball which reached to the first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
The N (N is an integer of 2 or more) game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path are distributed to the second path (path R2 and path R12 in the ninth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized in that one gaming ball reached after the N gaming balls distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path.

  According to the feature Q7, since one gaming ball is distributed to the first path and N gaming balls are distributed to the second path, each of (N + 1) gaming balls is inserted. Control of whether or not to enter a part can be realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of one gaming ball (first gaming ball). As a result, the game can be diversified. For example, if the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion among the (N + 1) game balls is set to be different for each control mode, various controls with different numbers of game balls entering the ball entry portion It becomes possible to realize the mode.

[Feature Q8]
The gaming machine according to the feature Q7,
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery when the game ball passes through the passage section;
Display means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means;
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where gaming balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals with a predetermined firing strength by the firing means, one gaming ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing part enters the ball The ball entering portion is in the second state at the timing to reach the part, and the ball entering portion is at the timing in which all the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the ball entering portion A first control mode (a first high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) which is a first state;
In a situation where gaming balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals with a predetermined firing strength by the firing means, one gaming ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing part enters the ball The timing at which the ball reaches the second position, and at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the ball at the timing at which the ball reaches the club And the second control mode (the second high frequency support mode and the third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball entry unit is in the second state.
A gaming machine characterized by having:

  According to the feature Q8, the first game ball enters the ball entry part but the N game balls do not enter the ball entry part in the first control mode, and the first game ball enters the ball entry part Since at least one game ball of the N game balls entering the ball can realize the second control mode in which the ball enters the ball entering portion, it is possible to give a tonation to the game, the game Improve the interest of

[Feature Q9]
The gaming machine according to the feature Q7 or the feature Q8,
The second path is constituted by N paths (path R2 and path R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The sorting means is an alternate sorting mechanism (a first alternate sorting mechanism 304 and a second alternate sorting mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for alternately sorting game balls to any of two paths. A game machine characterized by being configured by being combined in multiple stages.

  According to the feature Q9, the function of distributing one game ball reached to the first route and allocating N game balls reached later than the game ball distributed to the first route to the second route is electronic It can be realized with a simple configuration as compared with the configuration realized using control or the like. In addition, as a structure which realizes the said function using electronic control etc., for example, it measures the number of the game balls which reached using a counter etc., and uses a structure etc. which is driven by electric power etc. Can be listed.

[Feature Q10]
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q9,
A third path (path R2 in Example 1 and Example 4 in FIG. 84) configured so that distributed gaming balls can not pass through the passage section,
The distribution means is
While distributing the one game ball reached to the first route (route R11 in the example 1 of FIG. 84, route R111 in the example 4 of FIG. 84),
At least one game ball of the plurality of game balls that arrived later than the game ball distributed to the first path is the second path (in the example 1 of FIG. 84, the path R12, in the example 4 of FIG. Distribute to R12 and route R112),
Distribute at least one gaming ball of the plurality of gaming balls arriving after the gaming ball distributed to the first path to the third path,
The game ball distributed to the second path and the one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the third path are configured to be distributed to the first path,
The third path is configured such that the distributed gaming balls can not enter the ball entry portion even if the ball entry portion is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature Q10, since the distributed game balls are provided with the third path configured to be unable to enter the ball entry part, diversification of the game can be further achieved. For example, if a large number of gaming balls are distributed to the third path, the number of gaming balls entering the ball entry part can be reduced.

<Feature R group>
The feature R group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature R1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) for launching game balls;
A ball entry portion (a second starting opening 308a in the ninth embodiment) capable of entering a ball that has been launched;
Execution means (main control device 60) for executing a ball-entering assistance mode (high frequency support mode) for assisting the ball entry of the game ball to the ball entry part;
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a winning ball based on the game ball entering the ball entering portion;
A gaming machine comprising
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where the game balls are fired continuously at a predetermined interval with a predetermined firing intensity by the launch means is defined as the ball exit rate If you
The execution means is
It is possible to execute n-type (n is an integer of 2 or more) entering assistance modes having different ball exit rates,
The game ball reduction mode (the first high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) having at least the above-mentioned bowling rate less than 1 as one of the n types of ball-entry assisting modes, and the above-mentioned bowling rate It is possible to execute the game ball increase mode (the third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) exceeding 1 and
The ball exit rate in the case where the i-th (i is an integer from 1 to n) entry assistance mode is executed is defined as Mi,
When the ratio at which the i-th ball-entering assist mode is executed when the ball-entering assist mode is executed is defined as Pi,
The following relational expression (R1)

A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to satisfy the following.

  According to the feature R1, although the game ball increase mode having a ball out rate exceeding 1 is executable as one aspect of the ball entry assistance mode, the ball exit as a total when the ball entry assistance mode is executed Since the rate is less than 1, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in the shooting ability of the player while making it possible to give the player a feeling of excitement in the game ball increase mode. As a result, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

[Feature R2]
The gaming machine according to the feature R1,
The execution means is capable of executing the plurality of types of game ball increase modes (the third high frequency support mode and the fourth high frequency support mode in the fifth modification) having different ball ejection rates. .

  According to the feature R2, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of game ball increase modes with different ball exit rates, so it is possible to make a difference in the degree of high feeling given to the player in the game ball increase mode. As a result, it is possible to impart tonation to the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Features R3]
The gaming machine according to the feature R1 or the feature R2, wherein
A passing portion (through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment) through which the launched game ball can pass;
In the state of the ball entering portion, the first state in which the game ball can not or can not enter the ball into the ball entering portion, and the ball entering the ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. State transition means (open / close door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning to a second state which is a state;
Lottery execution means (a process shown in step S4509 in FIG. 76) for executing a lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the passage portion;
Control means (process shown in FIGS. 76 and 83) for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery;
Distribution means (the first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and the second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for distributing the reached gaming balls into a plurality of paths;
It is possible for the distributed game balls to pass through the passage section and to be able to enter the ball entry section when the ball entry section is in the second state. A first path (path R11 in the ninth embodiment) configured in
It is impossible for the distributed game balls to pass through the passage section, and when the ball entry section is in the second state, it is possible to enter the ball entry section. A second path (path R2 and path R12 in the ninth embodiment) configured as described above;
Equipped with
The distribution means is
While distributing one game ball which reached to the first route,
The N game balls that arrived after the game balls distributed to the first path are distributed to the second path,
One game ball reached after the N game balls distributed to the second path is configured to be distributed to the first path,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and in the game ball increase mode, one of the control modes is executed by the control means. The mode to be realized,
The gaming machine decrease mode is a mode realized by execution of another control mode of the plurality of control modes by the control means.

  According to the feature R3, one gaming ball (hereinafter also referred to as a first gaming ball) distributed to the first path can pass through the passing part and the ball entering part is the second one. When it is in the state of (1), it is possible to enter the ball in the ball entry section. On the other hand, since the N game balls reached after the first game ball are distributed to the second route, they can not pass through the passing part and the ball entry part is in the second state. In this case, it is possible to enter the ball in the ball entry section. That is, of the first gaming ball and the N gaming balls, only the first gaming ball can pass through the passing portion, and each of the first gaming ball and the N gaming balls Whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry unit is determined by the timing at which each of the first game ball and the N game balls reached the ball entry unit, the ball entry unit is second. It depends on whether or not it is in a state.

  Since the N game balls reached after the first game ball do not pass through the passing part, the control means is in a situation where the game balls are being fired at predetermined intervals and at predetermined intervals by the firing unit. , Whether the state of the ball entering portion at the timing when the respective game balls of the first game ball and the N game balls reach the ball entering portion is the first state or the second state, That is, whether or not each game ball of the first game ball and the N game balls is to be entered into the ball entry unit is triggered by the passage of the first game ball as a trigger. It is determined according to the result of the lottery and the control mode of the state transition means set for each control mode. Therefore, the control of whether or not each of the (N + 1) gaming balls is entered into the ball entry unit is triggered by the fact that one gaming ball (first gaming ball) has passed through the passing part. It can be realized by a series of control.

  Furthermore, according to the feature R3, the length of time for maintaining the second state after the ball entering part transitions from the first state to the second state, or the length of the ball entering part from the first state to the second state When the number of times of transition to the state, the timing at which the ball entering section transitions from the first state to the second state, etc. are controlled to be different for each control mode, (N + 1) game balls Since the number of gaming balls entering the ball entry part of the above can be made to differ for each control mode, the ball exit rate in each control mode can be set to a different value.

[Features R4]
The gaming machine according to the feature R3,
The control means may operate as the plurality of control modes.
In a situation where gaming balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals with a predetermined firing strength by the firing means, one gaming ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing part enters the ball The ball entering portion is in the second state at the timing to reach the part, and the ball entering portion is at the timing in which all the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the ball entering portion A first control mode (a first high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) which is a first state;
In a situation where gaming balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals with a predetermined firing strength by the firing means, one gaming ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing part enters the ball The timing at which the ball reaches the second position, and at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the ball at the timing at which the ball reaches the club And the second control mode (the second high frequency support mode and the third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball entry unit is in the second state.
Have
The game ball increase mode is a mode realized by execution of the second control mode by the control means,
The gaming machine decrease mode is a mode realized by execution of the first control mode by the control means.

  According to the feature R4, the first game ball enters the ball entry section but the N game balls do not enter the ball entry mode, and the first game ball enters the ball entry section Ball At least one of the N game balls can realize the game ball increase mode in which the ball enters the ball entry part, so that it is possible to give a tonation to the game, and the fun of the game It can improve.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the ninth embodiment.

[Feature S1]
Launch means (game ball launch mechanism 81) for launching game balls;
Distribution means (the first alternating distribution mechanism 304 and the second alternating distribution mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for distributing the reached gaming balls into a plurality of paths;
Equipped with
The distribution means is
While distributing the one game ball which reached to the first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
A second path (path in the ninth embodiment) in which N (N is an integer of 2 or more) game balls arrived after the gaming ball distributed to the first path is a path different from the first path Distribute to R2 and route R12),
A gaming machine characterized in that one gaming ball reached after the N gaming balls distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path.

  According to the feature S1, of the (N + 1) game balls, one game ball (hereinafter also referred to as a first game ball) is assigned to the first route, and the N reached after the first game ball Since individual game balls can be distributed to the second path, diversification of the game can be achieved by effectively using the first path and the second path, and the interest of the game can be improved. be able to.

  For example, in the case where a ball entry portion capable of entering the game ball or a predetermined bonus is provided at a position where only the first game ball distributed to the first path can reach, (N + 1) Of the individual game balls, only the first game ball is allowed to reach the ball entry unit and the predetermined prize, and the N game balls reached later than the first game ball are placed in the ball entry unit and the predetermined prize It becomes possible not to reach. Furthermore, by setting the value of N (the number of gaming balls distributed to the second path) to a desired value at the time of designing the gaming machine, the ratio of gaming balls reaching the ball entry portion and the predetermined prize is set. It can be set to a desired ratio. Therefore, while being able to improve the freedom degree in design of a game machine, diversification of a game can be achieved.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine according to the feature S1,
A passing portion (through gate 306 in the ninth embodiment) through which the game ball can pass,
The first path is configured such that gaming balls distributed to the first path can pass through the passage portion,
A game machine characterized in that the second path is configured such that game balls distributed to the second path can not pass through the passage portion.

  According to the feature S2, of the (N + 1) game balls, only the first game ball can pass through the passing portion. Therefore, in the case where the predetermined process is executed in response to the game ball passing through the passage section, the predetermined process is performed every time the (N + 1) game balls reach the distribution means. It can be run at a rate of times.

  For example, in the case where a predetermined lottery is performed in response to the game ball passing through the passage section, the predetermined lottery is performed each time (N + 1) game balls reach the sorting means. It will be executed at a rate of times. Furthermore, by setting the value of N (the number of gaming balls distributed to the second route) to a desired value at the time of designing the gaming machine, the frequency at which the predetermined lottery is executed is set to the desired frequency. be able to. Therefore, while being able to improve the freedom degree in design of a game machine, diversification of a game can be achieved.

[Feature S3]
The gaming machine according to feature S2,
A ball entry portion (a second starting opening 308a in the ninth embodiment) capable of entering a ball that has been launched;
In the state of the ball entering portion, the first state in which the game ball can not or can not enter the ball into the ball entering portion, and the ball entering the ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. State transition means (open / close door 308b in the ninth embodiment) for transitioning to a second state which is a state;
Equipped with
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed gaming balls can enter the ball entry portion when the ball entry portion is in the second state. A game machine characterized in that it is configured.

  According to the feature S3, the first gaming ball distributed to the first path can pass through the passing part, and when the ball entering part is in the second state, the ball entering part It is possible to enter the On the other hand, since the N game balls reached after the first game ball are distributed to the second route, they can not pass through the passing part and the ball entry part is in the second state. In this case, it is possible to enter the ball in the ball entry section. That is, of the first gaming ball and the N gaming balls, only the first gaming ball can pass through the passing portion, and each of the first gaming ball and the N gaming balls Whether or not the game ball enters the ball entry unit is determined by the timing at which each of the first game ball and the N game balls reached the ball entry unit, the ball entry unit is second. It depends on whether or not it is in a state. Therefore, among the (N + 1) game balls, the number of game balls that may pass through the passage section is one, and the number of game balls entering the ball section is in the state of the ball section. Because it can be changed depending on, it is possible to diversify the game.

  For example, the length of time in which the ball entry part transitions from the first state to the second state, or the number of times the ball entry part transitions from the first state to the second state, or the like In the case where the timing at which the ball entering part transitions from the first state to the second state is controlled to be different for each mode, the ball entering part of (N + 1) gaming balls is selected. Since the number of game balls to be entered can be made different for each mode, diversification of games can be achieved.

[Feature S4]
The gaming machine according to the feature S3,
Lottery execution means (a process shown in step S4509 in FIG. 76) for executing a lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the passage portion;
Control means (process shown in FIGS. 76 and 83) for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature S4, the control means controls the state transition means on the basis of the result of the lottery performed triggered by the passage of the gaming ball through the passing part. Since the N game balls reached after the first game ball do not pass through the passing part, the control means is in a situation where the game balls are being fired at predetermined intervals and at predetermined intervals by the firing unit. , Whether the state of the ball entering portion at the timing when the respective game balls of the first game ball and the N game balls reach the ball entering portion is the first state or the second state, That is, whether or not each game ball of the first game ball and the N game balls is to be entered into the ball entry unit is triggered by the passage of the first game ball as a trigger. It is determined according to the result of the lottery and the control mode of the state transition means by the control means. Therefore, the control of whether or not each of the (N + 1) gaming balls is entered into the ball entry unit is triggered by the fact that one gaming ball (first gaming ball) has passed through the passing part. It can be realized by a series of control.

[Feature S5]
The gaming machine according to the feature S4,
The control means has a plurality of control modes (first to third frequent support modes in the ninth embodiment) for controlling the state transition means,
The length of time in which the second state is maintained after the ball entering portion transitions from the first state to the second state for each control mode, or after the gaming ball passes the passing portion The length of time until the ball entering part starts the transition from the first state to the second state, the number of times the ball entering part transitions from the first state to the second state, A gaming machine, wherein at least one of the timings at which the ball entry section transitions from the first state to the second state is different.

  According to the feature S5, since the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion among the (N + 1) game balls can be made to be different for each control mode, diversification of the game can be achieved. it can.

[Feature S6]
The gaming machine according to the feature S5,
A display unit (general drawing unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution unit;
The time from when the game ball passes through the passage section until the display means displays the result of the lottery performed with the game ball passing through the passage section is:
A game machine characterized by being set to a time shorter than a time from the game ball passing through the passage part to the game ball reaching the ball entry part.

  According to the feature S6, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the timing when the first game ball, which has passed the passage unit and became the trigger of the lottery, reaches the ball entry unit. . Since the control means starts the control based on the result of the lottery after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the first gaming ball that has passed the passing part and became the trigger for the lottery enters the ball The control based on the result of the lottery can be started before the timing of reaching.

  For example, the control means can realize the control mode in which the ball entering portion is in the second state at the timing when the first gaming ball having passed the passing portion reaches the ball entering portion.

[Feature S7]
The gaming machine according to the feature S7,
After the game ball passes through the passage section, the display means displays the result of the lottery executed with the game ball passing through the passage section, and the ball entry unit is in the second state. The time to start the transition to
A game machine characterized by being set to a time shorter than a time from the game ball passing through the passage part to the game ball reaching the ball entry part.

  According to the feature S7, the control means can realize the control mode in which the ball entering portion is in the second state at the timing when the first gaming ball having passed the passing portion reaches the ball entering portion Become.

[Feature S8]
The gaming machine according to the feature S7,
The control means has a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means, and as the plurality of control modes,
In a situation where gaming balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals with a predetermined firing strength by the firing means, one gaming ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing part enters the ball The ball entering portion is in the second state at the timing to reach the part, and the ball entering portion is at the timing in which all the N game balls distributed to the second path reach the ball entering portion A first control mode (a first high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) which is a first state;
In a situation where gaming balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals with a predetermined firing strength by the firing means, one gaming ball distributed to the first path and passing through the passing part enters the ball The timing at which the ball reaches the second position, and at least one of the N game balls distributed to the second path reaches the ball at the timing at which the ball reaches the club And the second control mode (the second high frequency support mode and the third high frequency support mode in the ninth embodiment) in which the ball entry unit is in the second state.
A gaming machine characterized by having:

  According to the feature S8, the first control mode in which the first gaming ball enters the ball entry portion but the N gaming balls do not enter the ball entry portion, and the first game ball in the ball entry portion Since at least one game ball of the N game balls entering the ball can realize the second control mode in which the ball enters the ball entering portion, it is possible to give a tonation to the game, the game Improve the interest of

[Feature S9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S8, wherein
The second path is constituted by a plurality of paths (path R2 and path R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The sorting means is an alternate sorting mechanism (a first alternate sorting mechanism 304 and a second alternate sorting mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for alternately sorting game balls to any of two paths. A game machine characterized by being configured by being combined in multiple stages.

  According to the feature S9, the function of distributing one game ball reached to the first route and allocating N game balls arriving later than the game ball distributed to the first route to the second route It can be realized with a simple configuration as compared with the configuration realized using control or the like. In addition, as a structure which realizes the said function using electronic control etc., for example, it measures the number of the game balls which reached using a counter etc., and uses a structure etc. which is driven by electric power etc. Can be listed.

[Feature S10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S9, wherein
It is equipped with a third path (path R2 in example 4 in FIG. 84) configured such that the distributed gaming balls can not pass through the passage section,
The distribution means is
While distributing the one game ball which reached to the said 1st course (course R111 in example 4 of Drawing 84),
At least N gaming balls of the plurality of game balls that arrived later than the game balls distributed to the first path are distributed to the second path (path R12 and path R112 in Example 4 of FIG. 84),
Distribute at least one gaming ball of the plurality of gaming balls arriving after the gaming ball distributed to the first path to the third path,
The game ball distributed to the second path and the one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the third path are configured to be distributed to the first path,
The third path is configured such that the distributed gaming balls can not enter the ball entry portion even if the ball entry portion is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature S10, since the distributed game balls are provided with the third path configured to be unable to enter the ball entry part, diversification of the game can be further achieved. For example, if a large number of gaming balls are distributed to the third path, the number of gaming balls entering the ball entry part can be reduced.

<Feature T group>
The feature T group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the tenth embodiment.

[Feature T1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A ball entry unit (a second start opening 208a in the tenth embodiment), which allows the game ball flowing through the game area to enter the ball;
A passage portion (through gate 206 in the tenth embodiment) through which game balls circulating the game area can pass;
In the state of the ball entering portion, the first state in which the game ball can not or can not enter the ball into the ball entering portion, and the ball entering the ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. State transition means (open / close door 208b in the tenth embodiment) for transitioning to a second state which is a state;
A control unit that controls the state transition unit when a game ball passes through the passage unit;
Equipped with
The control means
Based on the gaming state (in the tenth embodiment, the result of the electric combination opening lottery and the type of the support mode),
A transition start waiting time which is a time from the game ball passing through the passage portion to the transition of the ball entry portion from the first state to the second state (generally in the tenth embodiment) It is possible to set the length of the fluctuation time of the diagram unit 38 + the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b) to a plurality of types of lengths,
In a situation where the gaming balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals and at predetermined intervals by the launching means, a predetermined time (in the tenth embodiment 1.2 after the gaming sphere GB1 passes through the through gate 206) The number of game balls entering the ball entry portion per second (FIG. 87, FIG. 89) differs depending on the length of the transition start waiting time set by the control means.

  According to the feature T1, since the number of game balls entering the ball entry can be changed by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to add intonation in the game and improve the interest of the game be able to. Further, according to the feature T1, for example, even when the time for the ball entry portion to maintain the second state (in the tenth embodiment, the opening time of the open / close door 208b) is set to the same length, transition By changing the length of the start waiting time, it is possible to change the number of game balls entering the ball entry part, so the design freedom of the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature T2]
The gaming machine according to feature T1,
Lottery execution means (a process shown in step S5109 in FIG. 91) for executing a lottery triggered by the game ball passing through the passage portion;
Display means (general drawing unit 38) for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means;
Equipped with
The control means
Based on the gaming state (in the tenth embodiment, the result of the electric combination opening lottery),
The time from the display of the result of the lottery to the start of the transition from the first state to the second state after the display means is displayed (in the tenth embodiment, the opening and closing door 208b is opened It is possible to set the length of the waiting time) to a plurality of types of lengths.

  According to the feature T2, the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the common drawing unit 38 + the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b) is until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means after the gaming ball passes through the passing portion Time (the fluctuation time of the general drawing unit 38) and the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (open / close door 208b And the open waiting time of the Therefore, according to the feature T2, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing part to when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38) is set to the same length. Even if there are multiple types of time until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (the open standby time of the open / close door 208b) after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means By setting the length, it is possible to set the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 + the waiting time for opening the open / close door 208b) to a plurality of types of lengths. That is, according to feature T2, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry part starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (opening standby time of the open / close door 208b) Changing the transition start waiting time (variation time of the drawing unit 38 + opening standby time of the open / close door 208b) and changing the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion Can.

[Feature T3]
A game machine according to feature T1 or feature T2, wherein
The ball entry unit is configured to be capable of entering a game ball having passed through the passage unit in the second state,
The control means
The time from when the game ball passes through the passage section until the display means displays the result of the lottery performed with the game ball passing through the passage section (variation of the drawing unit 38 Time,
After the game ball passes the passage section, set the time shorter than the time it takes the game ball to reach the ball entry section.
A game machine characterized by

  According to the feature T3, the display means can display the result of the lottery before the game ball which has passed the passage unit and becomes the trigger of the lottery reaches the ball entry unit. As a result, after the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means, the control means enters the ball entering portion before the game ball which has passed the passing portion and becomes the trigger of the lottery reaches the ball entering portion. It is possible to execute control to start the transition from the first state to the second state. Therefore, the game ball (the game ball which passed the passing part and became the trigger of the lottery) which triggered the transition of the ball entry part to the second state enters the ball entry part which has transitioned to the second state It is possible to

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3.
The ball entering portion is configured to be capable of entering the ball into the gaming ball having passed through the passage portion, when the ball entering portion is in the second state.
The control means
The transition start waiting time which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passage portion to when the ball entry portion starts transitioning from the first state to the second state Set the fluctuation time of the figure unit 38 + the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b to a time shorter than the time from the game ball passing through the passage section to the game ball reaching the ball entry section Control of the
The transition start waiting time which is the time from when the game ball passes through the passage portion to when the ball entry portion starts transitioning from the first state to the second state Set the fluctuation time of the figure unit 38 + the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b to a time longer than the time from the game ball passing through the passage section to the game ball reaching the ball entry section Control of the
A game machine characterized by being capable of performing.

  According to the feature T4, when the first control is executed, the ball entering part transitions to the second state at the timing when the gaming ball having passed the passing part reaches the ball entering part, so the passing part When the game ball having passed through the ball enters the ball entering part and the second control is executed, the ball entering part still receives the ball at the timing when the game ball passed through the passing part reaches the ball entering part. Since it has not transitioned to the state of 2, the said game ball which passed the passage part will not enter a ball entering part. That is, according to the feature T4, since the number of game balls entering the ball entry can be changed by changing the transition start waiting time, it is possible to add intonation in the game and improve the interest of the game Can be

[Feature T5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T4, wherein
Distribution means (alternating distribution mechanism 204 in the tenth embodiment) for distributing the reached game balls into a plurality of routes;
A first route (route R1 in the tenth embodiment) configured to allow the distributed gaming balls to pass through the passage section,
The second route (route R2 in the tenth embodiment) configured such that the distributed game balls can not pass through the passage section,
Equipped with
The distribution means is
While distributing the reached game ball to the first route,
The game balls arriving later than the game balls distributed to the first path are distributed to the second path,
The game balls arriving after the game balls distributed to the second path are configured to be distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed gaming balls can enter the ball entry portion when the ball entry portion is in the second state. A game machine characterized in that it is configured.

  According to the feature T5, the gaming balls distributed to the first path (hereinafter also referred to as the first gaming balls) can pass through the passing part and the ball entry part is in the second state In some cases, it is possible to enter the ball entry section. On the other hand, since the game ball reached after the first game ball (hereinafter also referred to as the second game ball) is distributed to the second route, it is impossible to pass through the passing part and the ball is entered. When the part is in the second state, it is possible to enter the ball into the ball entry part. That is, of the first and second gaming balls, only the first gaming ball can pass through the passing part, and whether each of the first and second gaming balls enters the ball entry part Whether or not it depends on whether or not the ball entry part is in the second state at the timing when the first and second gaming balls reach the ball entry part. Therefore, among the two game balls (the first game ball and the second game ball), the number of game balls that may pass through the passing part is one, and the ball is entered into the ball entering part The number of balls can be varied depending on the state of the ball entry part. Then, one game ball (first game ball) controls whether or not each of the two game balls (first game ball and second game ball) is caused to enter the ball entry portion. It can be realized by a series of control triggered by passing through the passage part.

Furthermore, according to the feature T5, the transition start waiting time can be set to a plurality of types of lengths triggered by the passage of the first gaming ball through the passing part, so that, for example, two gaming balls Set the transition start wait time that both the 1st game ball and the 2nd game ball enter the ball entry area (Control in the 10th embodiment when winning the first type electric combination opening) (Fig. 87)) Set the transition start wait time in which only the second gaming ball of the two gaming balls (the first gaming ball and the second gaming ball) will enter the ball entry part (Control in the case where the second type electric power company opening is won in the tenth embodiment (FIG. 89)). That is, according to the feature T5, by changing the length of the transition start waiting time, it is possible to change the number of gaming balls entering the ball entry portion, so that it is possible to add intonation in the game, The interest of the game can be improved.
[Feature T6]
The gaming machine according to feature T5,
The distribution means is
While distributing the one game ball which reached to the first route (route R11 in the ninth embodiment),
The N (N is an integer of 2 or more) game balls arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path are distributed to the second path (path R2 and path R12 in the ninth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized in that one gaming ball reached after the N gaming balls distributed to the second path is distributed to the first path.

  According to the feature T6, one game ball is distributed to the first path, and N game balls are distributed to the second path. Therefore, each of (N + 1) game balls is inserted. Control of whether or not to enter a part can be realized by a series of controls triggered by the passage of one gaming ball (first gaming ball). Furthermore, according to the feature T6, the transition start waiting time can be set to a plurality of types of lengths, triggered by the passage of the first gaming ball through the passing portion. That is, according to the feature T6, by changing the length of the transition start waiting time, it is possible to change the number of game balls entering the ball entry part of the (N + 1) game balls, It is possible to add intonation to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature T7]
The gaming machine according to feature T6,
The second path is constituted by N paths (path R2 and path R12 in the ninth embodiment),
The sorting means is an alternate sorting mechanism (a first alternate sorting mechanism 304 and a second alternate sorting mechanism 305 in the ninth embodiment) for alternately sorting game balls to any of two paths. A game machine characterized by being configured by being combined in multiple stages.

  According to the feature T7, the function of distributing one game ball reached to the first route and allocating N game balls reached later than the game ball distributed to the first route to the second route It can be realized with a simple configuration as compared with the configuration realized using control or the like. In addition, as a structure which realizes the said function using electronic control etc., for example, it measures the number of the game balls which reached using a counter etc., and uses a structure etc. which is driven by electric power etc. Can be listed.

[Feature T8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T5 to T7, wherein
A third path (path R2 in Example 1 and Example 4 in FIG. 84) configured so that distributed gaming balls can not pass through the passage section,
The distribution means is
While distributing the one game ball reached to the first route (route R11 in the example 1 of FIG. 84, route R111 in the example 4 of FIG. 84),
At least one game ball of the plurality of game balls that arrived later than the game ball distributed to the first path is the second path (in the example 1 of FIG. 84, the path R12, in the example 4 of FIG. Distribute to R12 and route R112),
Distribute at least one gaming ball of the plurality of gaming balls arriving after the gaming ball distributed to the first path to the third path,
The game ball distributed to the second path and the one game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the third path are configured to be distributed to the first path,
The third path is configured such that the distributed gaming balls can not enter the ball entry portion even if the ball entry portion is in the second state. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature T8, since the distributed game balls are provided with the third path configured to be unable to enter the ball entry part, diversification of the game can be further achieved. For example, if a large number of gaming balls are distributed to the third path, the number of gaming balls entering the ball entry part can be reduced.

<Feature U group>
The feature U group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature U1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A ball entry unit (the second start opening 208a (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment), which allows the game ball flowing through the game area to enter the ball;
In the state of the ball entering portion, the first state in which the game ball can not or can not enter the ball into the ball entering portion, and the ball entering the ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. State transition means (open / close door 208b (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning to a second state which is a state;
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball having entered the ball entry portion;
A passage portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which game balls circulating the game area can pass;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery based on passage of gaming balls through the passage section;
Display means for starting variable display of identification information based on passage of gaming ball through the passing part, and ending the variable display to stop display identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery by the lottery execution unit (Pub unit 38),
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery by the lottery execution means;
Equipped with
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where the game balls are fired continuously at a predetermined interval with a predetermined firing intensity by the launch means is defined as the ball exit rate In the case of
The control means
There are a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
Transition start waiting time until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state after the display means starts the variable display (a general drawing unit in the eleventh embodiment) By setting the fluctuation time of 38 + the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b to different lengths for each of the control modes,
The first control mode (the first high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball exit rate is less than 1;
The second control mode (the second high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball exit rate is 1;
The third control mode (the third high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1;
A game machine characterized by being executable.

  According to the feature U1, by changing the transition start waiting time, the first control mode in which the ball out ratio is less than 1, the second control mode in which the ball out ratio is 1, and the ball out ratio of 1 And the third control mode can be executed, so that it is possible to add intonation to the game and to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the feature U1, for example, even when the time when the ball entry portion maintains the second state (the opening time of the open / close door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition If the length of the start waiting time is changed, the above-described three control modes can be executed, so that the design freedom of the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature U2]
The gaming machine according to the feature U1, which is
Alternating distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for alternately distributing the reached gaming balls into two paths;
The first route (route R1 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured to allow the distributed gaming balls to pass through the passage section;
The second route (route R2 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured such that the distributed gaming balls can not pass through the passing portion;
Equipped with
The alternating distribution means is
While distributing one game ball which reached to the first route,
One game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path is distributed to the second path,
One game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the second path is configured to be distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed gaming balls can enter the ball entry portion when the ball entry portion is in the second state. Is configured and
In a situation where gaming balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals with a predetermined firing strength by the firing means, the number of gaming balls entering the ball entering portion per predetermined time is set for each of the control modes. It changes with the length of the said transition start waiting time. The game machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature U2, the first control mode in which the ball out ratio is less than 1 and the second control mode in which the ball out ratio is 1 by the simple configuration using only one alternating distribution means; It is possible to execute a third control mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds one. That is, since the mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, it is possible to effectively utilize the game area, such as disposing other features in the vacant game area.

[Feature U3]
The gaming machine according to the feature U1 or the feature U2, wherein
The control means
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed, to the time when the ball entry unit starts the transition from the first state to the second state (open / close door 208b in the eleventh embodiment It is possible to set the length of the open standby time) to a different length for each of the control modes.

  According to the feature U3, the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the common drawing unit 38 + the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b) is until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means after the game ball passes through the passing portion Time (the fluctuation time of the general drawing unit 38) and the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (open / close door 208b And the open waiting time of the Therefore, according to the feature U3, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage section until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38) is set to the same length. Even when there is a result of lottery, the time until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening and closing the open / close door 208b) is different length By setting it to, it is possible to set the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 + the waiting time for opening the open / close door 208b) to different lengths. That is, according to the feature U3, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry portion starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (opening standby time of the open / close door 208b) Changing the transition start waiting time (variation time of the drawing unit 38 + opening standby time of the open / close door 208b) and changing the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion Can. As a result, it is possible to realize a first control mode in which the ball out rate is less than 1, a second control mode in which the ball out rate is 1, and a third control mode in which the ball out rate exceeds 1 It becomes possible.

<Feature V group>
The feature V group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature V1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A ball entry unit (a second start opening 208a in the eleventh embodiment), which allows the game ball flowing through the game area to enter the ball;
In the state of the ball entering portion, the first state in which the game ball can not or can not enter the ball into the ball entering portion, and the ball entering the ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. State transition means (open / close door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning to the second state which is the state;
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball having entered the ball entry portion;
A ball entering lottery drawing execution unit that executes the ball entering lottery based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering part;
The variable display of identification information is started based on the game ball having entered the ball, and the variable display is ended and the result of the lottery for the ball by the lottery for executing the ball is And a lottery result display means (special drawing unit 37) for the ball entry unit for stopping and displaying the corresponding identification information;
Special gaming state transition means for transitioning to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which a bonus is given to the player based on the result of the lottery for the ball entry portion becoming a predetermined result (various big hits);
Start means for starting a high probability lottery mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the result of the lottery for the ball entry part is the predetermined result (various big hits) is improved;
Ending means for ending the high probability lottery mode;
A passage portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which game balls circulating the game area can pass;
Passage part lottery execution means for executing a passage part lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the passage part;
The variation display of the identification information is started based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion, and the variation display is ended, and the identification information corresponding to the result of the passing portion lottery by the passing portion lottery execution means And a lottery result display means (general drawing unit 38) for the passage section for stopping display of
Control means for causing the ball entering part to transition from the first state to the second state by controlling the state transition means based on the result of the passage part lottery by the passage part lottery execution means ,
Equipped with
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where the game balls are fired continuously at a predetermined interval with a predetermined firing intensity by the launch means is defined as the ball exit rate In the case of
The control means
There are a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
The first control mode (the first high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball exit rate is less than 1;
The second control mode (the second high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball exit rate is 1;
The third control mode (the third high frequency support mode in the eleventh embodiment) in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1;
Is feasible and
In the first control mode, the result of the ball sorting for lottery is the first result (4R normal jackpot A (FIG. 97) in the eleventh embodiment) among the predetermined results (various jackpots) Starting with the first control mode, and if the number of lotterys for ball entering performed after the first control mode is started, if the result of the lottery for ball entering is the predetermined result (various jackpots) End based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without
In the second control mode, the result of the lottery for the ball entering part is the second result (the 8R probability variation jackpot in the eleventh embodiment (FIG. 97)) among the predetermined results (various jackpots) Start based on the fact that the result of the ball sorting for lottery performed after the second control mode is started is ended based on the predetermined result (various jackpots),
In the third control mode, the result of the ball sorting for lottery is the third result (4R normal jackpot B (FIG. 97) in the eleventh embodiment) among the predetermined results (various jackpots) The number of times for the ball entering lottery performed after the third control mode is started, if the result of the ball entering lottery is the predetermined result (various jackpots) End based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without
The high probability lottery mode is started based on the second lottery result (the 8R probability variation jackpot) among the predetermined results, and the high probability lottery mode is started before the high probability lottery mode. It ends based on the result of the drawing for drawing ball part becoming the said 1st result (4R normal jackpot A) or the said 3rd result (4R normal jackpot B) among the predetermined results. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature V1, the high probability lottery mode is not started when the result of the ball entry lottery becomes the first result (4R normal jackpot A), but the first control mode (first high frequency support mode) is It is started. When the first control mode is started, entry of the gaming ball into the entry portion is promoted, so execution of the entry lottery is promoted. However, since the ball exit rate in the first control mode is less than 1, the game balls held by the player are decreasing. In the first control mode, the result of the ball entry lottery does not reach a predetermined result (various jackpots), and ends when the number of executions of the ball entry lottery reaches a specified number (100). Therefore, the player wants the predetermined result (various jackpots) in the ball entry lottery before the execution number of the ball entry lottery reaches the specified number and the first control mode ends. Play games while expecting. Also, since the player wants to minimize the decrease in the number of gaming balls on hand, the player plays a game while expecting to have a predetermined result (various jackpots) in an early lottery for ball entry as much as possible.

  Furthermore, according to the feature V1, when the result of the ball entry lottery becomes the second result (8R probability variation jackpot), the high probability lottery mode is started, and the second control mode (second high frequency support mode) ) Is started. When the high probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the ball entry lottery is a predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved. In addition, when the second control mode is started, entry of the gaming ball into the entry portion is promoted, so execution of the entry lottery is promoted. Since the ball exit rate in the second control mode is 1, the game balls held by the player neither increase nor decrease. Then, the high probability lottery mode is continued at least until the result of the lottery for entering the ball is a predetermined result (various jackpots). Further, the second control mode is continued until the result of the ball entry lottery becomes a predetermined result (various jackpots). Therefore, the player continues the high probability lottery mode and the second control mode until a predetermined result (various jackpots) is obtained in the lottery for the ball entry unit, so the result of the lottery for the ball entry unit is the second result. Play the game while expecting (8R probability variation jackpot) and the high probability lottery mode to continue. In addition, since the player does not increase or decrease the number of game balls held, the player can concentrate on the type of the result when the result of the lottery for the ball entry results in a predetermined result (various jackpots).

  Furthermore, according to the feature V1, the high probability lottery mode is not started when the result of the ball entry lottery becomes the third result (4R normal jackpot B), but the third control mode (third high frequency support mode ) Is started. When the third control mode is started, entry of gaming balls into the entry portion is promoted, so execution of the entry lottery is promoted. And, since the bowling rate in the third high frequency support mode exceeds 1, the gaming balls held by the player increase. In the third control mode, the result of the ball entry lottery does not reach a predetermined result (various jackpots), and ends when the number of executions of the ball entry lottery reaches a specified number (100). Therefore, the third control mode is ended while the player continues the third control mode until the number of times of execution of the lottery for ball entry reaches the prescribed number and continues the third control mode to increase the number of game balls held. The game is played while expecting that it is desired that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section be a predetermined result (various jackpots) by before. And, even if the result of the ball entry lottery does not become the predetermined result (various big hits) by the number of times the number of execution of the ball entry lottery reaches the specified number (100 times), the player A satisfaction can be obtained that the third control mode in which the game balls increase is continued for the longest period.

  As described above, according to the feature V1, since it is possible to create a new game characteristic of giving a player various senses of expectation by effectively using the three control modes, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine according to feature V1,
The ball entering part variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball entering part variation time which is the time when the identification information is variably displayed in the lottery result display means for the ball entry section,
The ball entry variation time setting means
In a period in which the third control mode is being executed,
A gaming machine, wherein a longer time is set as the variation period for the ball entry portion as the number of times of the lottery for the ball entry portion executed after the third control mode is started increases.

  According to the feature V2, as the number of times of execution of the lottery for entering the ball approaches the specified number, the variation time for the set ball becomes longer, so the period in which the third control mode in which the game balls increase is continued It will be longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of frustration of the player that the result of the ball entry lottery does not become the predetermined result even though the number of times of execution of the ball entry lottery is approaching the specified number.

[Feature V3]
A game machine according to feature V1 or feature V2, wherein
The ball entering part variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball entering part variation time which is the time when the identification information is variably displayed in the lottery result display means for the ball entry section,
The above-mentioned lottery execution means for the ball entry section
Even if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is not the predetermined result (various big hits), the condition establishment result (outlier result (reach result) if the predetermined condition (reach occurrence condition) is satisfied. Occurrence)) and when the predetermined condition is not established, it is determined that the condition is not established (outgoing result (reach not occurred)),
The ball entry variation time setting means
In a period in which the third control mode is being executed,
The length of the fluctuation period for ball entry corresponding to the lottery for ball entry where the result of the lottery for ball entry becomes the result of fulfilling the condition (outgoing result (reach occurrence)),
More than the length of the fluctuation period for ball entry corresponding to the lottery for ball entry where the result of the lottery for ball entry becomes the result of not satisfying the condition (outgoing result (reach non-occurrence)),
A game machine characterized by setting for a long time.

  According to the feature V3, when the result of the lottery for entering the ball is the condition satisfaction result (outfall result (reach occurrence)), from the case where the condition non-approval result (outlier result (reach nonoccurrence)) Also, a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time for ball entry. As the number of times the long fluctuation time is set as the ball entry fluctuation time increases, the time required for the number of times of execution of the ball entry lottery to reach the specified number increases. As a result, since the period in which the third control mode continues is also extended, the period in which the player's game balls increase is also extended. Therefore, since it is possible to create a new game characteristic that the number of game balls increases as the number of times that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section becomes the condition satisfaction result (outgoing result (reach occurrence)), the interest of the game is improved. Can be

[Feature V4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3.
The control means
Transition start waiting time until the ball entry unit starts transition from the first state to the second state after the display means starts the variable display By setting the fluctuation time of 38 + the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b to different lengths for each of the control modes,
The first control mode (the first frequent support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
The second control mode (the second frequent support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
The third control mode (third frequent support mode in the eleventh embodiment);
A game machine characterized by being executable.

  According to the feature V4, by changing the transition start waiting time, the first control mode in which the ball out ratio is less than 1, the second control mode in which the ball out ratio is 1, and the ball out ratio of 1 And the third control mode can be executed, so that it is possible to add intonation to the game and to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the feature V4, for example, even when the time when the ball entry portion is maintained in the second state (the opening time of the open / close door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition If the length of the start waiting time is changed, the above-described three control modes can be executed, so that the design freedom of the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature V5]
The gaming machine according to feature V4,
Alternating distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) for alternately distributing the reached gaming balls into two paths;
The first route (route R1 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured to allow the distributed gaming balls to pass through the passage section;
The second route (route R2 (FIG. 70) in the eleventh embodiment) configured such that the distributed gaming balls can not pass through the passing portion;
Equipped with
The alternating distribution means is
While distributing one game ball which reached to the first route,
One game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path is distributed to the second path,
One game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the second path is configured to be distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed gaming balls can enter the ball entry portion when the ball entry portion is in the second state. Is configured and
In a situation where gaming balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals with a predetermined firing strength by the firing means, the number of gaming balls entering the ball entering portion per predetermined time is set for each of the control modes. It changes with the length of the said transition start waiting time. The game machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature V5, the first control mode in which the ball out ratio is less than 1 and the second control mode in which the ball out ratio is 1 by the simple configuration using only one alternate distribution means; It is possible to execute a third control mode in which the ball exit rate exceeds one. That is, since the mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, it is possible to effectively utilize the game area, such as disposing other features in the vacant game area.

[Feature V6]
A game machine according to feature V4 or feature V5, wherein
The control means
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed, to the time when the ball entry unit starts the transition from the first state to the second state (open / close door 208b in the eleventh embodiment It is possible to set the length of the open standby time) to a different length for each of the control modes.

  According to the feature V6, the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the common drawing unit 38 + the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b) is until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means after the game ball passes through the passing portion Time (the fluctuation time of the general drawing unit 38) and the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (open / close door 208b And the open waiting time of the Therefore, according to the feature V6, the time from when the game ball passes through the passage part until the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38) is set to the same length. Even when there is a result of lottery, the time until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening and closing the open / close door 208b) is different length By setting it to, it is possible to set the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 + the waiting time for opening the open / close door 208b) to different lengths. That is, according to the feature V6, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry portion starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (opening standby time of the open / close door 208b) Changing the transition start waiting time (variation time of the drawing unit 38 + opening standby time of the open / close door 208b) and changing the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion Can. As a result, it is possible to realize a first control mode in which the ball out rate is less than 1, a second control mode in which the ball out rate is 1, and a third control mode in which the ball out rate exceeds 1 It becomes possible.

<Feature W group>
The feature W group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment.

[Feature W1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A ball entry unit (a second start opening 208a in the eleventh embodiment), which allows the game ball flowing through the game area to enter the ball;
In the state of the ball entering portion, the first state in which the game ball can not or can not enter the ball into the ball entering portion, and the ball entering the ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. State transition means (open / close door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning to the second state which is the state;
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball having entered the ball entry portion;
A ball entering lottery drawing execution unit that executes the ball entering lottery based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entering part;
The variable display of identification information is started based on the game ball having entered the ball, and the variable display is ended and the result of the lottery for the ball by the lottery for executing the ball is And a lottery result display means (special drawing unit 37) for the ball entry unit for stopping and displaying the corresponding identification information;
Special gaming state transition means for transitioning to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) in which a bonus is given to the player based on the result of the lottery for the ball entry portion becoming a predetermined result (various big hits);
Start means for starting a high probability lottery mode (high probability mode) in which the probability that the result of the lottery for the ball entry part is the predetermined result (various big hits) is improved;
Ending means for ending the high probability lottery mode;
A passage portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which game balls circulating the game area can pass;
Passage part lottery execution means for executing a passage part lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the passage part;
The variation display of the identification information is started based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion, and the variation display is ended, and the identification information corresponding to the result of the passing portion lottery by the passing portion lottery execution means And a lottery result display means (general drawing unit 38) for the passage section for stopping display of
Control means for causing the ball entering part to transition from the first state to the second state by controlling the state transition means based on the result of the passage part lottery by the passage part lottery execution means ,
Equipped with
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where the game balls are fired continuously at a predetermined interval with a predetermined firing intensity by the launch means is defined as the ball exit rate In the case of
The control means
There are a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
The game ball non-increasing control mode (the first high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment, the second high frequency support mode) in which the ball exit rate is 1 or less;
The game ball increase control mode (the third high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball exit rate exceeds 1;
Is feasible and
In the gaming ball non-incrementing control mode, the result of the lottery for the ball entering part is the first result (10R probability variation big hit A, 10R probability variation big hit B in the 12th embodiment (FIG. 98) of the predetermined results (various jackpots) The number of times for the ball entering lottery performed after the game ball non-increasing control mode is started, based on the fact that the game ball non-increasing control mode is started, the predetermined result of the ball entering lottery is End based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without becoming a result (various jackpots),
In the game ball increase control mode, the result of the lottery for the ball entering part is the second result (10R probability variation big hit C (FIG. 98) in the twelfth embodiment) among the predetermined results (various big hits) Starting with the game ball increase control mode, and the number of the ball entering lottery performed after the game ball increase control mode is started, if the result of the ball entering lottery is the predetermined result (various jackpots) End based on reaching the specified number of times (100 times) without
The high probability lottery mode is based on the result of the lottery for the ball entering part being the first result (10R positive variation big hit A, 10R positive variation big hit B) or the second result (10R positive variation big hit C). The number of times for the ball entering lottery performed after the high probability lottery mode is started, the number of times the result for the ball entering lottery is not the predetermined result (various jackpots), and the prescribed number of times A game machine characterized by ending based on reaching (100 times).

  According to the feature W1, the high probability lottery mode is started and the game ball non-increasing control mode (the first one (10R probability variation big hit A or 10R probability variation big hit B)) as a result of the lottery for entering the ball 1) The high frequency support mode or the second high frequency support mode is started. When the high probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the ball entry lottery is a predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved. In addition, when the game ball non-increasing control mode is started, entry of the game ball into the entry portion is promoted, so execution of the entry lottery is promoted. However, since the bowling rate in the gaming ball non-increasing control mode is 1 or less, the gaming ball held by the player does not increase. And in the high probability lottery mode and the game ball non-incrementing control mode, the result of the ball entering lottery does not become a predetermined result (various big hits), and the number of times of executing the ball entering lottery is a prescribed number (100). It ends when it reaches. Therefore, the player gets a predetermined result (various big hits) in the lottery for entering the ball as early as possible before the number of times the lottery for entering the ball reaches the specified number of times and the high probability lottery mode ends. Play while expecting you

  Furthermore, according to the feature W1, when the result of the ball entry lottery becomes the second result (10R probability variation big hit C), the high probability lottery mode is started, and the game ball increase control mode (third high frequency support) Mode) is started. When the high probability lottery mode is started, the probability that the result of the ball entry lottery is a predetermined result (various jackpots) is improved. In addition, when the game ball increase control mode is started, entry of the game ball into the entry portion is promoted, so execution of the entry lottery is promoted. Furthermore, since the bowling rate in the game ball increase control mode exceeds 1, the number of game balls held by the player increases. Then, in the high probability lottery mode and the game ball increase control mode, the result of the ball entering lottery does not become a predetermined result (various big hits), and the number of executions of the ball entering lottery reaches the prescribed number (100 times) Then it ends. Therefore, while the player continues the game ball increase control mode until the number of times the lottery number for the ball entry lottery has reached the prescribed number, and increases the number of game balls held, the number of times for the lottery for ball segment is prescribed. By the time the number of times is reached and the high probability lottery mode and the game ball increase control mode are ended, the game is played while expecting that the result of the ball entry lottery is a predetermined result (various big hits). And, even if the result of the ball entry lottery does not become the predetermined result (various big hits) by the number of times the number of execution of the ball entry lottery reaches the specified number (100 times), the player It is possible to obtain a satisfaction that the game ball increase control mode in which the game balls increase is continued for the longest period.

  As described above, according to the feature W1, since it is possible to create a new game characteristic of giving the player various senses of expectation in a period in which the high probability lottery mode limited to the specified number of times is being executed, It is possible to improve interest.

[Feature W2]
The gaming machine according to the feature W1,
The ball entering part variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball entering part variation time which is the time when the identification information is variably displayed in the lottery result display means for the ball entry section,
The ball entry variation time setting means
During the game ball increase control mode is being executed,
A game machine characterized by setting a long time as the variation time for ball entry, as the number of times of the lottery for ball entry performed after the game ball increase control mode is started increases.

  According to the feature W2, as the number of times of execution of the lottery for entering the ball approaches the specified number, the variation time for the ball is set, so that the game ball increase control mode in which the game ball increases is continued. It will be longer. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of frustration of the player that the result of the ball entry lottery does not become the predetermined result even though the number of times of execution of the ball entry lottery is approaching the specified number.

[Feature W3]
The gaming machine according to the feature W1 or the feature W2, wherein
The ball entering part variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball entering part variation time which is the time when the identification information is variably displayed in the lottery result display means for the ball entry section,
The above-mentioned lottery execution means for the ball entry section
Even if it is determined that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section is not the predetermined result (various big hits), the condition establishment result (outlier result (reach result) if the predetermined condition (reach occurrence condition) is satisfied. Occurrence)) and when the predetermined condition is not established, it is determined that the condition is not established (outgoing result (reach not occurred)),
The ball entry variation time setting means
During the game ball increase control mode is being executed,
The length of the fluctuation period for ball entry corresponding to the lottery for ball entry where the result of the lottery for ball entry becomes the result of fulfilling the condition (outgoing result (reach occurrence)),
More than the length of the fluctuation period for ball entry corresponding to the lottery for ball entry where the result of the lottery for ball entry becomes the result of not satisfying the condition (outgoing result (reach non-occurrence)),
A game machine characterized by setting for a long time.

  According to the feature W3, when the result of the lottery for entering the ball is the condition satisfaction result (outfall result (reach occurrence)), from the case where the condition non-approval result (outlier result (reach nonoccurrence)) Also, a long fluctuation time is set as the fluctuation time for ball entry. As the number of times the long fluctuation time is set as the ball entry fluctuation time increases, the time required for the number of times of execution of the ball entry lottery to reach the specified number increases. As a result, since the period during which the game ball increase control mode continues is also extended, the period during which the player's game balls increase is also extended. Therefore, since it is possible to create a new game characteristic that the number of game balls increases as the number of times that the result of the lottery for the ball entry section becomes the condition satisfaction result (outgoing result (reach occurrence)), the interest of the game is improved. Can be

[Feature W4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W3.
The control means
Transition start waiting time until the ball entry unit starts transition from the first state to the second state after the display means starts the variable display By setting the fluctuation time of 38 + the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b to different lengths for each of the control modes,
The game ball non-increasing control mode (the first high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment, the second high frequency support mode);
The game ball increase control mode (third high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment);
A game machine characterized by being executable.

  According to the feature W4, by changing the transition start waiting time, the game ball non-increment control mode in which the ball out rate is 1 or less and the game ball increase control mode in which the ball out rate exceeds 1 may be executed. Since it is possible, it is possible to add intonation to the game and to improve the interest of the game. Further, according to the feature W4, for example, even when the time during which the ball entry portion maintains the second state (the opening time of the open / close door 208b in the twelfth embodiment) is set to the same length, the transition If the length of the start waiting time is changed, the above-described two control modes can be executed, so that the design freedom of the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature W5]
The gaming machine according to the feature W4,
Alternate distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70)) for alternately distributing the reached game balls into two paths;
A first path (path R1 (FIG. 70)) configured to allow the distributed gaming balls to pass through the passage section;
A second path (path R2 (FIG. 70)) configured such that the distributed gaming balls can not pass through the passage section;
Equipped with
The alternating distribution means is
While distributing one game ball which reached to the first route,
One game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path is distributed to the second path,
One game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the second path is configured to be distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed gaming balls can enter the ball entry portion when the ball entry portion is in the second state. Is configured and
In a situation where gaming balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals with a predetermined firing strength by the firing means, the number of gaming balls entering the ball entering portion per predetermined time is set for each of the control modes. It changes with the length of the said transition start waiting time. The game machine characterized by the above-mentioned.

  According to the feature W5, the game ball non-increasing control mode in which the bowling rate is 1 or less, and the game ball increasing control mode in which the bowling rate exceeds 1 by a simple configuration using only one alternate distribution means Can be performed. That is, since the mechanism for executing the two control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, it is possible to effectively utilize the game area, such as disposing other features in the vacant game area.

[Feature W6]
The gaming machine according to the feature W4 or the feature W5,
The control means
The time from when the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed, to the time when the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (the open / close door 208b in the twelfth embodiment It is possible to set the length of the open standby time) to a different length for each of the control modes.

  According to the feature W6, the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the common drawing unit 38 + the opening standby time of the open / close door 208b) is until the lottery result is displayed by the display means after the gaming ball passes Time (the fluctuation time of the general drawing unit 38) and the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (open / close door 208b And the open waiting time of the Therefore, according to the feature W5, the time from when the game ball passes through the passing part to when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means (the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38) is set to the same length. Even when there is a result of lottery, the time until the ball entry unit starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (waiting time for opening and closing the open / close door 208b) is different length By setting it to, it is possible to set the transition start waiting time (the fluctuation time of the drawing unit 38 + the waiting time for opening the open / close door 208b) to different lengths. That is, according to the feature W5, the time from when the result of the lottery is displayed by the display means to when the ball entry portion starts transitioning from the first state to the second state (opening standby time of the open / close door 208b) Changing the transition start waiting time (variation time of the drawing unit 38 + opening standby time of the open / close door 208b) and changing the number of game balls entering the ball entry portion Can. As a result, it becomes possible to realize the gaming ball non-increasing control mode in which the bowling rate is 1 or less and the gaming ball increasing control mode in which the bowling rate exceeds 1.

[Feature W7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W6, wherein
The control means
The game ball non-increasing mode (the first high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment, the second high frequency support mode) in which the above-mentioned ball hitting rate is 1 or less,
The game ball reduction control mode (the first high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball release rate is less than 1;
The game ball maintenance control mode (the second high frequency support mode in the twelfth embodiment) in which the ball exit rate is 1;
A game machine characterized by being executable.

  According to the feature W7, when the game ball reduction control mode is started, entry of the game ball into the entry portion is promoted, so execution of the entry lottery is promoted. However, since the ball expansion rate in the game ball reduction control mode is less than 1, the game balls held by the player are decreasing. Therefore, the player plays the game while expecting to have a predetermined result (various jackpots) as early as possible in the ball lottery for the ball entry part as much as possible to minimize the decrease in the number of game balls held. As described above, according to the feature W7, since various expectations can be given to the player, it is possible to improve the interest of the game ball.

<Feature X group>
The feature X group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the thirteenth embodiment.

[Feature X1]
Launching means (game ball launching mechanism 81) for firing game balls toward the game area;
A ball entry unit (a second start opening 208a in the eleventh embodiment), which allows the game ball flowing through the game area to enter the ball;
In the state of the ball entering portion, the first state in which the game ball can not or can not enter the ball into the ball entering portion, and the ball entering the ball into the ball entering portion is possible or easy. State transition means (open / close door 208b in the eleventh embodiment) for transitioning to the second state which is the state;
Payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball as a prize ball based on the game ball having entered the ball entry portion;
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the ball entry portion;
A lottery unit for the ball entry unit that executes a lottery for the ball entry unit based on the acquired special information;
The variable display of identification information is started based on the execution of the lottery for the ball entry section, and the variable display is ended, and the identification information corresponding to the result of the lottery for the ball entry section by the lottery section for the ball entry section And the lottery result display means for the ball entry unit (special drawing unit 37) for stopping display of
A ball entry variation time setting means for setting the length of the ball entry fluctuation time (variation time of the special drawing unit 37) which is a time for the identification information to be variably displayed in the lottery result display means for the golf balls;
A passage portion (through gate 206 in the eleventh embodiment) through which game balls circulating the game area can pass;
Passage part lottery execution means for executing a passage part lottery based on the passage of the game ball through the passage part;
The variation display of the identification information is started based on the passage of the game ball through the passing portion, and the variation display is ended, and the identification information corresponding to the result of the passing portion lottery by the passing portion lottery execution means And a lottery result display means (general drawing unit 38) for the passage section for stopping display of
While setting the length (the fluctuation time of the spread unit 38) of the fluctuation time for passage part which is the time when the identification information is variably displayed in the lottery result display means for the passage part, after the fluctuation time for passage part has elapsed A control means for causing the ball entering part to transition from the first state to the second state by controlling the state transition means based on the result of the passage part lottery by the passage part lottery execution means When,
A variation time table for the ball entering unit in which the length of the variation time for the ball entering unit is stored corresponding to the number of times of execution of the lottery for the ball entering unit (table A for special drawing unit in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102) And the passage time table for fluctuation (the general drawing unit table A in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102) in which the length of the passage time for the passage is stored corresponding to the number of times the lottery for the ball entry is performed. Table storage means for storing as a set of table groups (a variable time table set A (FIG. 102) for high frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment), and.
Equipped with
The ratio of the number of game balls paid out to the number of game balls fired in a situation where the game balls are fired continuously at a predetermined interval with a predetermined firing intensity by the launch means is defined as the ball exit rate In the case of
The control means
It is possible to execute a plurality of control modes for controlling the state transition means,
By setting the length of the passage part variation time to a different length for each control mode,
The first control mode (the mode shown in FIG. 99 in the high frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) in which the ball expansion rate is less than 1;
The second control mode (the mode shown in FIG. 100 in the high frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment) in which the ball expansion rate is 1;
The third control mode (the mode shown in FIG. 101 of the high-frequency support mode in the thirteenth embodiment), in which the ball shooting rate exceeds 1;
At least two of the control aspects of
In the case where the ball entry variation time setting means sets the length of the ball entry variation time with reference to the ball entry variation time table,
A game machine characterized by setting the length of the fluctuation time for passage section with reference to the fluctuation time table for ball entry unit and the fluctuation time table for passage unit stored as one set of table group.

  According to the feature X1, by setting the length of the passage part fluctuation time (variation time of the drawing unit 38) to a different length for each control mode, the first control in which the ball out ratio is less than 1 At least two control modes of the mode, the second control mode in which the ball out rate is 1 and the third control mode in which the ball out rate is more than 1 can be executed, so It is possible to improve interest.

  Furthermore, according to the feature X1, the length of the passage part fluctuation time and the length of the ball entry fluctuation time are set based on the number of executions of the ball entry lottery (gaming round). And ball extraction rate changes with the length of the set fluctuation time for passage parts. That is, the percentage of ball entry into the ball entry portion changes. Therefore, if the length of the fluctuation time for ball entry suitable for the ball entry ratio of the game ball to the ball entry is stored in advance in the fluctuation time table for ball entry, the lottery for ball entry (game cycle) The variation time for ball entry suitable for the ball entry ratio of the game ball to the ball entry section which changes based on the number of times of execution can be set.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine according to feature X1,
A holding storage unit for holding the special information acquired from the start of the variable display of the identification information by the lottery result display unit for the ball storage section to the end of the stop display, with the specified number as the upper limit;
When the length of the fluctuation time for passing section is set in the fluctuation time table for ball entering part (table A for special drawing unit in the thirteenth embodiment (FIG. 102)), the ball is entered into the ball entering part A game machine characterized in that a fluctuation time longer than an interval between game balls to be played is stored.

  According to the feature X2, since the special information can be always stored in the hold storage unit, it is possible to realize a state in which the lottery for entering a ball is continuously executed without interruption.

[Feature X 3]
A game machine according to feature X1 or feature X2, wherein
The table storage means stores a plurality of the table groups (variation time table sets A and B (FIG. 102) in the thirteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized in that the control means switches the table group to be referred to when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when a small winning is won).

  According to the feature X3, since the table group to be referred to is switched, it is possible to change the variation time for ball entry, the variation time for passing part and the ball exit rate set based on the number of times of execution of lottery for ball entry . Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature X 4]
A game machine according to any one of features X1 to X3, wherein
Alternate distribution means (alternate distribution mechanism 204 (FIG. 70)) for alternately distributing the reached game balls into two paths;
A first path (path R1 (FIG. 70)) configured to allow the distributed gaming balls to pass through the passage section;
A second path (path R2 (FIG. 70)) configured such that the distributed gaming balls can not pass through the passage section;
Equipped with
The alternating distribution means is
While distributing one game ball which reached to the first route,
One game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the first path is distributed to the second path,
One game ball arriving after the game ball distributed to the second path is configured to be distributed to the first path,
The first path and the second path are such that the distributed gaming balls can enter the ball entry portion when the ball entry portion is in the second state. Is configured and
In a situation where gaming balls are continuously fired at predetermined intervals by a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means, the number of gaming balls entering the ball entry unit per predetermined time is the variation time for the passage section A game machine characterized by being different depending on the length of the game.

  According to the feature X4, according to the simple configuration using only one alternate distribution means, the first control mode in which the ball out ratio is less than 1 and the second control mode in which the ball out ratio is 1; It is possible to execute the third control mode in which the ball-fall rate exceeds 1. That is, since the mechanism for executing the three control modes can be realized in a space-saving manner, it is possible to effectively utilize the game area, such as arranging other features in the vacant game area.

  In addition, invention of the said characteristic group A-the characteristic X group solves the following subjects.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, improvements have been made from various points of view such as structure and presentation in order to improve the interest of the game.

  Here, in the above-described gaming machine, further improvement of technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each of the features is described below.

Pachinko game machine: Launching means for launching game balls toward the game area based on the player's shooting operation, and starting ball entry provided in the game area and capable of entering the game balls flowing down the game area An information acquisition unit for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball storage unit;
A game machine comprising: acquisition information storage means for storing special information acquired by the information acquisition means when a game ball enters the starting ball storage portion.

  Throttle type gaming machines such as slot machines: A pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, variable display of the plurality of patterns is started due to the operation of the start operation means, and the cause is due to the operation of the stop operation means And / or a variable display of the plurality of symbols is stopped when a predetermined time elapses, and a game machine which provides a bonus to the player according to the symbols after the stop.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment and modifications, and can be realized in various configurations without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments corresponding to the technical features in the respective forms described in the section of the summary of the invention, and the technical features in the modified examples are for solving some or all of the problems described above, or Replacements or combinations can be made as appropriate to achieve part or all of the effects. Also, if the technical features are not described as essential in the present specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine main body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. Window portion 19: Glass unit 20: Upper plate 21: Lower plate 22: Discharge port 23: Lever 24: Directional operation button 25: Operation handle 30: Game board 31 ... induction rail 31a ... inner rail section 31b ... outer rail section 32 ... general winning opening 33 ... first starting port 34 ... second starting port 34a ... electric Character 34b ... Motorized role drive 35 ... Through gate 36 ... Variable winning device 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening door 36c ... Variable winning drive 37 ... Special Figure unit 37a ... 1st result display section 37b ... 2nd result display section 37c ... 1st suspension display section 37d ... 2nd suspension display section 38 ... popular drawing unit 39 ... round Display 40: Variable display unit 41: Symbol display 41a ... display surface 41 aL ... display area 41 aS ... display area 42 ... nail 43 ... out port 45 ... main display section 46 ... speaker 47 ... various lamps 51 .. . 1st control unit 52 2nd control unit 53 3rd control unit 54 tank 55 tank rail 56 case rail 60 main controller 61 main Control board 62: Main side MPU
63: Main side ROM
63a ... success or failure table storage area 63b ... distribution table storage area 63c ... reach determination table storage area 63d ... display continuation time table storage area 63e ... stop result table storage area 63f ... Command information storage area 64: Main RAM
64a ... lottery counter buffer 64b ... holding ball storage area 64b ... holding information storage area 64c ... electric wave holding area 64d ... various counter areas 64e ... various flag storage areas 67a .. .Various detection sensors 70 ... Payout control device 71 ... Payout device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball firing mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Voice Light emission control device 91 ... sound emission control board 92 ... sound light side MPU
93: Sound and light side ROM
93a ... table storage area for pending confirmation 93b ... presence feeling notice occurrence table storage area 93c ... notice effect staging table storage area for feeling of presence notice 93d ... stop symbol table storage area for notice of appearance 93e ... variation display pattern table storage area 94 ... sound side RAM
94a ... Various flag storage area 94b ... Various counter area 94c ... Lottery counter area 94d ... Visual sensation notice advance notice memory area 100 ... Display control device 101 ... Display control board 102: Display side MPU
103: Program ROM
104 ... work RAM
105 ... VDP
106: Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
200 second starting opening unit 202 opening 204 alternate distribution mechanism 204a central piece 204b left piece 204c right piece 204d rotation shaft 204e ... left side holding part 204f ... right side holding part 206 ... through gate 208 ... opening and closing ball entry device 208a ... second starting opening 208b ... opening and closing door 208c ... induction path 300. .. 2nd start port unit 300B ... 2nd start port unit 300C ... 2nd start port unit 300D ... 2nd start port unit 300E ... 2nd start port unit 300F ... 2nd start Mouth unit 302 ... opening 304 ... alternate distribution mechanism (first alternate distribution mechanism)
304a ... central piece 304b ... left piece 304c ... right piece 304d ... rotating shaft 304e ... left holding part 304f ... right holding part 305 ... second alternating distribution Mechanism 305A Third alternating distribution mechanism 305a Center piece 305b Left piece 305c Right piece 305d Rotating shaft 305e Left holder 305f Right Holding part 306 ... through gate 308 ... opening and closing entry device 308a ... second starting opening 308b ... opening door 308c ... induction path

Claims (1)

Launching means for launching game balls;
An entering means capable of entering a game ball which has been launched,
Passing means through which the launched game ball can pass;
The state of the ball entering means is a first state in which the game ball can not or can not enter the ball into the ball entering means, and the ball can be easily or easily entered into the ball entering means. State transition means for transitioning to a second state which is a state;
Lottery execution means for executing a lottery when the game ball passes through the passage means;
Control means for controlling the state transition means based on the result of the lottery;
Distribution means for distributing the reached game balls into a plurality of routes,
A first path configured to allow the distributed gaming balls to pass through the passing means;
A second path configured such that the distributed gaming balls can not pass through the passing means;
Equipped with
The distribution means is
While distributing the reached game ball to the first route,
The game balls arriving later than the game balls distributed to the first path are distributed to the second path,
The game balls arriving after the game balls distributed to the second path are configured to be distributed to the first path,
The first and second paths are such that the distributed gaming balls can enter the ball entering means when the ball entering means is in the second state. A game machine characterized in that it is configured.